[go: up one dir, main page]

WO1996006188A1 - Peptide librairies as a source of syngenes - Google Patents

Peptide librairies as a source of syngenes Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO1996006188A1
WO1996006188A1 PCT/US1995/010523 US9510523W WO9606188A1 WO 1996006188 A1 WO1996006188 A1 WO 1996006188A1 US 9510523 W US9510523 W US 9510523W WO 9606188 A1 WO9606188 A1 WO 9606188A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
binding
protein
nucleic acid
dna
ligand
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US1995/010523
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
John D. Rodwell
Dana M. Fowlkes
Original Assignee
Cytogen Corporation
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Cytogen Corporation filed Critical Cytogen Corporation
Priority to EP95929609A priority Critical patent/EP0777748A1/en
Priority to AU33308/95A priority patent/AU3330895A/en
Priority to JP8508213A priority patent/JPH10504718A/en
Publication of WO1996006188A1 publication Critical patent/WO1996006188A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C40—COMBINATORIAL TECHNOLOGY
    • C40B—COMBINATORIAL CHEMISTRY; LIBRARIES, e.g. CHEMICAL LIBRARIES
    • C40B40/00—Libraries per se, e.g. arrays, mixtures
    • C40B40/02—Libraries contained in or displayed by microorganisms, e.g. bacteria or animal cells; Libraries contained in or displayed by vectors, e.g. plasmids; Libraries containing only microorganisms or vectors
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/435—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • C07K14/46—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates
    • C07K14/47—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates from mammals
    • C07K14/4701—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates from mammals not used
    • C07K14/4702—Regulators; Modulating activity
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N15/00—Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
    • C12N15/09—Recombinant DNA-technology
    • C12N15/10—Processes for the isolation, preparation or purification of DNA or RNA
    • C12N15/1034—Isolating an individual clone by screening libraries
    • C12N15/1037—Screening libraries presented on the surface of microorganisms, e.g. phage display, E. coli display
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N15/00—Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
    • C12N15/09—Recombinant DNA-technology
    • C12N15/11—DNA or RNA fragments; Modified forms thereof; Non-coding nucleic acids having a biological activity
    • C12N15/62—DNA sequences coding for fusion proteins
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K48/00—Medicinal preparations containing genetic material which is inserted into cells of the living body to treat genetic diseases; Gene therapy
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K2319/00—Fusion polypeptide
    • C07K2319/01—Fusion polypeptide containing a localisation/targetting motif
    • C07K2319/02—Fusion polypeptide containing a localisation/targetting motif containing a signal sequence
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K2319/00—Fusion polypeptide
    • C07K2319/61—Fusion polypeptide containing an enzyme fusion for detection (lacZ, luciferase)
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K2319/00—Fusion polypeptide
    • C07K2319/70—Fusion polypeptide containing domain for protein-protein interaction
    • C07K2319/73—Fusion polypeptide containing domain for protein-protein interaction containing coiled-coiled motif (leucine zippers)
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K2319/00—Fusion polypeptide
    • C07K2319/70—Fusion polypeptide containing domain for protein-protein interaction
    • C07K2319/735—Fusion polypeptide containing domain for protein-protein interaction containing a domain for self-assembly, e.g. a viral coat protein (includes phage display)

Definitions

  • the present invention relates generally to synthetic gene sequences ("syngenes”), particularly for use in gene therapy.
  • Syngenes are nucleic acids that comprise synthetic gene sequences identified by screening synthetic random peptide libraries, for peptides that bind a ligand of choice.
  • the synthetic gene sequences together with, optionally, other DNA sequences that target the synthetic gene sequences or their encoded proteins to particular locations in vivo or intracellularly, or that contain processing
  • the syngenes are used, for example, in gene therapy to supply, via expression of their encoded proteins, a therapeutic product.
  • the invention relates to protein or peptide products of syngenes and their therapeutic and diagnostic uses.
  • Gene therapy today is often directed to the replacement of a product of a defective gene.
  • a human adenosine deaminase gene has been engineered into skin fibroblasts of mice through the use of a retroviral vector (Palmer et al., 1988,
  • the human ⁇ -globin gene has been transferred into mouse bone marrow cells and mouse erythroleukemia cells as a model for the treatment of ⁇ -thalassemia and sickle cell anemia (Novak et al., 1990, Proc. Natl. Acad.
  • a defective gene product examples include: the delivering of the human cystic fibrosis transmembrane conductance regulator via a retrovirus into airway epithelia of mice (Hyde et al., 1993, Nature 362:250-255); in a rabbit model, the transfer of human low density lipoprotein receptor cDNA into hepatocytes (Wilson et al., 1992, J. Biol. Chem. 267:963-967); the transfer of human Factor IX cDNA into skin fibroblasts,
  • mice followed by engraftment of the fibroblasts into mice (Louis and Verma, 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85:3150-3154).
  • gene therapy can also be used to provide a cell or an organism with a new function.
  • examples of such a use include: transferring the human growth hormone gene via a retrovirus into human keratinocytes and then grafting the keratinocytes into nude mice. (Morgan et al., 1987, Science 237:1476-1479);
  • Another aspect of gene therapy involves the inhibition or enhancement of the activity of a
  • the preselected gene is one that is involved in some aspect of a diseased state.
  • the ability to modulate the activity of such a gene would be useful in the treatment of the diseased state.
  • gene therapy is limited by the
  • a further problem is the possibility that no human gene may possess the desired function. Even if a human gene is found that has the desired function, that gene may not have the desired specificity; it may be too large to be easily used in current gene therapy protocols; it may be encoded by multiple exons; and fragments of the gene may not be suitable for use in gene therapy because the gene's binding regions may be too complex for fragments of the endogenous protein to mimic its function. In order to avoid these problems, it would be highly desirable to have a method of producing genes for use in gene therapy that does not rely on the human genome as a source of those genes.
  • peptide libraries have generally been constructed by one of two approaches. According to one approach, peptides have been chemically
  • soluble fusion proteins expressed in biological systems as either soluble fusion proteins or viral capsid fusion proteins.
  • M13 is a filamentous bacteriophage that has been a workhorse in molecular biology laboratories for the past 20 years.
  • M13 viral particles consist of six different capsid proteins and one copy of the viral genome, as a single-stranded circular DNA molecule. Once the M13 DNA has been introduced into a host cell such as E. coli , it is converted into double-stranded, circular DNA. The viral DNA carries a second origin of replication that is used to generate the single- stranded DNA found in the viral particles.
  • the M13 virus is neither lysogenic nor lytic like other bacteriophage (e.g., ⁇ ); cells, once infected, chronically release virus. This feature leads to high titers of virus in infected cultures, i.e., 10 12 pfu/ml.
  • the genome of the M13 phage is ⁇ 8000
  • the viral capsid protein, protein III (pIII) is responsible for infection of bacteria.
  • pIII protein III
  • the pillin protein encoded by the F factor interacts with pIII protein and is responsible for phage uptake.
  • all E. coli hosts for M13 virus are considered male because they carry the F factor.
  • Several investigators have determined from mutational analysis that the 406 amino acid long pIII capsid protein has two domains. The C-terminus anchors the protein to the viral coat, while portions of the
  • N-terminus of pIII are essential for interaction with the E. coli pillin protein (Crissman, J.W. and Smith, G.P., 1984, Virology 132: 445-455).
  • N-terminus of the pIII protein has been shown to be necessary for viral infection, the extreme N-terminus of the mature protein does tolerate alterations.
  • George Smith published experiments reporting the use of the pIII protein of bacteriophage M13 as an experimental system for expressing a heterologous protein on the viral coat surface (Smith, G.P., 1985, Science 228: 1315-1317). It was later recognized, independently by two groups, that the M13 phage pIII gene display system could be a useful one for mapping antibody epitopes. De la Cruz, V., et al., (1988, J. Biol. Chem. 263: 4318-4322) cloned and expressed segments of the cDNA encoding the Plasmodium
  • biopanning in which mixtures of recombinant phage were incubated with biotinylated monoclonal antibodies, and phage-antibody complexes could be specifically recovered with streptavidin-coated
  • Biol. 227:711-718 described a phage display library, expressing decapeptides.
  • the starting DNA was
  • oligonucleotide comprising the degenerate codons [NN(G/T)] 10 (SEQ ID NO: 2) with a self-complementary 3' terminus.
  • This sequence in forming a hairpin, creates a self-priming replication site which could be used by T4 DNA polymerase to generate the complementary strand.
  • the double- stranded DNA was cleaved at the Sfii sites at the 5' terminus and hairpin for cloning into the fUSE5 vector described by Scott and Smith, supra.
  • the protein pVIII is a major M13 viral capsid protein and interacts with the single stranded DNA of M13 viral particles at its C-terminus. It is 50 amino acids long and exists in approximately 2,700 copies per particle.
  • N-terminus of the protein is exposed and will tolerate insertions, although large inserts have been reported to disrupt the assembly of pVIII fusion proteins into viral particles (Cesareni, 1992, FEBS Lett. 307:66- 70).
  • a phagemid system has been utilized.
  • Bacterial cells carrying the phagemid are infected with helper phage and secrete viral particles that have a mixture of both wild-type and pVIII fusion capsid molecules.
  • pVIII has also served as a site for expressing peptides on the surface of M13 viral particles.
  • Plasmodium falciparum major surface antigen corresponding to different segments of the Plasmodium falciparum major surface antigen have been cloned and expressed in the comparable gene of the filamentous bacteriophage fd (Greenwood et al., 1991, J. Mol.
  • Ladner et al. disclose the use of oligonucleotide ligands to screen a phage display library in which known, naturally occurring DNA binding proteins have been cloned. Following mutagenesis of certain defined positions in the sequences of the naturally occurring DNA binding proteins, stronger binding versions of those proteins were isolated.
  • Another example of the screening of a non-random phage display library with an oligonucleotide is given in Rebar and Pabo, 1993, Science 263:671-673. This work resulted in the isolation of variants of known zinc finger DNA binding proteins.
  • Rebar and Pabo do not disclose the use of random peptide libraries that are totally synthetic.
  • oligonucleotides have not been used to screen a totally synthetic, random, phage display peptide library.
  • a common goal of screening peptide libraries has generally been to find a peptide with a desired biological effect and (1) use that peptide directly; (2) use the peptide as a basis for designing
  • syngenes is especially advantageous in cases where use of a long peptide (>20 amino acids) is necessary. In such cases, making an appropriate peptidomimetic is difficult or impossible.
  • Ladner does not, however, disclose the use of totally synthetic random peptide libraries.
  • Ladner stresses the use of peptide display libraries that are derived from naturally occurring sequences (in this instance, sequences encoding known binding proteins) by in vitro mutagenesis of these sequences.
  • sequences encoding known binding proteins sequences encoding known binding proteins
  • the present invention relates generally to synthetic gene sequences ("syngenes''), particularly for use in gene therapy.
  • Syngenes are nucleic acids that comprise synthetic gene sequences identified by screening random peptide libraries for peptides that bind a ligand of choice.
  • the synthetic gene sequences are cloned into suitable expression vectors together with, optionally, other DNA sequences that target the synthetic gene sequences or their encoded proteins to particular locations in vivo or intracellularly, or that contain processing signals, or that code for other peptides or amino acid sequences.
  • the syngenes are used, for example, in gene therapy to supply a therapeutic product via expression of their encoded proteins.
  • the invention relates to protein or peptide products of syngenes and their therapeutic and diagnostic uses.
  • compositions comprising syngenes or their encoded peptides are also provided.
  • the invention provides methods of identifying syngenes that bind to a
  • the ligand of choice is a transcriptional regulatory site, a transcription factor that binds to a transcriptional regulatory site, or a binding partner/inhibitor of the transcription factor. In one aspect, such a
  • the transcriptional regulatory site is an NF- ⁇ B, AP-1, or ATF binding site.
  • the transcription factor is NF- ⁇ B, AP-1, or ATF.
  • the present invention provides methods for identifying syngenes that inhibit or enhance the transcriptional activity of a wide variety of naturally occurring genes, preferably with a specificity not found in natural systems. Syngenes are also useful for modulating signal transduction pathways, metabolic pathways, RNA translation, and intracellular trafficking. In the cell membrane, syngenes may be used to modulate the activity of membrane receptors, ion channels, or exocytotic and endocytotic pathways. In tissue, syngenes, via expression of their encoded proteins, may be used to regulate cell/cell signalling and transcytosis.
  • Syngenes may be used to regulate cell adhesion or cell/cell
  • Figure 1 (A-F) schematically illustrates construction of TSAR libraries.
  • Figure 1A (A-F) schematically illustrates construction of TSAR libraries.
  • FIG. 1B schematically depicts the synthesis and assembly of synthetic oligonucleotides for the linear libraries and bimolecular libraries illustrated in Figure 1B and 1C.
  • N A, C, G or T;
  • B G, T or C and
  • V G, A, or C;
  • n and m are integers, such that 10 ⁇ n ⁇ 100 and 10 ⁇ m ⁇ 100.
  • Figure 1D-F schematically depicts representative libraries which are designed to be semirigid libraries. The synthesis and assembly of the oligonucleotides for the semirigid libraries are as in Figure 1A with modifications to include
  • Figure 2 schematically depicts an exemplary mRNA expressed by a syngene.
  • Figure 3 is a schematic depiction of a shuttle vector which can be used in one embodiment of the invention.
  • (1) and (2) allow replication in E. coli and mammalian cells, respectively.
  • (3) allows selection in E. coli .
  • (4) and (5) allow transcription and mRNA processing, respectively, in mammalian cells.
  • (6) is a syngene that preferably encodes amino-terminal spacer sequences, binding domain, targeting/localization signal, and, optionally, a second functional domain.
  • H2 ⁇ B, IL6 ⁇ B, IL8 ⁇ B, and NFIL6 refer to oligonucleotide ligands as described in Section 6.1.1. Phage clones were tested for binding to plates coated with the oligonucleotide ligands. Phage clones were also tested for binding to plates coated with BSA. The height of the bars above the numbers along the
  • abscissa represents the ratio of a phage clone's binding to an oligonucleotide ligand-coated plate compared to the phage clone's binding to the BSA- coated plate.
  • Figure 5 schematically illustrates construction of the TSAR-9 library.
  • N A, C, G or T;
  • B G, T or C and
  • V G, A or C.
  • Figure 6 schematically illustrates the m663 expression vector.
  • Figure 7 schematically illustrates construction of the TSAR-12 library.
  • Figure 8 schematically illustrates construction of the TSAR-13 librar .
  • R26 expression library was constructed essentially as described for the TSAR-9 library that is described in Section 6.9.1 and its subsections, except for the modifications depicted in Figure 9.
  • ctgtgcctcgagB (NNB) 12 Nccgcgg is SEQ ID NO: 17
  • ctgtgctctaga (VNN) 12 VNccgcgg is SEQ ID NO: 18
  • tcgagB (NNB) 12 Nccgcgg is SEQ ID NO: 19;
  • VNN VNccgcgg is SEQ ID NO: 20;
  • SHSS(S/R)X 12 ⁇ A ⁇ X 12 SRPSRT is SEQ ID NO: 21.
  • Figure 10 represents circular restriction maps of phagemid vectors, derived from phagemid pBluescript II SK + , in which a truncated portion encoding amino acid residues 198-406 of the pIII gene of M13 is linked to a leader sequence of the E. coli Pel B gene and is expressed under control of a lac promoter.
  • G and S represent the amino acids glycine and serine, respectively;
  • c-myc represents the human c-myc oncogene epitope recognized by the 9E10 monoclonal antibody described in Evan et al., 1985,
  • Figure 10A illustrates the restriction map of phagemid pDAF1
  • Figure 10B illustrates the restriction map of phagemid pDAF2
  • Figure 10C illustrates the restriction map of phagemid pDAF3
  • Figure 10D schematically illustrates the construction of phagemids pDAF1, pDAF2 and pDAF3.
  • FIG 11 schematically depicts the construction of the R8C library.
  • the R8C expression library was constructed essentially as described for the TSAR-9 library that is described in Section 6.9.1 and its subsections, except for the modifications de icted in Figure 11.
  • FIG. 12 schematically depicts the origin of one class of double-insert recombinants in the R8C library.
  • TCGAGTTGT (NNK) 8 TGTGGATCTAGATCCACA(MNN) 8 AAAAC is SEQ ID NO: 27; TCGAGTTGT(NNK) 8 TGTGGA
  • TCTAGATCCACA(MNN) 8 ACAAC is SEQ ID NO: 28;
  • SSCX 8 CGSRSTX 8 TTR is SEQ ID NO: 29.
  • FIG. 13 schematically illustrates the construction of the DC43 TSAR library.
  • the DC43 expression library was constructed essentially as described for the TSAR-9 library that is described in Section 6.9.1 and its subsections, except for the modifications depicted in Figure 13.
  • Figure 14 shows the selectivity of binding of two H2 ⁇ B binding phage (H2 ⁇ B-1 and H2 ⁇ B-2), the NFIL6 binding phage NFIL6-1, and the parental phage m663 for three different target sites: the H2 ⁇ B oligonucleotide, the NFIL6 oligonucleotide, and the IL6 ⁇ B oligonucleotide.
  • Figure 15 illustrates the molecular evolution scheme for phage H2 ⁇ B-2 described in Section 6.1.5 that produced the ME#1 library.
  • %p indicates the approximate frequency at which the original amino acid residue is expected to occur in the phage of the
  • Figures 16A and 16B present the results of phage ELISAs that show the relative binding avidity for the H2 ⁇ B oligonucleotide of clones isolated from the ME#1 library as compared to the H2 ⁇ B-2 clone.
  • 16A For 16A:
  • FIGS 17A and 17B illustrate the molecular evolution schemes described in Section 6.1.5 that produced the ME#2a and ME#2b libraries, respectively.
  • the present invention relates to nucleic acids (“syngenes”) that comprise a random synthetic nucleic acid sequence that encodes a protein, peptide, or polypeptide (used interchangeably hereinafter and most commonly collectively referred to as "peptide” unless indicated otherwise explicitly or by context) that binds to a ligand of choice, and their uses in gene therapy fo myriad diseases and disorders of interest.
  • nucleic acids that comprise a random synthetic nucleic acid sequence that encodes a protein, peptide, or polypeptide (used interchangeably hereinafter and most commonly collectively referred to as "peptide” unless indicated otherwise explicitly or by context) that binds to a ligand of choice, and their uses in gene therapy fo myriad diseases and disorders of interest.
  • the invention provides methods for
  • compositions comprising syngenes as well as uses of the syngenes, e . g. , in diagnosis and therapy of various disorders.
  • Syngenes encode a syngene product which is a peptide having at least one functional domain.
  • the functional domain is a binding domain with affinity for a ligand of choice.
  • syngenes of the present invention are synthetic genes, that is, genes that are not known to be present in a naturally occurring genome.
  • a syngene is a nucleic acid encoding a peptide comprising a binding domain in which the binding domain sequence is identified from a peptide library comprising at least 5 unpredictable contiguous amino acids in the variable portion of the library.
  • syngenes are made up of, at least in part, combinations of genes encoding functional domains, such combinations not occurring in nature.
  • Syngenes may be composed of totally synthetic gene sequences, combinations of natural and totally synthetic gene sequences, or combinations of natural DNA sequences juxtaposed so as not to form a gene present in nature.
  • the present invention vastly expands the number of genes that are available for use in gene therapy.
  • the present invention provides methods for finding synthetic nucleic acids encoding peptides with diagnostic or therapeutic value. The present
  • invention further provides methods for delivery of such peptides in vivo by expression in vivo from the administered syngene, that potentially avoid the common problems of instability, clearance, etc. faced when dosing with proteins directly. More importantly, however, there are many instances where a protein that possesses a desired biological effect is unknown. For example, a known protein may not possess a desired level of binding specificity for a particular ligand. Syngenes encoding peptides with such novel
  • the present invention provides methods for identifying synthetic peptides, and the nucleic acids encoding them, to fulfill roles that naturally
  • syngene nucleic acid
  • Such a gene referred to as a syngene
  • the syngene may be introduced into an appropriate host cell and thereby used for the recombinant production of its encoded protein.
  • the present invention provides methods for identifying syngenes that inhibit or enhance the transcriptional activity of a wide variety of naturally occurring genes, preferably with a specificity not found in natural systems.
  • Syngenes are also useful for modulating processes that occur outside of the nucleus.
  • the encoded protein of a syngene produced by intracellular expression of the syngene, may be used to affect the activity of
  • inhibitors of transcription factors such as IF- ⁇ B. Syngenes may also be used to modulate signal
  • syngenes may be used to modulate the activity of membrane receptors, ion channels, or exocytotic and endocytotic pathways.
  • syngenes via expression of their encoded proteins, may be used to regulate cell/cell signalling and transcytosis.
  • Cell/cell junctions and the extracellular matrix are appropriate targets for syngene expressed peptides.
  • Syngenes may be used to regulate cell adhesion or cell/cell recognition.
  • syngenes may be used to regulate the activity of receptor ligands.
  • the invention provides the peptides comprising binding domains that are encoded by syngenes, as well as their therapeutic and diagnostic uses, and compositions comprising such peptides.
  • IDENTIFYING SYNTHETIC GENE SEQUENCES ENCODING A BINDING DOMAIN Binding domains encoded by the syngenes of the invention can be identified from a random peptide expression library or a chemically synthesized random peptide library.
  • a nucleic acid which expresses a peptide which binds to a ligand of choice can be identified and recovered from a random peptide
  • amino acid sequence of an appropriate binding domain can be determined by direct determination of the amino acid sequence of a peptide selected from a random peptide library containing chemically
  • synthesized peptides whereby an appropriate syngene encoding the peptide can be designed and made.
  • direct amino acid sequencing of a binding peptide selected from a random peptide expression library can also be performed, and an encoding nucleic acid designed.
  • methods can be used to identify portions of the determined synthetic amino acid or nucleotide sequences which respectively mediate binding, or encode the sequences which mediate binding, as
  • Random peptide libraries is meant to include within its scope libraries of both
  • peptide sequences with a stretch of at least 5 unpredictable amino acids as well as invariant amino acid sequences are included within the scope of the random peptides.
  • the syngenes encoding such peptides will have both codons of unpredictable and codons of invariant sequence or (due to the degeneracy of the genetic code) degenerate codons thereof.
  • the binding domains of syngenes are not cDNA or generated so as to be genomic sequences.
  • the syngenes of the invention are not sequences generated by a method comprising mutagenesis (even random mutagenesis) of a cDNA sequence or portion thereof or genomic sequence or portion thereof coding for a peptide having a
  • the binding domains encoded by syngenes are advantageously identified from random peptide libraries.
  • random peptide libraries will be encoded by synthetic oligonucleotides with at least 15 contiguous variant nucleotide positions having the potential to encode all 20 naturally occurring amino acids.
  • the sequence of amino acids encoded by the variant nucleotides is unpredictable and substantially random.
  • the terms "unpredicted”, “unpredictable” and “substantially random” are used interchangeably with respect to the amino acids encoded and are intended to mean that the variant nucleotides at any given position encoding the binding domain of the syngene product are such that it cannot be predicted which of the 20 naturally
  • biological random peptide libraries envisioned for use include those in which a bias has been introduced into the random sequence, e.g., to disfavor stop codon usage.
  • a syngene of the invention encodes a peptide comprising a binding domain (which binds to a ligand of choice), in which the nucleotide sequence encoding the binding domain is a sequence identified by a method comprising screening a library of recombinant vectors, said vectors
  • unpredictable nucleotides arranged in one or more contiguous sequences, wherein the total number of unpredictable nucleotides is greater than or equal to 15 and less than or equal to about 300. In other specific embodiments, the total number of such
  • the peptide libraries used in the present invention may be libraries that are chemically
  • the total number of unpredictable amino acids in the peptides of the library used for screening is greater than or equal to 5 and less than or equal to 25; in other embodiments the total is in the range of 5-15 or 5-10 amino acids, preferably contiguous amino acids.
  • binding domain can be identified from chemically synthesized peptide libraries and an appropriate syngene synthesized to encode such a binding domain, such domains would be small (i.e. less than 10 amino acids, and most probably 5-6 amino acids, in length). Therefore, this approach is less preferred than the biological peptide libraries containing unpredictable sequences of greater length, described below.
  • biological random peptide libraries are used to identify a binding domain which binds to a ligand of choice.
  • Many suitable biological random peptide libraries are known in the art and can be used to screen for a peptide that binds to a ligand of choice, according to
  • soluble fusion proteins expressed in biological systems as either soluble fusion proteins or viral capsid fusion proteins.
  • peptide libraries according to this approach have used the M13 phage. Although the N-terminus of the viral capsid protein, protein III (pIII), has been shown to be necessary for viral infection, the extreme N-terminus of the mature protein does tolerate alterations such as insertions. Accordingly, various random peptide libraries, in which the diverse peptides are expressed as pIll fusion proteins, are known in the art; these libraries can be used to identify syngene-encoded binding domains by screening against a ligand of choice.
  • oligonucleotides of about 17 or 23 degenerate bases with an 8 nucleotide long palindromic sequence at their 3' ends.
  • the R8C random peptide library (described in Section 6.10 and Figures 11 and 12) is used.
  • the R26 peptide library (described in Section 6.9.4 and Figure 9) is used.
  • the DC43 peptide library (described in Section 6.9.5 and Figure 13 is used).
  • the protein pVIII is a major M13 viral capsid protein which can also serve as a site for expressing peptides on the surface of M13 viral particles in the construction of random peptide libraries.
  • the average functional domain within a natural protein is considered to be about 40 amino acids.
  • the random peptide libraries from which the binding domains encoded by the syngenes of the present invention are preferably identified encode peptides having in the range of 5 to 200 total variant amino acids.
  • biologically expressed random peptide libraries displaying short random inserts could be used to identify syngenes of the invention, the most preferred binding domains will be identified from biologically expressed random peptide libraries in which the displayed peptide has 20 or greater unpredictable amino acids i.e. preferably in the range of 20 to 100, and most preferably 20 to 50 amino acids, as exemplified by the TSAR libraries described herein.
  • One of the objects of the present invention is to provide syngenes encoding binding domains of greater binding specificity than found in nature. To accomplish this, the invention preferably uses
  • libraries encoding more than about 20 amino acids be constructed, but such libraries can be advantageously screened to identify peptides having binding
  • Libraries composed of longer length oligonucleotides afford the ability to identify peptides in which a short sequencenof amino acids is common to or shared by a number of peptides binding a given ligand, i.e., library members having shared binding motifs.
  • the use of longer length libraries also affords the ability to identify peptides which do not have any shared sequences with other peptides but which nevertheless have binding specificity for the same ligand.
  • oligonucleotide sequences provide the opportunity to identify or map binding sites which encompass not only a few contiguous amino acid residues, i.e., simple binding sites, but also those which encompass
  • discontinuous amino acids i.e., complex binding sites.
  • the large size of the inserted synthesized oligonucleotides of certain libraries provides the opportunity for the development of secondary and/or tertiary structure in the potential binding peptides and in sequences flanking the actual binding site in the binding domain. Secondary and tertiary structure often significantly affect the ability of a sequence to mediate binding, as well as the strength and specificity of any binding which occurs. Such complex structural developments are not feasible when only small length oligonucleotides are used.
  • binding domains and the syngenes encoding them will be identified from biologically expressed random peptide libraries in which the displayed peptide is 20 or greater amino acids in length.
  • Random peptide libraries examples include the TSAR libraries described in detail in Section 5.1.3 and its subsections.
  • the most preferred libraries for practicing the invention are those that are generated or
  • the putative binding domains in these peptides are not known to be naturally occurring amino acid sequences or encoded by naturally occurring nucleotide sequences.
  • the random peptide libraries from which the binding domains encoded by syngenes are identified are not cDNA or genomic libraries.
  • the sequence of any given peptide from the preferred libraries cannot be predicted in advance.
  • the peptides are expressed on the surface of the recombinant vectors of the library.
  • the random library is a linear, non-constrained library. As would be
  • these libraries express peptides that are substantially random but contain a small percentage of fixed residues within or flanking the random sequences that have the result of conferring structure or some degree of conformational rigidity to the peptide.
  • the plurality of synthetic oligonucleotides express peptides that are each able to adopt only one or a small number of different conformations that are constrained by the positioning of codons encoding certain structure conferring amino acids in or
  • the DNA encoding the random peptides of the libraries can be synthetic or natural in origin.
  • DNA can be prepared by a method similar to methods used for constructing a cDNA library.
  • DNA is then sheared and/or digested into DNA pieces of 30 base pairs or smaller.
  • the DNA pieces are then ligated together, preferably to sizes of about 120 base pairs to create DNA sequences that do not occur in nature.
  • Peptides encoded by such sequences can be expressed in a library and screened for binding domains.
  • such DNA sequences will contain stop codons and therefore would be a less desirable source of coding sequences. It is noted that such a library, by virtue of the juxtaposition of cDNA sequences used in creating it, is not a cDNA library.
  • a biological peptide library that is a random peptide "TSAR" library is screened to identify the synthetic gene sequences encoding a binding domain, for use in constructing a syngene.
  • the syngenes of the present invention encode peptides called TSARs which bind to a ligand of choice.
  • TSARs is an acronym for "Totally Synthetic Affinity
  • TSAR libraries construction and use, and specific examples of TSAR libraries are described in these publications and in detail below.
  • nucleic acids encoding TSARs or a TSAR portion which mediates binding to the ligand of choice can be used to
  • a TSAR is intended to encompass a concatenated heterofunctional peptide that includes at least two distinct functional regions.
  • One region of the heterofunctional TSAR molecule is a binding domain with affinity for a ligand, that is preferably characterized by 1) its strength of binding under specific conditions, 2) the stability of its binding under specific conditions, and 3) its selective specificity for the chosen ligand.
  • a second region of the heterofunctional TSAR molecule is an effector domain which in specific embodiments of the TSAR libraries is the pIII protein or other structural protein providing for phage display of the heterofunctional peptide.
  • such a sequence can also include a sequence that is biologically or chemically active to enhance expression and/or detection and/or
  • Such a sequence can be chosen from a number of biologically or chemically active proteins including a structural protein or fragment that is accessibly expressed as a surface protein of a vector, an enzyme or fragment thereof, a toxin or fragment thereof, a therapeutic protein or peptide, or a protein or peptide whose function is to provide a site for attachment of a substance such as a metal ion, etc., that is useful for enhancing
  • a TSAR can contain an optional additional linker domain or region between the binding domain and the effector domain.
  • the linker region serves (1) as a structural spacer region between the binding and effector domains; (2) as an aid to uncouple or
  • a TSAR may be a heterofunctional fusion protein, said fusion protein comprising (a) a binding domain encoded by an oligonucleotide comprising unpredictable nucleotides in which the unpredictable nucleotides are arranged in one or more contiguous sequences, wherein the total number of unpredictable nucleotides is greater than or equal to about 60 and less than or equal to about 600, and optionally, (b) an effector domain encoded by an oligonucleotide sequence which is a protein or peptide that enhances expression or detection of the binding domain.
  • a TSAR may be a heterofunctional fusion protein comprising (i) a binding domain encoded by a double stranded oligonucleotide comprising unpredictable nucleotides in which the unpredictable nucleotides are arranged in one or more contiguous sequences, wherein the total number of unpredictable nucleotides is greater than or equal to about 60 and less than or equal to about 600 and the contiguous sequences are flanked by invariant residues designed to encode amino acids that confer a desired structure to the binding domain of the expressed
  • heterofunctional fusion protein and, optionally, (ii) an effector domain encoded by an oligonucleotide sequence encoding a protein or peptide that enhances expression or detection of the binding domain.
  • TSAR LIBRARIES in order to identify and obtain the syngenes of the present invention, use is made of TSAR libraries.
  • TSAR libraries In order to prepare a library of vectors expressing a plurality of protein TSARs according to one embodiment of the present invention, single stranded sets of nucleotides are synthesized and assembled in vi tro, by way of example, according to the following scheme.
  • the synthesized nucleotide sequences are designed to have variant or unpredicted as well as invariant nucleotide positions. Pairs of variant nucleotides in which one individual member is
  • N is A, C, G or T
  • B is G, T or C
  • V is G, A or C
  • n is an integer, such that 10 ⁇ n ⁇ 100
  • m is an integer, such that 10 ⁇ m ⁇ 100, are synthesized for assembly into synthetic oligonucleotides.
  • N is A, C, G or T
  • B is G, T or C
  • V is G, A or C
  • n is an integer, such that 10 ⁇ n ⁇ 100
  • m is an integer, such that 10 ⁇ m ⁇ 100, are synthesized for assembly into synthetic oligonucleotides.
  • variant nucleotide positions have the potential to encode all 20 naturally occurring amino acids and, when assembled as taught by the present method, encode only one stop codon, i.e., TAG.
  • sequence of amino acids encoded by the variant have the potential to encode all 20 naturally occurring amino acids and, when assembled as taught by the present method, encode only one stop codon, i.e., TAG.
  • nucleotides is unpredictable and substantially random in sequence.
  • the terms “unpredicted”, “unpredictable” and “substantially random” are used interchangeably in the present application with respect to the amino acids encoded and are intended to mean that at any given position within the binding domain of the TSARs encoded by the variant nucleotides which of the 20 naturally
  • the variant nucleotides encode all twenty naturally occurring amino acids by use of 48 different codons.
  • Invariant nucleotides are positioned at particular sites in the nucleotide sequences to aid in assembly and cloning of the synthesized
  • the invariant nucleotides encode for efficient restriction enzyme cleavage sites.
  • the invariant nucleotides at the 5' termini are chosen to encode pairs of sites for cleavage by restriction enzymes (1) which can function in the same buffer conditions; (2) are commercially available at high specific activity; (3) are not complementary to each other to prevent self-ligation of the synthesized double stranded oligonucleotides; and (4) which require either 6 or 8 nucleotides for a cleavage recognition site in order to lower the frequency of cleaving within the inserted double stranded
  • restriction site pairs are selected from Xho I and Xba I, and Sal I and Spe I.
  • Other examples of useful restriction enzyme sites include, but are not limited to: Nco I, Nsi I, Pal I, Not I, Sfi I, Pme I, etc. Restriction sites at the 5' termini invariant positions function to promote proper orientation and efficient production of recombinant molecule formation during ligation when the
  • oligonucleotides are inserted into an appropriate expression vector.
  • nucleotides are synthesized using one or more
  • nucleotides encoding restriction sites for efficient cleavage, are synthesized using non-methylated dNTPs.
  • This embodiment provides for efficient cleavage of long length synthesized oligonucleotides at the termini for insertion into an appropriate vector, while avoiding cleavage in the variant nucleotide sequences.
  • the 3' termini invariant nucleotide positions are complementary pairs of 6, 9 or 12 nucleotides to aid in annealing two synthesized single stranded sets of nucleotides together and conversion to double-stranded DNA, designated herein synthesized double stranded oligonucleotides.
  • the 3' termini invariant nucleotides are selected from
  • the 3' termini invariant nucleotides of the coding strand are 5' GGGTGCGGC 3' which encode glycine, cysteine, glycine. In an oxidizing environment the cysteine forms a disulfide bond with another cysteine
  • the complementary 3' termini also encode an amino acid sequence that provides a short charge cluster (for example, KKKK
  • complementary 3' termini also encode a short amino acid sequence that provides a peptide known to have a desirable binding or other biological activity.
  • ⁇ is a non-polar amino acid.
  • RGD RGD
  • HAV HPQ ⁇ where ⁇ is a non-polar amino acid.
  • Figure 1A generally illustrates an assembly process.
  • the oligonucleotide sequences are thus assembled by a process comprising: synthesis of pairs of single stranded nucleotides having a formula represented by:
  • n is an integer, such that 10 ⁇ n ⁇ 100 and m is an integer, such that 10 ⁇ m ⁇ l00.
  • the single stranded nucleotides are represented as : pairs of nucleotide sequences of a first formula 5' X (NNB) n J Z 3' and a second nucleotide sequence of the formula 3' Z' O U (NNV).
  • Y 5' where X and Y are restriction enzyme recognition sites, such that X ⁇ Y;
  • N is A, C, G or T;
  • B is G, T or C
  • V is G, A or C
  • n is an integer, such that 10 ⁇ n ⁇ 100;
  • n is an integer, such that 10 ⁇ m ⁇ 100;
  • Z and Z' are each a sequence of 6, 9 or 12 nucleotides, such that
  • Z and Z' are complementary to each other; and J is A, C, G, T or nothing;
  • 0 is A, C, G, T or nothing
  • U is G, A, C or nothing; provided, however, if any one of J, O or U is nothing then J, O and U are all nothing.
  • any method for synthesis of the single stranded sets of nucleotides is suitable, including use of an automatic nucleotide synthesizer.
  • the synthesizer can be programmed so that the nucleotides can be incorporated, either in equimolar or non- equimolar ratios at the variant positions, i.e., N, B, V, J, O or U.
  • the nucleotide sequences of the desired length are purified, for example, by HPLC.
  • Pairs of the purified, single stranded nucleotides of the desired length are reacted together in appropriate buffers through repetitive cycles of annealing and DNA synthesis using an appropriate DNA polymerase, such as Taq, VentTM or Bst DNA polymerase, and appropriate temperature cycling.
  • an appropriate DNA polymerase such as Taq, VentTM or Bst DNA polymerase, and appropriate temperature cycling.
  • modified T7 DNA polymerase (modified T7 DNA polymerase) is preferred for use, and can be employed according to the instructions of the manufacturer (U.S. Biochemical, Cleveland, OH), without temperature cycling. Klenow fragment of E. coli DNA polymerase could be used but, as would be understood by those of skill in the art, such
  • the double stranded DNA reaction products now greater than m + n in length, are isolated, for example, by phenol/chloroform extraction and precipitation with ethanol.
  • the double stranded synthetic oligonucleotides are cleaved with appropriate restriction enzymes to yield a plurality of synthesized oligonucleotides.
  • the double-stranded synthesized oligonucleotides should be selected for those of the appropriate size by means of high
  • oligonucleotides substantially eliminates abortive assembly products of inappropriate size and incomplete digestion products.
  • the TSAR scheme for synthesis and assembly of the oligonucleotides provides sequences of oligonucleotides encoding unpredicted amino acid sequences which are larger in size than conventional libraries.
  • synthesized double stranded oligonucleotides comprise at least about 77-631 nucleotides encoding the
  • the synthesized double stranded oligonucleotides comprise at least 77-331 nucleotides and encode about 20-100 unpredicted amino acids in the TSAR binding domain.
  • the synthesized oligonucleotides encode 20, 24 and 36 unpredicted amino acids and 27, 35 and 42 total amino acids, respectively for the TSAR-9, TSAR-12, and
  • syngenes are isolated from a library which expresses a plurality of TSAR peptides having some degree of conformational rigidity in their structure
  • TSAR-13 and TSAR-14 libraries described in Section 6.4 and its subsections. At least four different methods can be used to engineer TSAR libraries used to identify syngene sequences encoding a binding domain, so that the expressed peptides are semirigid or have some degree of conformational rigidity.
  • the synthesized oligonucleotides are designed so that the expressed peptides have a pair of invariant cysteine residues positioned in, or flanking, the unpredicted or variant residues (See Figure ID).
  • the cysteine residues should be in the oxidized state, most likely cross-linked by disulfide bonds to form cystines.
  • the peptides would form rigid or semirigid loops.
  • the nucleotides encoding the cysteine residues should be placed from 6 to 27 amino acids apart flanking the variant nucleotide sequences.
  • peptide library having such structure is the R8C library described in Section 6.13 infra .
  • the actual positions of the invariant residues can be modeled on the arrangement observed in isolates from a linear peptide library, for example, TSAR peptides in which two or four cysteines are encoded by the inserted synthesized oligonucleotides, isolated from the TSAR-9 or TSAR-12 libraries (see Section 6.9 and its subsections infra) .
  • TSAR peptides in which two or four cysteines are encoded by the inserted synthesized oligonucleotides, isolated from the TSAR-9 or TSAR-12 libraries (see Section 6.9 and its subsections infra) .
  • the following general formulas illustrate the structure of these peptides:
  • a double stranded oligonucleotide sequence providing a cloverleaf structure (see Figure 1E) can be represented, for example, by the formula:
  • peptides expressed by this type of rigid library should form many different ligand binding pockets from which to select the best fit. It should be noted that when a semirigid library of the first or second type above is expressed in a viral vector in an oxidizing environment, there will likely be a selection against odd numbers of cysteines occurring within the
  • TSAR-13 and TSAR-14 libraries described in Sections 6.9.4 and 6.9.4.1 infra are the TSAR-13 and TSAR-14 libraries described in Sections 6.9.4 and 6.9.4.1 infra .
  • nucleotides are designed and assembled so that the plurality of proteins expressed have both invariant cysteine and histidine residues positioned within the variant nucleotide sequences (see Figure 1F).
  • the positions of the invariant residues can be modeled after the arrangement of cysteine and histidine residues seen in zinc finger proteins (i.e., -CX 2- 4 CX 12 HX 3 - 4 H-, where X is any amino acid), thereby creating a library of zinc finger-like proteins.
  • zinc finger-like proteins is intended to mean any of the plurality of proteins expressed which contain invariant cysteine and
  • histidine residues which confer a zinc finger or similar structure on the expressed protein.
  • the plurality of proteins are designed to have invariant histidine residues positioned within the variant nucleotide sequences.
  • exemplary histidine containing TSARs can be represented by the following general formulas:
  • CAC represents the codon for histidine.
  • the TSAR proteins are expressed and harvested in the presence of 1-1000 ⁇ M zinc chloride.
  • the expressed proteins could also be saturated with other divalent metal cations, such as Cu 2+ and Ni 2+ .
  • the members of this type of rigid library may have advantageous chemical reactivity, since metal ions are often within the catalytic sites of enzymes.
  • the synthesized single stranded nucleotides are assembled by annealing a first nucleotide sequence of the formula: 5'X [ ⁇ (NNB) a ] c JZ 3' with a second nucleotide
  • ⁇ is an invariant nucleotide sequence whose complimentary nucleotide sequence confers some structure in the encoded peptide;
  • X, Y, N, B, V, Z, Z', J, O, U are as defined above.
  • a and ⁇ could include a codon for one or more cysteine residues, for example Gly-Cys-Gly, in which instance a and b are each preferably ⁇ 6 and ⁇ 27, to generate disulfide bonds between different cysteines in the expressed loop forming peptide structures.
  • a and ⁇ could include a codon for one or more cysteine residues, for example Gly-Cys-Gly, in which instance a and b are each preferably ⁇ 6 and ⁇ 27, to generate disulfide bonds between different cysteines in the expressed loop forming peptide structures.
  • oligonucleotides could be assembled, by annealing for example, a first nucleotide sequence of the formula: 5' X ⁇ (NNB) a ⁇ (NNB) a Z 3' with a second nucleotide sequence of the formula
  • the synthesized single stranded nucleotides are assembled by annealing a first nucleotide sequence: 5' X(GGG)(TGT)(GGG)(NNB) 7 (GGG)(TGT)(GGG)(NNB) 7 (GGG) (TGT)(GGG) 3' with a second nucleotide sequence:
  • GGG represents the codon for glycine and TGT represents the codon for cysteine.
  • oligonucleotide scheme encodes peptides, whose amino acid sequence would be GCGX-GCGX-GCGX-GCG.
  • a and ⁇ could encode one or more histidine residues, for example GHGHG (SEQ ID NO: 54).
  • or and ⁇ could encode a Leu residue in which instance a and b are each s about 7. Such alternative embodiment would provide an alpha helical structure in the expressed peptides.
  • an a group could be used for Z, and ⁇ for Z' to provide the complementary sequences to aid in annealing the nucleotides.
  • nucleotide sequences encoding amino acids that will impose structural constraints on the expressed peptides are possible as would become apparent to one of skill in the art based on the above description and syngenes encoding such constrained peptides are encompassed within the scope of the present invention.
  • reducing agents i . e . , DTT, ⁇ -mercaptoethanol
  • divalent cation chelators i.e., EDTA, EGTA
  • Such reagents can be used, for example, to elute a TSAR library expressed on phage vectors from target ligands.
  • EDTA or EGTA at low concentrations, does not appear to disrupt phage integrity or infectivity.
  • the reduced cysteine residues can be alkylated with iodoacetamide. This treatment prevents renewed disulfide bond formation and only diminishes phage infectivity 10-100 fold, which is tolerable since phage cultures usually attain titers of 10 12 plaque forming units per milliliter.
  • the elution reagents can be removed by dialysis (i.e., dialysis bag, Centricon/Amicon microconcentrators).
  • suitable host expresses the plurality of peptides as heterofunctional fusion proteins with an expressed component of the vector (effector domain) which are screened to identify TSARs having affinity for a ligand of choice.
  • the plurality of peptides further comprise a linking domain between the binding and effector domains.
  • the linker domain is expressed as a fusion protein with the effector domain of the vector into which the plurality of oligonucleotides are inserted.
  • a promoter is a region of DNA at which RNA polymerase attaches and initiates transcription.
  • the promoter selected may be any one that has been
  • E. coli a commonly used host system, has numerous promoters such as the lac or trp promoter or the promoters of its
  • bacteriophages or its plasmids.
  • synthetic or recombinantly produced promoters such as the p TAC promoter may be used to direct high level expression of the gene segments adjacent to them. Signals are also necessary in order to attain efficient translation of the inserted
  • a ribosome binding site includes the translational start codon AUG or GUG in addition to other sequences complementary to the bases of the 3' end of 165 ribosomal RNA.
  • S/D Shine/Dalgarno
  • S/D-ATG sequence which is compatible with the host cell system can be employed.
  • S/D-ATG sequences include, but are not limited to, the S/D-ATG sequences of the cro gene or N gene of bacteriophage lambda, the tryptophan E, D, C, B or A genes, a synthetic S/D sequence or other S/D-ATG sequences known and used in the art.
  • regulatory elements control the expression of the polypeptide or proteins to allow directed synthesis of the reagents in cells and to prevent constitutive synthesis of products which might be toxic to host cells and thereby
  • vectors can be used, including, but not limited to bacteriophage vectors such as ⁇ X174, ⁇ , M13 and its derivatives, f1, fd, Pf1, etc., phagemid vectors, plasmid vectors, insect viruses, such as baculovirus vectors, mammalian cell vectors, including such virus vectors as parvovirus vectors, adenovirus vectors, vaccinia virus vectors, retrovirus vectors, etc., yeast vectors such as Tyl, killer particles, etc.
  • bacteriophage vectors such as ⁇ X174, ⁇ , M13 and its derivatives, f1, fd, Pf1, etc.
  • phagemid vectors such as baculovirus vectors
  • mammalian cell vectors including such virus vectors as parvovirus vectors, adenovirus vectors, vaccinia virus vectors, retrovirus vectors, etc.
  • yeast vectors such as Tyl, killer particles, etc.
  • An appropriate vector contains or is
  • the effector domain gene contains or is engineered to contain multiple cloning sites. At least two different restriction enzyme sites within such gene, comprising a polylinker, are preferred.
  • the vector DNA is cleaved within the polylinker using two different restriction enzymes to generate termini complementary to the termini of the double stranded synthesized oligonucleotides assembled as described above. Preferably the vector termini after cleavage have or are modified, using DNA polymerase, to have non-compatible sticky ends that do not self-ligate, thus favoring insertion of the double-stranded
  • synthesized oligonucleotides and hence formation of recombinants expressing the TSAR fusion proteins, polypeptides and/or peptides.
  • the double stranded synthesized oligonucleotides are ligated to the appropriately cleaved vector using DNA ligase.
  • telomere fragment within the polylinker region of the vector when the vector (e.g. phage or plasmid) is intended to express the TSAR as a heterofunctional fusion protein that is expressed on the surface of the vector.
  • restriction enzyme sites at the termini of the stuffer fragment are useful for insertion of the synthesized double stranded oligonucleotides, resulting in
  • the stuffer fragment can comprise a known DNA sequence encoding a protein that is immunologically active (i.e., an immunological marker)
  • the presence or absence of the stuffer fragment can be easily detected either at the nucleotide level, by DNA sequencing, PCR or hybridization, or at the amino acid level, e. g. , using an immunological assay.
  • Such determination allows rapid discrimination between recombinant (TSAR expressing) vectors generated by insertion of the synthesized double stranded
  • the stuffer fragment comprises the DNA fragment encoding the epitope of the human c-myc protein recognized by the murine monoclonal antibody 9E10 having the amino acid sequence EQKLISEEDLN (SEQ ID NO: 55) (Evan et al., 1985, Mol. Cell. Biol. 5:3610-3616) with a short flanking sequence of amino acids at the 5' and 3' termini which serve as restriction enzyme sites so that the stuffer fragment can be removed and the synthesized double stranded oligonucleotides can be inserted using the restriction sites.
  • EQKLISEEDLN SEQ ID NO: 55
  • the stuffer fragment provides an efficient means to remove any non- recombinant vectors to enhance or enrich the
  • the stuffer fragment is expressed e . g. , as an immunologically active surface protein on the surface of non-recombinant vectors, it provides an accessible target for binding e. g. , to an immobilized antibody.
  • the non-recombinants thus could be easily removed from a library for example by serial passage over a column having the antibody immobilized thereon to enrich the population of recombinant TSAR-expressing vectors in the library.
  • the vector providing for expression of the TSAR libraries is or is derived from a filamentous bacteriophage, including but not limited to M13, f1, fd, Pf1, etc. vector encoding a phage structural protein, preferably a phage coat protein, such as pIII, pVIII, etc.
  • the filamentous phage is an M13-derived phage vector such as m655, m663, and m666 described in Fowlkes et al., 1992, BioTechniques, 13:422-427 which encodes the structural coat protein pIII.
  • the phage vector is chosen to contain or is constructed to contain a cloning site located in the 5 ' region of a gene encoding a bacteriophage
  • synthesized double stranded oligonucleotides inserted are expressed as fusion proteins on the surface of the bacteriophage. This advantageously provides not only a plurality of accessible expressed peptides but also provides a physical link between the peptides and the inserted oligonucleotides to provide for easy
  • the vector is chosen to contain or is constructed to contain a cloning site near the 3' region of a gene encoding structural protein so that the plurality of expressed proteins constitute C- terminal fusion proteins.
  • the structural bacteriophage protein is pIII.
  • the library may be constructed by cloning the plurality of synthesized oligonucleotides into a cloning site near the N-terminus of the mature coat protein of the appropriate vector, preferably the pIII protein, so that the oligonucleotides are expressed as coat protein-fusion proteins.
  • oligonucleotides is inserted into a phagemid vector.
  • Phagemids are utilized in combination with a defective helper phage to supply missing viral proteins and replicative functions.
  • Helper phage useful for propagation of Ml3 derived phagemids as viral
  • the appropriate phagemid vector is constructed by engineering the Bluescript II SK+ vector (GenBank #52328) (Alting-Mees et al., 1989, Nucl. Acid Res.
  • oligonucleotides could be cloned and expressed in the same reading frame as the m663 phage vector; and (3) the linker sequence encoding GGGGS (SEQ ID NO: 56) between the polylinker and the pIII gene.
  • oligonucleotides are inserted into a plasmid vector.
  • An illustrative suitable plasmid vector for expressing the TSAR libraries is a derivative of plasmid p340-1 (ATCC No. 40516).
  • the Nco I - Bam HI fragment is removed from p340-1 plasmid and replaced by a double stranded sequence having Xho I and Xba I restriction sites in the correct reading frame.
  • p340-1 is cleaved using
  • oligonucleotides are inserted, using the Xho I and Xba I restriction sites, into the p340-lD vector the coding frame is restored and the TSAR binding domain is expressed as a fusion protein with the ⁇ - galactosidase.
  • the vectors expressing the TSAR library would produce identifiable blue colonies.
  • plasmid pTrc99A plasmid derivative of plasmid pTrc99A (Amann et al., 1988, Gene 69:301-315) (Pharmacia, Piscataway, NJ) designated plasmid pLamB which is constructed to contain the LamB protein gene of E. coli (Clement and Hofnung, 1981, Cell
  • oligonucleotides inserted are expressed as fusion proteins of the LamB protein.
  • the appropriate expression vectors are prepared, they are inserted into an appropriate host, such as E. coli , Bacillus subtil is, insect cells, mammalian cells, yeast cells, etc., for example by electroporation, and the plurality of oligonucleotides is expressed by culturing the transfected host cells under appropriate culture conditions for colony or phage production.
  • an appropriate host such as E. coli , Bacillus subtil is, insect cells, mammalian cells, yeast cells, etc., for example by electroporation
  • the plurality of oligonucleotides is expressed by culturing the transfected host cells under appropriate culture conditions for colony or phage production.
  • the host cells are protease deficient, and may or may not carry
  • a small aliquot of the electroporated cells are plated and the number of colonies or plaques are counted to determine the number of recombinants.
  • the library of recombinant vectors in host cells is plated at high density for a single amplification of the recombinant vectors.
  • recombinant M13 vector m666, m655 or m663, engineered to contain the synthesized double stranded oligonucleotides is transfected into DH5 ⁇ F' E. coli cells by electroporation.
  • TSARs are expressed on the outer surface of the viral capsid extruded from the host E. coli cells and are
  • the parent m666, m655 or m663 vectors contain the c-myc epitope (stuffer fragment).
  • the stuffer fragment is removed. The cloning efficiency of the expressed library is easily determined by filter blotting with the 9E10 antibody that recognizes the c-myc epitope.
  • the c-myc epitope is retained. Then the c-myc epitope is expressed in the pIII-fusion protein expressed by the vector.
  • An advantage of the m663 vector is that it contains an intact LacZ + gene, which can be easily seen as a blue dot when expressed in E. coli plated on X-gal and IPTG.
  • TSARs can be expressed in a plasmid vector contained in bacterial host cells such as E. coli .
  • the TSAR proteins accumulate inside the E. coli cells and a cell lysate is prepared for screening.
  • Use of plasmid p340-lD is described as an illustrative example.
  • Phagemid vectors containing the synthesized double stranded oligonucleotides, expressed on the outer surface of the extruded phage are propagated either as infected bacteria or as bacteriophage with helper phage.
  • the expressed pDAF2-3 phagemids (See Section 6.10 and its subsections) have the added advantage that they include the c-myc gene which can serve as an "epitope tag" for the fusion pIII proteins.
  • TSAR peptide downstream synthesized oligonucleotide, expressed TSAR peptide is appropriately expressed.
  • E. coli may be of value to electroporate several different strains of E. coli and establish different versions of the same library.
  • E. coli strain would need to be used for the entire set of screening experiments. This strategy is based on the consideration that there is likely an in vivo biological selection, both positive and negative, on the viral assembly, secretion, and infectivity rate of individual M13 recombinants due to the sequence nature of the peptide-pIII fusion
  • E. coli with different genotypes i.e., chaperonin overexpressing, or secretion
  • the desired random peptide library is screened to identify and recover a syngene encoding a binding domain that binds to a ligand of choice.
  • a ligand is a substance for which it is desired to isolate a specific binding partner from a synthetic random peptide library.
  • the term "ligand" is thus intended to include but not be limited to a substance,
  • a binding domain which binds to a ligand can function as a receptor, i.e., a lock into which the ligand fits and binds; or a binding domain can function as a key which fits into and binds a ligand when the ligand is a larger protein molecule.
  • a ligand includes, but is not limited to, a non-ionic chemical group, an organic chemical group, an ion, a metal, a metal or non-metal inorganic ion, a glycoprotein, a protein, a polypeptide, a peptide, a nucleic acid, a carbohydrate or carbohydrate polymer, a lipid, a fatty acid, a viral particle, a membrane vesicle, a cell wall component, a synthetic organic compound, a bioorganic compound and an inorganic compound or any portion of any of the above.
  • Ligands also include the variable region of an antibody, an enzyme/substrate binding site, an enzyme/co-factor binding site, a regulatory DNA binding protein, an RNA binding protein, a binding site of a metal binding protein, a nucleotide fold or GTP binding protein, a calcium binding protein, a membrane protein, a viral protein and an integrin.
  • the ligand is a peptide that is an intracellular targeting or processing signal (e.g., nuclear localization signals), e.g., whereby the syngene-encoded binding peptide which recognizes it will interfere with proper targeting of in vivo proteins containing such a targeting signal.
  • a preferred method for identifying syngenes that encode a binding domain that binds to a ligand of choice comprises screening a library of recombinant vectors that express a plurality of heterofunctional fusion proteins, said fusion proteins comprising (a) a binding domain encoded by an oligonucleotide
  • Nucleotide sequence analysis can be carried out by any method known in the art, including but not limited to the method of Maxam and Gilbert (1980, Meth. Enzymol.
  • Patent No. 4,795,699 SequenaseTM, U.S. Biochemical Corp.), or Taq polymerase, or use of an automated DNA sequenator (e.g., Applied Biosystems, Foster City, CA).
  • syngenes encoding binding domains are identified by a method comprising
  • (and/or peptide) which binds to a ligand of choice comprising: (a) generating a library of vectors expressing a plurality of heterofunctional fusion proteins comprising (i) a binding domain encoded by a double stranded oligonucleotide comprising
  • unpredictable nucleotides in which the unpredictable nucleotides are arranged in one or more contiguous sequences, wherein the total number of unpredictable nucleotides is greater than or equal to about 60 and less than or equal to about 600 and the contiguous sequences are flanked by invariant residues designed to encode amino acids that confer a desired structure to the binding domain of the expressed
  • heterofunctional fusion protein and, optionally, (ii) an effector domain encoded by an oligonucleotide sequence encoding a protein or peptide that enhances expression or detection of the binding domain; and (b) screening the library of vectors by contacting the plurality of heterofunctional fusion proteins with the ligand of choice under conditions conducive to ligand binding and isolating the heterofunctional fusion protein which binds to the ligand.
  • the methods of the invention further comprise determining the nucleotide sequence encoding the binding domain of the heterofunctional fusion protein identified to deduce the amino acid sequence of the binding domain.
  • the library is screened to identify peptides having binding affinity for a ligand of choice. Screening the libraries can be accomplished by any of a variety of methods known to those of skill in the art. See, e.g., the following references, which disclose
  • the libraries are expressed as fusion proteins with a cell surface molecule, then screening is advantageously achieved by contacting the vectors with an immobilized target ligand and harvesting those vectors that bind to said ligand.
  • the target ligand can be immobilized on plates, beads, such as magnetic beads, sepharose, etc., or on beads used in columns.
  • the immobilized target ligand can be "tagged", e . g. , using such as biotin, 2-fluorochrome, e.g. for FACS sorting.
  • screening a library of phage expressing random peptides on phage and phagemid vectors can be achieved as follows using magnetic beads.
  • Target ligands are conjugated to magnetic beads, according to the instructions of the
  • the beads are used to block non-specific binding to the beads, and any unreacted groups.
  • BSA bovine serum albumin
  • an aliquot of a library is mixed with a sample of resuspended beads.
  • the tube contents are tumbled at 4°C for 1-2 hrs.
  • the magnetic beads are then recovered with a strong magnet and the liquid is removed by aspiration.
  • the beads are then washed by adding PBS-0.05% Tween ® 20, inverting the tube several times to resuspend the beads, and then drawing the beads to the tube wall with the magnet.
  • the contents are then removed and washing is repeated 5-10 additional times. 50 mM glycine-HCl (pH 2.0), 100 ⁇ g/ml BSA solution are added to the washed beads to denature proteins and release bound phage.
  • the beads are pulled to the side of the tubes with a strong magnet and the liquid contents are then transferred to clean tubes.
  • 1 M Tris-HCl (pH 7.5) or 1 M NaH 2 PO 4 (pH 7) is added to the tubes to neutralize the pH of the phage sample.
  • the phage are then diluted, e.g., 10° to 10 -6 , and aliquots plated with E. coli DH5 ⁇ F' cells to determine the number of plaque forming units of the sample. In certain cases, the platings are done in the presence of XGal and IPTG for color discrimination of plaques (i.e., 2acZ+ plaques are blue, lacZ- plaques are white).
  • the titer of the input samples is also determined for comparison (dilutions are
  • screening a library of phage expressing random peptides can be achieved by panning using microtiter plates.
  • Target ligand is diluted, e.g., in 100 mM NaHCO 3 , pH 8.5 and a small aliquot of ligand solution is adsorbed onto wells of microtiter plates (e.g. by incubation overnight at 4°C).
  • An aliquot of BSA solution (1 mg/ml, in 100 mM NaHCO 3 , pH 8.5) is added and the plate incubated at room temperature for 1 hr. The contents of the microtiter plate are flicked out and the wells washed carefully with PBS- 0.05% Tween ® 20.
  • the plates are washed free of unbound targets repeatedly. A small aliquot of phage solution is introduced into each well and the wells are incubated at room temperature for 1-2 hrs. The contents of microtiter plates are flicked out and washed repeatedly. The plates are incubated with wash solution in each well for 20 minutes at room
  • a pH change is used.
  • An aliquot of 50 mM glycine-HCl (pH 2.0), 100 ⁇ g/ml BSA solution is added to the washed wells to denature proteins and release bound phage. After 10 minutes at 65°C, the contents are then transferred into clean tubes, and a small aliquot of 1 M Tris-HCl (pH 7.5) or IM NaH 2 PO 4 (pH 7) is added to neutralize the pH of the phage sample.
  • the phage are then diluted, e .g. , 10 -3 to 10 -6 and aliquots plated with E. coli DH5 ⁇ F' cells to determine the number of the plaque forming units of the sample. In certain cases, the platings are done in the presence of XGal and IPTG for color
  • plaques i.e., lacZ+ plaques are blue, lacZ- plaques are white.
  • the titer of the input samples is also determined for comparison
  • a large volume, approximately 100 ⁇ l, of LB+ ampicillin is added to each well and the plate is incubated at 37°C for 2 hr.
  • the bound cells undergo cell division in the rich culture medium and the daughter cells detach from the immobilized targets.
  • the contents of the wells are then
  • bacterial cell can be screened by passing a solution of the library over a column, of a ligand immobilized to a solid matrix, such as sepharose, silica, etc., and recovering those phage that bind to the column after extensive washing and elution.
  • a ligand immobilized to a solid matrix such as sepharose, silica, etc.
  • weak binding library members can be isolated based on retarded chromatographic properties.
  • fractions are collected as they come off the column, saving the trailing fractions (i.e., those members that are retarded in mobility relative to the peak fraction are saved). These members are then concentrated and passed over the column a second time, again saving the retarded fractions.
  • oligonucleotides encoding the binding domain selected in this manner can be mutagenized, expressed and rechromatographed (or screened by another method) to discover improved binding activity.
  • homobifunctional (e.g., DSP, DST, BSOCOES, EGS, DMS) or heterobifunctional (e.g., SPDP) cross-linking agents can be used in combination with any of the above methods, to promote capture of weak binding members; these cross-linkers should be reversible, with a treatment (i.e., exposure to thiols, base, periodate, hydroxylamine) gentle enough not to disrupt members structure or infectivity, to allow recovery of the library member.
  • the elution reagents can be removed by dialysis (i.e., dialysis bag,
  • screening a library of can be achieved using a method comprising a first "enrichment” step and a second filter lift step as follows.
  • Random peptides from an expressed library capable of binding to a given ligand are initially enriched by one or two cycles of panning or affinity chromatography, as described above. The goal is to enrich the positives to a frequency of about > 1/10 5 .
  • a filter lift assay is conducted. For example, approximately 1-2 x 10 5 phage, enriched for binders, are added to 500 ⁇ l of log phase E. coli and plated on a large LB-agarose plate with 0.7% agarose in broth. The agarose is allowed to solidify, and a nitrocellulose filter (e.g., 0.45 ⁇ ) is placed on the agarose surface.
  • registration marks is made with a sterile needle to allow re-alignment of the filter and plate following development as described below. Phage plaques are allowed to develop by overnight incubation at 37 °C (the presence of the filter does not inhibit this process). The filter is then removed from the plate with phage from each individual plaque adhered in si tu . The filter is then exposed to a solution of BSA or other blocking agent for 1-2 hours to prevent nonspecific binding of the ligand (or "probe").
  • the probe itself is labeled, for example, either by biotinylation (using commercial NHS-biotin) or direct enzyme labeling, e.g., with horse radish peroxidase (HRP) or alkaline phosphatase. Probes labeled in this manner are indefinitely stable and can be re-used several times.
  • the blocked filter is exposed to a solution of probe for several hours to allow the probe to bind in si tu to any phage on the filter displaying a peptide with significant affinity to the probe.
  • the filter is then washed to remove unbound probe, and then developed by exposure to enzyme substrate solution (in the case of directly labeled probe) or further exposed to a solution of enzyme-labeled avidin (in the case of biotinylated probe).
  • enzyme substrate solution in the case of directly labeled probe
  • enzyme-labeled avidin in the case of biotinylated probe
  • an HRP-labeled probe is detected by ECL western blotting methods (Amersham, Arlington Heights, ID, which involves using luminol in the presence of phenol to yield enhanced
  • chemiluminescence detectable by brief exposure of film by autoradiography in which the exposed areas of film correspond to positive plaques on the original plate.
  • positive phage plaques are identified by localized deposition of colored enzymatic cleavage product on the filter which corresponds to plaques on the original plate.
  • the developed filter or film is simply realigned with the plate using the registration marks, and the "positive" plaques are cored from the agarose to recover the phage. Because of the high density of plaques on the original plate, it is usually impossible to isolate a single plaque from the plate on the first pass. Accordingly, phage recovered from the initial core are re-plated at low density and the process is repeated to allow isolation of
  • the recovered cells are then plated at a low density to yield isolated colonies for individual analysis.
  • the individual colonies are selected and used to inoculate LB culture medium containing
  • Binding to other supports, having attached thereto a non-relevant ligand, can be used as a negative
  • interactions during recovery of the phage are specific for every given peptide sequence from a plurality of proteins expressed on phage. For example, certain interactions may be disrupted by acid pH's but not by basic pH's, and vice versa .
  • it may be desirable to test a variety of elution conditions including but not limited to pH 2-3, pH 12-13, excess target in competition, detergents, mild protein denaturants, urea, varying temperature, light, presence or absence of metal ions, chelators, etc.
  • Some of these elution conditions may be incompatible with phage infection because they are bactericidal and will need to be removed by dialysis (i.e., dialysis bag,
  • flanking sequences may also be due to the denaturation of the specific peptide region involved in binding to the target but also may be due to conformational changes in the flanking regions. These flanking sequences may also be
  • flanking regions may also change their secondary or tertiary structure in response to
  • elution conditions i.e., pH 2-3, pH 12-13, excess target in competition, detergents, mild protein denaturants, urea, heat, cold, light, metal ions, chelators, etc.
  • the conformational deformation of the peptide responsible for binding to the target i.e., pH 2-3, pH 12-13, excess target in competition, detergents, mild protein denaturants, urea, heat, cold, light, metal ions, chelators, etc.
  • TSAR libraries can be prepared and screened by: (1) engineering a vector, preferably a phage vector, so that a DNA sequence encodes a segment of Factor Xa (or Factor Xa protease cleavable peptide) and is present adjacent to the gene encoding the effector domain, e.g., the pIII coat protein gene; (2) construct and assemble the double stranded synthetic
  • oligonucleotides as described above and insert into the engineered vector; (3) express the plurality of vectors in a suitable host to form a library of vectors; (4) screen for binding to an immobilized ligand; (5) wash away excess phage; and (6) treat the entire library with Factor Xa protease.
  • the particle will be uncoupled from the peptide-ligand complex and can then be used to infect bacteria to regenerate the particle with its full-length pIII molecule for additional rounds of screening.
  • TSAR libraries are screened with
  • oligonucleotides to identify syngenes encoding binding domains specific for particular DNA sequences.
  • binding is done with high levels of salts, e.g., to maximize the hydrophobic interactions that are characteristic of specific protein/DNA
  • Non-specific protein/DNA interactions are generally electrostatic and can be reduced by high salt concentrations that cause saturation of the charges on the protein and DNA.
  • Syngene-encoded sequences that can be used to regulate transcription are identified by screening the desired random peptide library for binding to a ligand of choice, where the ligand of choice is (or comprises) a nucleic acid sequence (transcriptional regulatory site) that regulates transcription; a transcription factor that binds to a transcriptional regulatory site and thereby regulates transcription; or a protein binding partner of the transcription factor, which binds to the transcription factor and thereby inhibits the transcription factor's binding to the transcriptional regulatory site.
  • the ligand of choice is (or comprises) a nucleic acid sequence (transcriptional regulatory site) that regulates transcription; a transcription factor that binds to a transcriptional regulatory site and thereby regulates transcription; or a protein binding partner of the transcription factor, which binds to the transcription factor and thereby inhibits the transcription factor's binding to the transcriptional regulatory site.
  • transcription factor have a great deal of similarity among themselves.
  • the nucleotide sequences found in common among all the sites for a given factor are called that factor's "consensus sequence.”
  • the consensus sequence for NF-IL6 also known as C/EBP
  • the consensus sequence for NF- ⁇ B is 5'GGGRNNYYCC (SEQ ID NO: 60) (Okamoto et al., 1993, J. Biol. Chem. 269:8582-8589).
  • the consensus sequence for GATA-1, GATA-2, and GATA-3 is 5' (T/A) GATA(G/A) (Zon et al., 1991, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA
  • transcription factors are not single proteins, but are multimers composed of the products of different genes.
  • the AP-1 transcription site is activated by heterodimers of c-jun and c-fos.
  • the transcriptional activator may be composed of either homo- or heterodimers of members of the NF- ⁇ B family, including p65 (also known as Rel A) and p50.
  • p65 also known as Rel A
  • p50 Different NF- ⁇ B sites may be activated preferentially by different combinations of p65 and/or p50 (Muroi et al., 1993, J. Biol. Chem. 268:19534-19539; Zabel et al., 1991, J.
  • the activity of some transcription factors is regulated by proteins that bind to arid thus inhibit the factor's activity.
  • the activity of NF- ⁇ B can be inhibited by binding to the protein IF- ⁇ B (Kerr et al., 1992, Current Opin. Cell. Biol. 4:496- 501).
  • the activity of the AP-1 transcription factor can be inhibited by binding of the factor IP-1 (Auwerx and Sassone-Corsi, 1991, Cell 64:983-993).
  • the inhibitory protein is located in the cytoplasm, where its binding to the transcription factor sequesters that factor away from the nucleus, thus preventing the factor from
  • transcription factors that can be found in the cytoplasm, presumably in inactive form, include: the glucocorticoid receptor, the yeast transcription factor SW15, and NF-AT (a transcription factor for certain lymphokines and cytokines).
  • Alternative splicing may give rise to several versions of a transcription factor. Some of these versions may inhibit rather than activate transcription, and the interaction of different versions of the same factor may produce a complex pattern of regulation (Foulkes and Sassone-Corsi, 1992, Cell 68:411-414).
  • a given gene may be regulated by one or more different transcription factors in a tissue or cell type specific manner. For instance, it has been demonstrated that at least three cis-elements (AP-1, C/EBP (also known as NF-IL6) and NF- ⁇ B-like sites) are involved in IL-8 gene activation (Okamoto et al., 1994, J. Biol. Chem. 269:8582-8589; Mukaida et al.,
  • Transcription factors have been shown to be modular proteins. That is, they are composed of more or less discrete domains that perform more or less discrete functions. For example, most transcription factors possess a DNA binding domain that mediates binding to a transcriptional regulatory site. Also common are transcriptional activator signals (TASs). T Ss are domains that, when bound to a transcriptional regulatory site of a gene (by virtue of being linked to a DNA binding domain), mediate the transcriptional activation of the gene. Another common domain found in transcription factors is a domain that permits the dimerization of the factor. The dimerization is sometimes homodimerization, sometimes
  • NF- ⁇ B is a transcription factor that is a heterodimer consisting of p50 and p65 subunits
  • IF- ⁇ B (or I ⁇ B) is a cytoplasmic protein that binds to and specifically inhibits NF- ⁇ B (Baeuerle and
  • Free NF- ⁇ B migrates to the nucleus where it binds to the ⁇ B site in the enhancer/promoter of various genes, such as the T cell receptor ⁇ chain, interleukin-2 receptor a chain, myosin heavy chain class I, and cytokine genes such as those for beta-interferon, GM-colony stimulating factor (CSF), G-CSF, interleukin-2, and tumor necrosis factor- ⁇ r and - ⁇ , thereby regulating their expression (Lenardo and Baltimore, 1989, Cell 58:227-229; Baeuerle, 1991, Biochem. Biophys. Acta 1072:63-80).
  • CSF GM-colony stimulating factor
  • G-CSF G-CSF
  • interleukin-2 interleukin-2
  • tumor necrosis factor- ⁇ r and - ⁇ thereby regulating their expression
  • Binding sites for the transcription factors NF- ⁇ B and NF-IL6 have been shown to be important in the regulation of a wide variety of genes that are involved in health and disease. For example, it has been suggested that derangements in the control of expression of the IL-8 gene may be involved in the pathogenesis of several inflammatory diseases (Okamoto et al., 1994, J. Biol. Chem. 269:8582-8589). An NF- ⁇ B binding site in the promoter of the IL-8 gene has been shown to be involved in the transcriptional control of the IL-8 gene (id. ) . The same NF- ⁇ B site has been shown to be one of the targets through which the immunosuppressant FK506 acts ( id. ) . The ability to regulate this site through the use of syngenes
  • the GATA family of transcription factors are a group of zinc finger DNA binding proteins that recognize related binding sites that contain the core sequence GATA.
  • the known members of this family are GATA-1, GATA-2, GATA-3, GATA-GTl, and GATA-GT2 (Zon et al., 1991, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 88:10642-10646; Maeda, 1994, J. Biochem. 115:6-14).
  • GATA-1, GATA-2, and GATA-3 are expressed primarily in hematopoietic tissues such as the erythroid, megakaryocyte, T cell, and mast cell lineages. Gene knockout studies have shown that GATA-1 is required for erythroid
  • mice development in mice (Pevny et al., 1991, Nature
  • GATA-2 is found in non-hematopoietic cells such as brain, liver, and endothelial cells (Dorfman et al., 1992, J. Biol. Chem. 267:1279-1285).
  • GATA-GTl and GATA-GT2 are found in gastric parietal cells. They bind to a sequence motif in the 5' upstream regions of both the H + /K + -ATPase ⁇ and ⁇ subunit genes. GATA-GTl and GATA-GT2 may be involved in gastric specific transcriptional regulation of many proteins (Maeda, 1994, J. Biochem. 115:6-14).
  • the Ets family of transcription factors includes at least 30 different DNA binding proteins in species as evolutionarily distant as Drosophila and humans. These proteins show pronounced amino acid sequence similarities in an approximately 84 amino acid region that corresponds to their DNA binding domains. They recognize distinct but related DNA binding sites that are about ten nucleotides long and that share a common, short motif - (C/A)GGA(A/T). The specificity of binding of the individual Ets proteins is determined mainly by the other nucleotides in the binding site.
  • TCRc T cell antigen receptor ⁇ chain gene
  • the invention involves the identification of syngene-encoded peptide
  • nucleic acid sequences that regulate that regulate (promote or alternatively inhibit)
  • transcriptional regulatory sites are preferably those situated in vivo in or near the sequence of a preselected gene, the product of which is involved in health or disease.
  • transcriptional regulatory site is a sequence recognized by a transcription factor.
  • Oligonucleotides containing those transcriptional regulatory sites are synthesized and are used to screen a random peptide library. In this way, peptides are found that specifically bind the transcriptional regulatory sites.
  • a synthetic binding domain can be identified that specifically regulates the transcription of one or more genes of choice, but not of all the genes whose transcription is regulated by a natural transcription factor which recognizes the same transcriptional regulatory site as does the syngene-encoded binding domain.
  • a binding domain that specifically regulates one or more but not all of a family of transcriptional regulatory sites (a family referring to those transcriptional regulatory sites regulated by an identical natural transcription factor), is
  • HSDB highly specific DNA binding domain
  • HSDBs that bind specifically to a particular transcriptional regulatory site within or near a particular gene.
  • transcriptional regulatory site within a gene whose activity it is desired to regulate for therapeutic reasons. Such binding interferes with the binding of a natural transcription factor to that site and thus blocks the transcription of the preselected gene.
  • the syngene product in this case would not contain a transcription activating signal (TAS).
  • the site at which the syngene product binds could be a site that is naturally involved in the activation of the transcription of the preselected gene.
  • the site could be a site that is not naturally involved in the transcriptional regulation of the gene.
  • the invention encompasses a method for functionally identifying protein structural domains that can be combined with other functional domains to effect the production of a unique, non-naturally occurring protein that can act at specific cis-acting negative or positive transcriptional regulatory sites within eukaryotic cells.
  • the invention is further directed to the syngenes encoding such a protein as well as to the uses of such a syngene.
  • This invention in a particularly preferred embodiment is directed to the repression and activation of genes regulated, at least in part, by the transcriptional factors NF- ⁇ B and NF-IL6 (also known as C/EBP).
  • this embodiment is directed to the genes for IL-6 and IL-8, whose products are cytokines that respond to different inflammatory signals and are regulated by both NF- ⁇ B and NF-IL6.
  • regulation of the gene for the HLA class I locus, which responds to NF- ⁇ B, but not NF-IL6, is a subject of this invention.
  • the site to which the encoded syngene peptide binds is an NF-IL6 site.
  • the encoded syngene product binds to a protein that is a transcriptional regulator (i.e. that binds to DNA and regulates transcription).
  • a transcriptional regulator i.e. that binds to DNA and regulates transcription.
  • the encoded syngene product can bind to the NF- ⁇ B protein and thereby prevent the NF- ⁇ B protein from activating transcription.
  • the encoded syngene product need not be localized to the nucleus.
  • the product of the syngene functions in the cytoplasm where it binds to an endogenous binding partner of a
  • the syngene product activates transcription of a
  • a transcription factor inhibitor that is involved in the inhibition of transcription of the preselected gene.
  • a transcription factor inhibitor is IF- ⁇ B.
  • the syngenes encode a binding domain that is highly specific for the DNA binding site of a transcription factor.
  • Such syngenes encode proteins containing HSDBs that are identified by screening a random peptide library for binding to a target ligand, in which the ligand is a nucleic acid that contains a binding site recognized by the transcription factor.
  • HSDBs will show greater specificity for a given transcription factor binding site than does the natural transcription factor that binds to that site.
  • An HSDB selectively binds a single or limited examples of a given transcription factor's binding site from a single gene or a limited number of genes, whereas the natural transcription factor will bind to sites in additional genes.
  • Transcription factor binding sites are known for a very large number of genes and are suitable for use as target ligands.
  • the following tables represent examples of known transcription factors and their respective binding sites that can be used in the methods of the present invention to isolate binding domains specific for those factors or sites. Sequences encoding such binding domains could be built into syngene constructs that would be useful for the modulation of the activity of genes whose transcription is dependent upon the binding of
  • Table 1 shows that a DNA binding site for the Ets-like transcription factor Fli-1 is present in the promoter of the c-myc proto- oncogene.
  • C-myc has been shown to be involved in the development of a wide variety of cancers (Marcu et al., 1992, Ann. Rev. Biochem. 61:809-860; Cole, 1986, Ann. Rev. Genet. 20:361-384).
  • the ability to inhibit the activity of c-myc would be expected to have utility in the treatment of those cancers in which c- myc is upregulated.
  • Table 2 gives the DNA sequences recognized by several ubiquitous transcription factors. Such ubiquitous transcription factor binding sites are ideal subjects for use as targets to select highly specific binding domains for incorporation into syngenes. This is because these factors regulate a wide variety of genes in many cell types. Using the methods of the present invention as disclosed in
  • Section 6.1 Section 6.1 and its subsections, one can obtain syngenes that encode products that are able to
  • Table 3 shows a number of transcription factors, the DNA sequences they bind to, and the genes they regulate during T cell development and
  • Table 4 shows a number of transcription factors that could be used as targets to obtain syngenes that encode products that would be useful in regulating the T cell receptor.
  • Table 5 shows a large number of known Ets family transcription factor binding sites. Among the genes listed in Table 5, genes such as fos (involved in growth control) and interleukin-2 (involved in the control of the immune system) are attractive
  • NF- ⁇ B sites which are suitable for use as a ligand of choice are shown in Table 6 (see Muroi et al., 1993, J. Biol. Chem.
  • transcription factor binding sites gel shift assays to determine if known transcription factors bind to potential transcription factor binding sites in the gene, and mutagenesis of a suspected binding site followed by assays to determine if the expression of the mutagenized gene has been affected by the
  • the molecule comprising the transcriptional regulatory site that constitutes the ligand of choice used to screen the random peptide library is a site that is not known to be bound by a protein transcription factor, but which is situated close to (e.g., within 50 nucleotides of) the initiation site of the gene, and which has the ability to regulate transcription of such gene upon binding by a syngene-encoded product.
  • a syngene-encoded product would be expected to sterically hinder the ordered process of transcription factor and RNA polymerase binding to this region of the gene that is necessary for transcription to occur.
  • the invention provides a method for identifying a syngene that encodes a protein that binds to a ligand of interest comprising screening a random synthetic peptide library to identify a peptide that binds to a ligand of interest, in which the ligand is (1) a DNA region that functions to regulate transcription; (2) a protein that is a transcriptional regulator that functions by binding to DNA; or (3) a protein modulator that binds to and inactivates the function of a protein transcriptional regulator.
  • transcription factor affords the opportunity for regulating the transcription of genes that depend upon the transcription factor for their activity. This can be done by developing syngenes that encode binding domains that are specific for either the transcription factor or its inhibitor.
  • binding domains (and their encoding nucleic acids) will be identified that are capable of specifically binding the
  • binding domains mimic transcription factor inhibitors.
  • binding domains can function as inhibitors of
  • binding domains would be identified that could function, when part of a syngene-encoded product, much in the way IF- ⁇ B
  • binding domains would be identified that could be used to create IP-1-like peptides encoded by syngenes.
  • binding domains would be identified that, when expressed from a syngene, would bind to the inhibitor, thus preventing it from binding to the transcription factor. This would free the
  • transcription factor allowing it to migrate into the nucleus and activate transcription.
  • transcription factor inhibitors could be used as activators of transcription. 5.2.2. SYNGENES FOR REGULATION OF APOPTOSIS
  • Syngenes may be used to control apoptosis.
  • Apoptosis the process of programmed cell death, is seen in a wide range of organisms where it is involved in the development of the nervous system, the
  • apoptosis is a normal and important part of many different biological processes, it is important for the health of an organism that apoptosis be properly regulated. It appears that some instances of disease can arise as a result of improper
  • Alzheimer's and Parkinson's diseases are associated with the premature death of certain neurons (Jenner, 1989, J. Neurol. Neurosurg. Psychiatry 22-28; Kosik, 1992, Science 256:780-783); inhibition of programmed cell death may be involved in autoimmune disease
  • Bcl-2 was first identified as a gene on human chromosome 18 that was involved in the t(14;18) chromosomal translocations observed in follicular B-cell lymphomas (Tsujimoto et al., 1985, Science 229:1390-1393; Bakhshi et al., 1985, Cell 41:899-906; Cleary and Sklar, 1985, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 82:7439-7449).
  • bcl-2 and bax proteins control the process of apoptosis in response to various stimuli. It has been postulated that the ratio of bcl-2 to bax determines whether a cell will initiate the program of apoptosis in response to apoptotic stimuli or will ignore such stimuli and continue to grow, or at least survive (Oltvai et al., 1993, Cell 74:609-619). A high ratio of bcl-2 to bax leads to survival; a low ratio to death. The interaction of bcl-2 and bax is thought to depend on the formation of heterodimers of the proteins encoded by these two genes . A study in which mutations were engineered in two domains of bcl- 2 found a correlation between the mutant bcl-2
  • the two domains in the human bcl-2 protein that appear to interact with bax are amino acids 136- 156 and amino acids 187-202 (ibid. ) .
  • binding domains that are specific for the bcl-2 protein.
  • binding domains could also be used to make syngenes that would be useful in the control of apoptosis.
  • binding domains would also be useful in making syngenes for use in regulating apoptosis.
  • syngenes Although a preferred embodiment of the invention is directed to syngenes whose products bind to transcriptional regulatory sites, other embodiments of the invention encompass a plethora of uses. In particular, it should be emphasized that syngene products are in no way restricted to functioning solely in the nucleus. As discussed below, syngenes are useful for regulating activities that take place in the cytoplasm, or on the cell's surface, as well.
  • a syngene product may have one or more of a variety of functional properties. Its product may be a signal transduction inhibitor. Such a signal transduction inhibitor would block the activity of a signal pathway such as that which leads from a cell membrane receptor through various intermediate kinases, phosphatases or other molecules to the nucleus, where transcription of particular genes is affected.
  • An example of such a signal transduction inhibiting syngene would be a syngene the product of which binds to and blocks the function of a tyrosine kinase membrane receptor.
  • Other types of signalling molecules may also be targets of the syngenes of the invention. Examples of such signalling molecules are cytoplasmic kinases (for example, src or raf), adenylyl cyclases, guanylyl cyclases and the like.
  • SH2 and/or SH3 domains are involved in protein/protein interactions that are important for the signalling process (Anderson et al., 1990, Science 250:979-982). It may be that syngenes that encode a protein having binding domains specific for SH2 and/or SH3 domains will be especially useful for regulating the various signalling pathways of cells.
  • the syngenes via expression of their encoded proteins, can be used to block or down-regulate the translation of a specific mRNA.
  • the syngene can be used to stabilize or destabilize a specific RNA.
  • the syngene encodes a protein that incorporates a binding domain that has been selected for binding to a portion of the RNA sequence that is to be down-regulated, stabilized or destabilized.
  • a syngene is created whose product mimics the structure of a known hormone receptor but that has a different DNA binding site from that of the known hormone receptor.
  • the DNA binding site of the known hormone receptor is replaced with a HSDB directed against a DNA binding site that represents a transcriptional regulatory site of a preselected gene.
  • the effect of the use of such a syngene is that the syngene product (which mimics the hormone receptor) allows the preselected gene to be regulated by the hormone.
  • the hormone binds to the syngene product and the syngene product-hormone complex is translocated to the nucleus of a cell where it binds to the transcriptional regulatory site of the preselected gene, thus activating or repressing the gene.
  • Syngenes encoding binding domains directed to cyclins or cyclin dependent kinases can be used to inhibit the progression of cells through the cell cycle.
  • Syngene products containing binding domains directed to DNA polymerases and associated factors involved in DNA replication can be used to stop or retard DNA synthesis, thus stopping or retarding cell division.
  • products of the present invention is the cellular trafficking machinery that directs or sorts proteins, for example, into the Golgi and to their final
  • tetrapeptide KDEL targets proteins to the lumen of the endoplasmic reticulum.
  • tetrapeptide YQRL (SEQ ID NO: 117), found in the membrane protein TGN38 of the trans Golgi network, has been demonstrated to be necessary and sufficient to target membrane proteins to the trans Golgi (Luzio and Banting, 1993, Trends in Biochem. Sci. 18:395-398) .
  • Such peptide targeting sequences are appropriate ligands for use in isolating binding domains for incorporation into syngenes.
  • Syngenes can also be useful in regulating the interactions of cells with the extracellular matrix. Such interactions depend on binding between the components of the matrix and receptors on the surface of cells. One of the most important
  • laminin By interacting with specific receptors on the surface of cells, laminin serves as a bridge between the cells and the matrix (Martin and Timpl,
  • binding domains that are specific for laminin or its receptor, it is possible to isolate binding domains that can be incorporated into the peptides encoded by syngenes that are useful in modulating the process of axonal or dendrite migration as well as other
  • GTPases are thought to be involved in such membrane transport processes as movement of membrane vesicles from the endoplasmic reticulum (ER) through the Golgi to the plasma
  • GTPases The seven classes of GTPases are:
  • Sar proteins are believed to be involved in membrane vesicle budding from the ER and transport of the budded vesicles to the Golgi.
  • a postulated mechanism envisions Sar proteins in their GDP-bound form interacting with a specific receptor on the transitional elements of the ER. Transitional
  • nascent vesicle buds off the ER in a process accompanied by the exchange of the bound GDP for GTP. This exchange is catalyzed by a
  • GEF Sar specific guanine nucleotide exchange factor
  • GAP Sar specific GTPase activating protein
  • Arf proteins are believed to function in a manner similar to Sar proteins. But, whereas Sar proteins are involved in vesicle budding and transport between the ER and the Golgi, Arf proteins are thought to mediate transport between compartments of the
  • Sar proteins, Arf proteins, and their associated GEFs and GAPs are suitable targets for the action of syngenes.
  • a random peptide library could be screened for binding domains that are specific for these proteins. Such binding domains could be
  • dynamin does not seem to be involved in transport of membrane vesicles from the ER to the Golgi. Instead, dynamin seems to participate in the receptor mediated endocytotic pathway involving clathrin-coated vesicles. Mutants of dynamin that are unable to bind or hydrolyze GTP block receptor mediated endocytosis in mammalian cells (van der Bliek et al., 1993, J. Cell Biol. 122:553- 563; Herskovits et al., 1993, J. Cell Biol. 122: 565- 578).
  • dynamin may be involved in the rapid endocytosis of synaptic vesicles after exocytosis in nerve terminals (Robinson, et al., 1993, Nature 365:163-166). Syngenes containing binding domains specific for dynamin could be used to regulate the process of endocytosis.
  • Rab proteins are a large class of proteins (more than 30 members have been discovered in
  • Rab 1 is involved in the early phases of the secretory pathway such as vesicle budding from the ER and vesicle movement from the ER to the cis Golgi (Peter et al., 1993, J. Cell Biol. 122:1155- 1168; Plutner et al., 1991, J. Cell Biol. 115:31-43; Tisdale et al., 1992, J. Cell Biol. 119:749-761;
  • Rab 6 is found in a complex with a 62 kd protein in the membranes of the trans Golgi network. Antibodies to Rab 6 (or to the 62 kd protein)
  • subsections show, by using the methods of the present invention, one can isolate binding domains that can distinguish between closely related ligands. One can then incorporate those binding domains into syngenes. In this way, it should be possible to make syngenes containing binding domains that are specific for a single member of the Rab family. These syngenes can then be used to modulate those aspects of membrane trafficking in which that member participates without affecting other aspects.
  • heterotrimeric G proteins in some aspects of membrane trafficking.
  • agonists and antagonists of G ⁇ have been shown to affect export from the ER
  • G ⁇ i inhibits membrane budding from the trans Golgi while G ⁇ s promotes budding (Leyte et al., 1992, Trends Cell Biol. 2:91-94;
  • a peptide from a random peptide library has been identified as a binder for a particular target ligand of interest according to the methods of the invention, it may be useful to determine what region (s) of the expressed peptide sequence is (are) responsible for binding to the target ligand. Such analysis can be conducted at two different levels, i.e., the nucleotide sequence and amino acid sequence levels.
  • the inserted oligonucleotides can be cleaved using appropriate restriction enzymes and religated into the original expression vector and the expression product of such vector screened for ligand binding to identify the oligonucleotides that encode the binding region of the peptide.
  • the oligonucleotides can be transferred into another vector, e.g., from phage to phagemid or to p340-lD or to pLamB plasmid.
  • the newly expressed fusion proteins should acquire the same binding activity if the domain is necessary and sufficient for binding to the ligand.
  • This last approach also assesses whether or not flanking amino acid residues encoded by the original vector (i.e., fusion partner) influence peptide binding in any fashion.
  • the oligonucleotides can be
  • the inserted oligonucleotides are subdivided into two equal halves. If the peptide domain important for binding is small, then one recombinant clone would demonstrate binding and the other would not. If neither have binding, then either both are important or the essential portion of the domain spans the middle (which can be tested by expressing just the central region).
  • the binding domains can be analyzed.
  • the entire peptide should be synthesized and assessed for binding to the target ligand to verify that the peptide is necessary and sufficient for binding.
  • overlapping 10-mers can be synthesized, based on the amino acid sequence of the random peptide binding domain, and tested to identify those binding the ligand.
  • linear motifs may become apparent after comparing the primary structures of different binding peptides from the library having binding affinity for a target ligand. The contribution of these motifs to binding can be verified with synthesized peptides in competition experiments (i.e., determine the concentration of peptide capable of inhibiting 50% of the binding of the phage to its target; IC 50 ). Conversely, the motif or any region suspected to be important for binding can be removed from or mutated within the DNA encoding the random peptide insert and the altered displayed peptide can be retested for binding.
  • binding domain of a random peptide has been identified, differently displayed binding domains can be created by isolating and fusing the binding domain of one random peptide to a new effector domain.
  • the biologically or chemically active effector domain of the peptide can thus be varied.
  • the binding characteristics of an individual peptide can be modified by varying the binding domain sequence to produce a related family of peptides with differing properties for a specific ligand.
  • the identified random peptides can be improved by additional rounds of random mutagenesis, selection, and amplification of the nucleotide sequences encoding the binding domains.
  • Mutagenesis can be accomplished by creating and cloning a new set of oligonucleotides that differ slightly from the parent sequence, e.g., by 1-10%. Selection and amplification are achieved as described above. By way of example, to verify that the isolated peptides have improved binding
  • syngenes of the present invention are synthetic genes, that is, genes that are not derived from a naturally occurring genome.
  • syngenes are made up of, at least in part,
  • Syngenes may be composed of totally synthetic gene sequences or combinations of natural and totally synthetic gene sequences.
  • Syngenes encode a syngene product which is a protein having at least one functional domain.
  • the functional domain is a binding domain with affinity for a ligand. In a preferred aspect, this binding domain is characterized by l)its strength of binding under specific conditions, 2) the stability of its binding under specific conditions, and 3) its
  • syngene may encode additional functional domains, for example an amino acid sequence that directs cellular trafficking of the syngene product to the desired compartment of the cell; e.g., the
  • tetrapeptide KDEL (SEQ ID NO: 116), KKXX (SEQ ID NO: 118) or KXKXX (SEQ ID NO: 119) where X is any amino acid), to target peptides to the lumen of the
  • a third functional domain may be one that enhances activity of the syngene product, for example a
  • the syngenes thus optionally encode
  • additional sequences besides the encoded binding peptide.
  • additional sequences can be markers, linkers, transcriptional activation signals,
  • the syngene preferably includes regulatory sequences that control the expression of the coding region of the syngene, nucleic acid coding sequences encoding the binding peptide, and optional sequences.
  • the syngenes of the invention are created by inserting nucleotides encoding synthetic binding domains discovered by screening libraries as described herein into the context of additional protein coding sequences. This can be done by replacing the DNA binding domain of a known protein or by assembling a totally synthetic gene.
  • the syngene will generally contain other non-protein coding sequences. These non-protein coding sequences will generally be involved in the control of the expression of the syngene.
  • the syngene preferably contains sequences for initiating
  • transcriptional processing signals such as a poly A addition signal.
  • the syngene preferably also contains a translation termination signal.
  • splicing of the RNA transcript encoded by the syngene may also be desirable.
  • the addition of nucleotide sequences in the syngene other than those encoding the binding domain can provide for in vivo or
  • the syngene comprises a promoter operably linked to the coding sequences, followed by (3') transcriptional termination and poly A addition signals.
  • the encoded syngene product can contain an additional region, i.e., an amino acid sequence that functions as a linker domain between one or more of the other domains of the syngene.
  • an additional region i.e., an amino acid sequence that functions as a linker domain between one or more of the other domains of the syngene.
  • the presence or absence of the linker domain is optional, as is the type of linker that may be used.
  • the syngene is preferably incorporated into a vector, for replication, and/or expression of the syngene. Any vector known in the art can be used. In addition to comprising the syngene, the vector
  • syngene products are hybrid proteins.
  • the amino terminus will be amino terminus.
  • binding domains generally consist of a methionine residue followed by a spacer sequence of 1-15 amino acids, followed by one or more binding domains (i.e., the sequences
  • the middle domain of the hybrid protein will often consist of a marker that aids in pre-clinical characterization, e.g. monitoring expression of the syngene in vi tro, as in, for
  • tissue culture cells This is likely to be a readily detectable epitope or other label, e.g., ⁇ - galactosidase, luciferase or chloramphenicol acetyl transferase genes.
  • This marker generally will be deleted when the syngene is used clinically.
  • a cellular trafficking domain e.g., KDEL (SEQ ID NO: 116) or YQRL (SEQ ID NO: 117
  • KDEL SEQ ID NO: 116
  • YQRL SEQ ID NO: 117
  • NLS nuclear localization signal
  • Additional functional domains e.g., transcriptional activation sequences, or spacers can also be included.
  • the binding domains, the marker, the trafficking domain, and additional functional domains appear in the syngene may not be critical. The order disclosed above is merely illustrative of one
  • the trafficking signal such as KDEL (SEQ ID NO: 116) or YQRL (SEQ ID NO: 117), or is a marker (label) domain.
  • the additional functional domains can be transcriptional activation sequences, NLSs, or
  • syngene product is designed to activate the transcription of a gene, then the syngene will, in addition to the domains discussed above (or instead of the marker domain), contain a
  • transcriptional activation domain examples include: a homopolymeric stretch of glutamine residues, an acidic activation domain (sometimes known as a "negative noodle"), a proline-rich domain, or a serine-threonine-rich domain. It has been
  • a nuclear localization signal such as that of the nucleoplasmin gene, may be added.
  • nucleoplasmin nuclear localization signal has been shown to function in a variety of contexts, where it leads to the nuclear localization of proteins in which it appears.
  • Nuclear localization signals that can be used in the present invention are not limited to those specifically disclosed herein; they include any that are known in the art.
  • the amino acid coding sequence of a syngene product begins with an amino-terminal spacer sequence, for example, MGASGAS (SEQ ID NO: 120), followed by a nuclear localization sequence which may be KRPAATKKAGQAKKKKR (SEQ ID NO: 121) (the nucleoplasmin NLS, see Kang et al., 1994, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91:340-344) followed by a second spacer sequence, for example, GASGAS (SEQ ID NO: 122), followed by the binding domain.
  • the amino acid coding sequence of a syngene product begins with an amino-terminal spacer sequence, for example, MGASGAS (SEQ ID NO: 120), followed
  • sequences of a syngene product begins with an amino- terminal spacer sequence, followed by the binding domain, followed by a second spacer sequence, followed by the carboxy-terminal nuclear localization signal MISESLRKAIGKR (SEQ ID NO: 123) (Shieh et al., 1993, Plant-Physiol. 101:353-61).
  • the NLS of the p50 subunit of NF- ⁇ B, VQRLRQLM (SEQ ID NO: 124) is used (Henkel et al., 1992, Cell 68:1121- 1133).
  • Other nuclear localization signals which can be used as part of a syngene product include but are not limited to those found in various steroid hormone receptors, the SV40 large T antigen, or the consensus sequence therefor, as set forth in Table 7 below.
  • the syngene can encode multiple copies of one or more binding domains or additionally contain multiple non-binding domains.
  • the syngene can be modified at the base moiety, sugar moiety, or phosphate backbone, to stabilize the syngene, promote in vivo transport or localization, etc.
  • Such modifications to bases, sugar moieties, and phosphate backbones are made in such a way that the modifications do not interfere with the transcription of the syngene, and thus do not
  • the syngene may include other appended groups such as peptides, or agents
  • the syngene may comprise at least one modified base moiety which is selected from the group including but not limited to 5-fluorouracil,
  • hypoxanthine xantine
  • 4-acetylcytosine 4-acetylcytosine
  • 2-thiocytosine 5-methyl-2-thiouracil, 2-thiouracil, 4-thiouracil, 5-methyluracil, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid methylester, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid (v), 5-methyl- 2-thiouracil, 3- (3-amino-3-N-2-carboxypropyl) uracil, (acp3)w, and 2,6-diaminopurine.
  • the syngene comprises at least one modified sugar moiety selected from the group including but not limited to arabinose,
  • the syngene comprises at least one modified phosphate backbone selected from the group consisting of a
  • phosphordiamidate a methylphosphonate, an alkyl phosphotriester, and a formacetal or analog thereof.
  • a portion of the syngene (preferably noncoding) consists of oi-anomeric nucleotides.
  • An ⁇ -anomeric oligonucleotide forms specific double-stranded hybrids with complementary RNA in which, contrary to the usual 0-units, the strands run parallel to each other (Gautier et al., 1987, Nucl. Acids Res. 15:6625-6641).
  • Syngenes of the invention may be synthesized by standard methods known in the art, e.g. by use of an automated DNA synthesizer (such as are commercially available from Biosearch, Applied Biosystems, etc.).
  • an automated DNA synthesizer such as are commercially available from Biosearch, Applied Biosystems, etc.
  • phosphorothioate oligonucleotides may be synthesized by the method of Stein et al. (1988, Nucl. Acids Res. 16:3209), methylphosphonate
  • oligonucleotides can be prepared by use of controlled pore glass polymer supports (Sarin et al., 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 85:7448-7451), etc.
  • the syngenes are made by recombinant DNA techniques commonly known in the art, e.g. by replicating a vector comprising the syngene in a suitable host cell.
  • the syngene comprises a 2'-0-methylribonucleotide (Inoue et al., 1987, Nucl. Acids Res. 15:6131-6148), or a chimeric RNA-DNA analogue (Inoue et al., 1987, FEBS Lett.
  • the syngene is constructed as part of an expression vector that can be introduced in vivo such that it is taken up by a cell, within which cell the vector or a portion thereof is transcribed, leading to the production of the encoded syngene product.
  • a vector can remain episomal or become chromosomally integrated, as long as it can be transcribed to produce the syngene product.
  • vectors can be constructed by recombinant DNA technology methods standard in the art.
  • Vectors can be plasmid, viral, or others known in the art, used for replication and expression in mammalian cells. Expression of the sequence encoding the syngene product can be by any promoter known in the art to act in mammalian, preferably human, cells.
  • Such promoters can be inducible or constitutive.
  • Such promoters include but are not limited to: the SV40 early promoter region (Bernoist and Chambon, 1981, Nature 290:304-310), the promoter contained in the 3' long terminal repeat of Rous sarcoma virus (Yamamoto et al., 1980, Cell
  • promoters that function in a wide variety of cell types can be used to obtain expression in a wide variety of cell types where the syngene is introduced.
  • a viral promoter such as a human cytomegalovirus early gene promoter or the adenovirus major late promoter to drive the expression of the syngene.
  • a viral promoter such as a human cytomegalovirus early gene promoter or the adenovirus major late promoter
  • Such viral promoters are active in a wide variety of mammalian cell types.
  • constitutive promoters are actin promoters and the PGK (phosphoglycerol kinase) promoter. Since the latter promoter is functional for high level transcription in all living mammalian cells it is an especially preferred choice.
  • tissue specific control regions which is active in pancreatic acinar cells (Swift et al., 1984, Cell 38:639-646; Ornitz et al., 1986, Cold Spring Harbor Symp. Quant. Biol.
  • pancreatic beta cells Pancreatic beta cells (Hanahan, 1985, Nature 315:115- 122), immunoglobulin gene control region which is active in lymphoid cells (Grosschedl et al., 1984, Cell 38:647-658; Adames et al., 1985, Nature 318:533- 538; Alexander et al., 1987, Mol. Cell. Biol. 7:1436- 1444), mouse mammary tumor virus control region which is active in testicular, breast, lymphoid and mast cells (Leder et al., 1986, Cell 45:485-495), albumin gene control region which is active in liver (Pinkert et al., 1987, Genes and Devel.
  • alpha- fetoprotein gene control region which is active in liver (Krumlauf et al., 1985, Mol. Cell. Biol. 5:1639- 1648; Hammer et al., 1987, Science 235:53-58; alpha 1- antitrypsin gene control region which is active in the liver (Kelsey et al., 1987, Genes and Devel. 1:161- 171), beta-globin gene control region which is active in myeloid cells (Mogram et al., 1985, Nature 315:338- 340; Kollias et al., 1986, Cell 46:89-94; myelin basic protein gene control region which is active in
  • oligodendrocyte cells in the brain (Readhead et al., 1987, Cell 48:703-712); myosin light chain-2 gene control region which is active in skeletal muscle (Sani, 1985, Nature 314:283-286), and gonadotropic releasing hormone gene control region which is active in the hypothalamus (Mason et al., 1986, Science
  • shuttle vectors may be used such that a plasmid is grown in E. coli and purified DNA transferred into mammalian cells by the use of electroporation, calcium phosphate precipitates, DEAE dextran or with the assistance of liposomes.
  • electroporation calcium phosphate precipitates
  • DEAE dextran DEAE dextran
  • liposomes Such an exemplary shuttle vector is shown in Figure 3.
  • herpes simplex virus may be used to deliver genes to the brain (Leib and Olivo, 1993, Bioessays 15:547-54), retroviruses (Salmons and Gunzburg, 1993, Human Gene Therapy 4:129-142) and adeno-a ⁇ sociated virus (Walsh et al., 1993, Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 204:289-300), which have the advantage of becoming integrated into the cellular DNA, may be used to deliver syngenes via transduction into hematopoietic, pluripotent stem cells and other somatic cells.
  • the degeneracy of the genetic code allows for a plurality of DNA sequences to be constructed that all code for the same peptide or protein in a syngene.
  • codon frequency usage such as that found in Ausubel et al. (eds.), 1993, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., N.Y., at Appendix 1 A.1.6.
  • Syngenes that encode binding domains that bind to a DNA transcriptional regulatory region, but that do not contain a transcriptional activation signal, can be tested for their ability to inhibit the transcription of a gene by the following assay, presented by way of example but not limitation.
  • the assay is carried out by using three sets of plasmids in an established cell line.
  • the cell line expresses a transcription factor that has a DNA binding site that is the same as the DNA binding site of the syngene product that is to be assayed.
  • the three plasmids have the following characteristics:
  • Plasmid 1 This plasmid contains the syngene to be tested cloned into a vector that will direct the expression of the syngene in the cell line;
  • Plasmid 2 This plasmid contains a reporter gene.
  • the promoter of the reporter gene contains the DNA sequence which forms the binding site for the transcription factor expressed by the cells and for the binding domain encoded by the syngene. Normally, this DNA sequence will be essentially the same
  • the reporter gene codes for the expression of any detectable marker such as, for example,
  • chloramphenicol acetyl transferase CAT
  • ⁇ - galactosidase horse radish peroxidase, etc.
  • Plasmid 3 This is a control plasmid to monitor the efficiency of transfection. It directs the expression of a second reporter gene expressing a product that can be easily assayed. The activity of the promoter that drives the expression of this product is not dependent upon binding of a
  • the promoter is constitutive in the cell being used.
  • it is an inducible
  • the reporter gene in plasmid 3 is different from that in plasmid 2.
  • Two procedures are done, consisting of a test procedure and a control procedure. In the test procedure, the three plasmids are simultaneously co- introduced into each cell. Introduction can be by any of the well known methods in the art. Such methods include electroporation, calcium phosphate mediated transfection, and liposome mediated transfection.
  • introduction is by electroporation.
  • plasmids 2 and 3 are co- introduced, without plasmid 1 (which contains the syngene).
  • the amounts of expressed reporter gene products from plasmids 2 and 3 are measured. If the syngene product is able to compete with the transcription factor for binding to the DNA binding sequence in the promoter of the first reporter gene on plasmid 2, then the level of expression of the first reporter gene product will be low. This is because binding of the syngene product to the DNA binding sequence in the promoter of the first reporter gene will prevent binding of the transcription factor to that sequence. Therefore, the transcription factor will not be able to activate the transcription of the first reporter gene. If the syngene product is not able to compete with the transcription factor, then the level of expression of the first reporter gene product will be high. This will be the case in the control procedure, where plasmid 1, which contains the syngene, is not used.
  • the level of expression of the first reporter gene product (from plasmid 2) is compared to the level of expression of the second reporter gene product (from plasmid 3) to determine the ratio of expression of the two products.
  • This ratio is determined for both the test procedure with, and the control procedure without, plasmid 1 containing the syngene. When the ratio from the test procedure is less that the ratio from the control procedure, this indicates that the syngene product is competing with the transcription factor for binding to the DNA binding sequence in the promoter of the first reporter gene. When the ratio from the test procedure is equal to the ratio from the control procedure, this
  • a syngene product can inhibit the transcription of a gene the transcription of which depends upon binding of the transcription factor NF- ⁇ B to its DNA binding site
  • a human cell line that expresses NF- ⁇ B e.g., Jurkat, a T cell line; Okamoto et al., 1994, J. Biol. Chem. 269:8582-8587.
  • the first plasmid e.g., Jurkat, a T cell line; Okamoto et al., 1994, J. Biol. Chem. 269:8582-8587.
  • the second plasmid contains the syngene which is driven by the adenovirus major late promoter or by some other promoter that is active in the cells being used.
  • the second plasmid contains the first reporter gene which consists of the H2 ⁇ b promoter (Baldwin and Sharp, 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85:723-727) directing the expression of the CAT gene.
  • the H2 ⁇ b promoter is dependent upon NF- ⁇ B binding for its activity.
  • the control plasmid consists of the luciferase gene (the second reporter gene) driven by a promoter that does not depend upon NF- ⁇ B for its expression.
  • the three plasmids are introduced into the cells via electroporation.
  • the syngene that is being assayed expresses a binding domain that is specific for the NF- ⁇ B binding site of the H2 ⁇ b gene but does not also contain a transcriptional activation site, then the ratio of CAT activity to luciferase activity will be low when compared to the same ratio obtained when no syngene, or a control syngene that does not encode a binding site that is specific for the NF- ⁇ B binding site, is used. This is because the syngene that encodes a binding domain that specifically binds the NF- ⁇ B binding site will bind the NF- ⁇ B site in the reporter plasmid containing the CAT gene. This will prevent binding of the cell's endogenous NF- ⁇ B transcription factor to that site, thus preventing NF- ⁇ B from activating the promoter of the reporter gene.
  • a cell line To test for activation, a cell line must be used that does not express the transcription factor whose binding site is the same as that of the syngene product. Because the cell line does not express the transcription factor, the first reporter gene on the second plasmid will not be transcribed in the absence of a syngene product. If the syngene product is capable of binding to the DNA binding sequence in the promoter of the first reporter gene and is also capable of activating transcription, the reporter gene on the second plasmid will be expressed. In this assay, the syngene to be tested will be tested.
  • telomeres preferably encode a transcriptional activation signal in addition to a binding domain.
  • the ratio of first reporter gene product over second reporter gene products is compared for the test and control procedures (with and without the syngene).
  • the presence in the test procedure of a syngene that encodes a product that is capable of binding to the promoter of, and activating the transcription of, the first reporter gene will result in a larger value for the ratio in the case of the test procedure as compared to the control procedure.
  • a cell line is used that substantially does not express NF- ⁇ B.
  • HeLa cells (Scheinman et al., 1993, Mol. Cell. Biol. 13:6089-6101) express only low levels of
  • NF- ⁇ B endogenous NF- ⁇ B and thus can be used.
  • F9 embryonal carcinoma cells can be used.
  • the same three plasmids as above are co-transfected into this cell line. If the syngene product contains a binding domain specific for the NF- ⁇ B site as well as a transcriptional activation domain, the ratio of CAT activity to luciferase activity will be high when compared to the same ratio obtained when no syngene, or a control syngene product that lacks a binding domain specific for the NF- ⁇ B site, is used.
  • CAT activity When no syngene, or a control syngene, is used, CAT activity will be very low because the cell, lacking NF- ⁇ B activity, will transcribe the H2 ⁇ b promoter (which drives expression of the CAT gene) at a very low rate. Thus, there will be very little CAT activity unless the syngene to be assayed binds to the NF- ⁇ B site on the H2 ⁇ b promoter and activates expression of the CAT gene.
  • a cell line that does not express a transcription factor of interest may be made by methods known in the art.
  • the gene for the transcription factor of interest may be inactivated by promoting homologous recombination of that gene with a non-functional copy of itself (Roller and Smithies, 1989, Proc. Natl.
  • This vector consists of an adenovirus major late promoter driving a gene cassette with the adenovirus tripartite leader sequence and a hemoglobin splice donor and acceptor followed by the desired coding sequences followed by the
  • this vector has the pBR322 replicon and an antibiotic resistance marker for growth in E. coli .
  • the DNA sequences that define the binding sites of many transcription factors differ somewhat from gene to gene.
  • the NF- ⁇ B binding site in the HLA class I genes differs from the NF- ⁇ B site in the IL-6 gene or the IL-8 gene
  • IL-6 ⁇ B and IL-8 ⁇ B are recognized by slightly different versions of the transcription factors
  • the same transcription factor recognizes the somewhat different versions of its binding site.
  • the use of the syngenes of the present invention affords the opportunity for achieving a level of regulation of the different sites that surpasses that which could be achieved by the use of the natural transcription factor. This is because it is possible to isolate highly specific DNA binding domains from random synthetic peptide libraries according to the present invention that bind specifically to one member of the related binding sites of a given transcription factor but that do not bind to the other sites.
  • the invention also provides methods for use of the syngenes, e.g., in diagnosis and therapy of various disorders.
  • the present invention vastly expands the number of genes that are available for use in gene therapy.
  • the present invention provides methods for finding synthetic nucleic acids encoding proteins with diagnostic or therapeutic value, or value in in vi tro assays.
  • the present invention further provides methods for delivery of such peptides or proteins in vivo by expression in vivo from the administered syngene.
  • the present invention provides methods for using synthetic peptides or proteins, and the genes encoding them, to fulfill roles that naturally
  • syngene a nucleic acid that encodes the peptide.
  • a syngene can be used, e.g., in gene therapy.
  • the present invention provides methods for identifying syngenes that inhibit or enhance the transcriptional activity of a wide variety of naturally occurring genes, preferably with a specificity not found in natural systems.
  • syngenes can be used to effect differential regulation of closely related transcriptional regulatory sites as described in Section 5.7.
  • Syngene products may bind to actin and thus be of use in regulating mitotic spindle formation and cell division.
  • Syngenes are also useful for modulating processes that occur outside of the nucleus.
  • the encoded protein of a syngene produced by intracellular expression of the syngene, may be used to affect the activity of
  • inhibitors of transcription factors such as IF- ⁇ B. They may also be used to modulate signal transduction pathways, metabolic pathways, RNA translation, and intracellular trafficking. In the cell membrane, syngenes may be used to modulate the activity of membrane receptors, ion channels, or exocytotic and endocytotic pathways.
  • syngenes via expression of their encoded proteins, may be used to regulate cell/cell signalling and transcytosis.
  • Cell/cell junctions and the extracellular matrix are appropriate targets for syngenes.
  • Syngenes may be used to regulate cell adhesion or cell/cell recognition.
  • syngenes may be used to regulate the activity of receptor ligands.
  • Syngenes can be used in any appropriate method of gene therapy, as would be recognized by those in the art upon considering this disclosure.
  • the resulting action of a syngene in the gene therapy patient can, for example, lead to the activation or inhibition of a preselected gene in the patient, thus leading to improvement of the diseased condition afflicting the patient.
  • Methods of gene therapy are detailed in Section 5.8.1.
  • the syngenes may be introduced into appropriate host cells and thereby used for the recombinant production of their encoded peptides.
  • the peptides thus produced can be used, e.g., in in vi tro assays to detect and/or quantitate the ligand of choice to which they bind, for
  • the invention relates to the peptide products of syngenes and their therapeutic and diagnostic uses.
  • the syngene-encoded peptides can be used therapeutically and diagnostically, to
  • syngene products can be used in in vi tro binding assays, to detect and/or measure amounts of their binding partners
  • syngene products can be used in vivo, e.g., labeled with an appropriate marker, to image their binding partners.
  • gene therapy refers to therapy performed by the administration of a nucleic acid to a subject.
  • the nucleic acid either directly or indirectly via its encoded protein, mediates a therapeutic effect in the subject.
  • syngenes of the present invention can be used in any of the methods for gene therapy available in the art.
  • the descriptions below are meant to be illustrative of such methods. It will be readily understood by those of skill in the art that the methods illustrated represent only a sample of all available methods of gene therapy.
  • Delivery of the syngene into a patient may be either direct, in which case the patient is
  • syngene or syngene-carrying vector directly exposed to the syngene or syngene-carrying vector, or indirect, in which case, cells are first transformed with the syngene in vitro, then
  • the syngene is directly administered in vivo for therapeutic effect, whereby it is expressed to produce the syngene
  • nucleic acid expression vector This can be accomplished by any of numerous methods known in the art, e.g., by constructing it as part of an appropriate nucleic acid expression vector and administering it so that it becomes intracellular, e. g. , by infection using a defective or attenuated retroviral or other viral vector (see U.S. Patent No. 4,980,286), or by direct injection of naked DNA, or: by use of microparticle bombardment (e.g., a gene gun; Biolistic, Dupont) , or coating with lipids or cell- surface receptors or transfecting agents,
  • microparticle bombardment e.g., a gene gun; Biolistic, Dupont
  • a syngeneligand complex can be formed in which the ligand comprises a fusogenic viral peptide to disrupt
  • the syngene can be targeted in vivo for cell specific uptake and expression, by targeting a specific receptor (see, e.g., PCT Publications WO 92/06180 dated April 16, 1992 (Wu et al.); WO 92/22635 dated December 23, 1992 (Wilson et al.); WO92/20316 dated November 26, 1992 (Findeis et al.); W093/14188 dated July 22, 1993
  • retroviral vectors are retrovirus that has been modified to incorporate a preselected gene in order to effect the expression of that gene. It has been found that many of the naturally occurring DNA sequences of
  • retroviruses are dispensable in retroviral vectors. Only a small subset of the naturally occurring DNA sequences of retroviruses is necessary. In general, a retroviral vector must contain all of the cis-acting sequences necessary for the packaging and integration of the viral genome. These cis-acting sequences are: a) a long terminal repeat (LTR) , or portions thereof, at each end of the vector;
  • LTR long terminal repeat
  • the gene to be used in gene therapy is cloned into the vector, which facilitates delivery of the gene into a patient.
  • retroviral vectors More detail about retroviral vectors can be found in Boesen et al., 1994, Biotherapy 6:291-302, which describes the use of a retroviral vector to deliver the mdrl gene to hematopoietic stem cells in order to make the stem cells more resistant to
  • Adenoviruses are also of use in gene
  • Adenoviruses are especially attractive vehicles for delivering genes to respiratory
  • Adenoviruses naturally infect respiratory epithelia where they cause a mild disease.
  • Other targets for adenovirus-based delivery systems are liver, the central nervous system, endothelial cells, and muscle.
  • Adenoviruses have the advantage of being capable of infecting non-dividing cells.
  • AAV adeno-associated virus
  • Another approach to gene therapy involves transferring a gene to cells in tissue culture by such methods as electroporation, lipofection, calcium phosphate mediated transfection, or viral infection.
  • the method of transfer includes the transfer of a selectable marker to the cells. The cells are then placed under selection to isolate those cells that have taken up and are expressing the transferred gene. Those cells are then delivered to a patient.
  • the syngene is introduced into a cell prior to administration in vivo of the resulting recombinant cell.
  • introduction can be carried out by any method known in the art, including but not limited to transfection,
  • the technique should provide for the stable transfer of the syngene to the cell, so that the syngene is expressible by the cell and preferably heritable and expressible by its cell progeny.
  • the resulting recombinant cells can be delivered to a patient by various methods known in the art.
  • epithelial cells are injected, e.g., subcutaneously.
  • epithelial cells are injected, e.g., subcutaneously.
  • recombinant skin cells may be applied as a skin graft onto the patient.
  • Recombinant blood cells e.g., hematopoietic stem or progenitor cells
  • the amount of cells envisioned for use depends on the desired effect, patient state, etc., and can be determined by one skilled in the art.
  • Cells into which a syngene can be introduced for purposes of gene therapy encompass any desired, available cell type, and include but are not limited to epithelial cells, endothelial cells, keratinocytes, fibroblasts, muscle cells, hepatocytes; blood cells such as T lymphocytes, B lymphocytes, monocytes, macrophages, neutrophils, eosinophils, megakaryocytes, granulocytes; various stem or progenitor cells, in particular hematopoietic stem or progenitor cells, e.g., as obtained from bone marrow, umbilical cord blood, peripheral blood, fetal liver, etc.
  • the cell used for gene therapy is autologous to the patient.
  • a syngene is introduced into the cells such that it is expressible by the cells or their progeny, and the recombinant cells are then administered in vivo for therapeutic effect; stem and progenitor cells are preferred for use. Any stem and/or progenitor cells which can be isolated and maintained in vitro can potentially be used in
  • Such stem cells include but are not limited to hematopoietic stem cells (HSC) , stem cells of epithelial tissues such as the skin and the lining of the gut, embryonic heart muscle cells, liver stem cells (PCT Publication WO 94/08598, dated April 28, 1994), and neural stem cells (Stemple and Anderson, 1992, Cell 71:973-985).
  • HSC hematopoietic stem cells
  • stem cells of epithelial tissues such as the skin and the lining of the gut
  • embryonic heart muscle cells embryonic heart muscle cells
  • liver stem cells PCT Publication WO 94/08598, dated April 28, 1994
  • neural stem cells Stemple and Anderson, 1992, Cell 71:973-985.
  • ESCs Epithelial stem cells
  • keratinocytes can be obtained from tissues such as the skin and the lining of the gut by known procedures (Rheinwald, 1980, Meth. Cell Bio. 21A:229). In stratified epithelial tissue such as the skin, renewal occurs by mitosis of stem cells within the germinal layer, the layer closest to the basal lamina. Stem cells within the lining of the gut provide for a rapid renewal rate of this tissue.
  • ESCs or keratinocytes obtained from the skin or lining of the gut of a patient or donor can be grown in tissue culture
  • ESCs are provided by a donor, a method for suppression of host versus graft reactivity (e.g., irradiation, drug or antibody administration to promote moderate immunosuppression) can also be used.
  • a method for suppression of host versus graft reactivity e.g., irradiation, drug or antibody administration to promote moderate immunosuppression
  • HSC hematopoietic stem cells
  • any technique which provides for the isolation, propagation, and maintenance in vi tro of HSC can be used in this embodiment of the invention. Techniques by which this may be accomplished include (a) the isolation and establishment of HSC cultures from bone marrow cells isolated from the future host, or a donor, or (b) the use of previously established long- term HSC cultures, which may be allogeneic or
  • Non-autologous HSC are used preferably in conjunction with a method of suppressing
  • human bone marrow cells can be obtained from the posterior iliac crest by needle aspiration (see, e.g., Kodo et al., 1984, J. Clin. Invest. 73:1377-1384).
  • the HSCs can be made highly enriched or in substantially pure form. This
  • enrichment can be accomplished before, during, or after long-term culturing, and can be done by any techniques known in the art.
  • Long-term cultures of bone marrow cells can be established and maintained by using, for example, modified Dexter cell culture techniques (Dexter et al., 1977, J. Cell Physiol.
  • the syngene to be introduced for purposes of gene therapy comprises an inducible promoter operably linked to the coding region, such that expression of the syngene is
  • controllable by controlling the presence or absence of the appropriate inducer of transcription.
  • the invention provides methods of treatment by administration to a subject of an effective amount of a pharmaceutical (therapeutic) composition
  • syngene comprising a syngene.
  • a syngene envisioned for therapeutic use is referred to hereinafter as a
  • Therapeutic or “Therapeutic of the invention.”
  • “Therapeutic” or “Therapeutic of the invention” shall also be used to refer to molecules comprising the encoded peptide products of syngenes, e.g., where a molecule comprising the peptide binding domain encoded by a syngene is used therapeutically.
  • the Therapeutic is
  • the subject is preferably an animal, including but not limited to animals such as cows, pigs, horses, chickens, cats, dogs, etc., and is preferably a mammal, and most preferably human.
  • Formulations and methods of administration that can be employed when the Therapeutic comprises a syngene are described in Section 5.8.1; additional appropriate formulations and routes of administration can be selected from among those described
  • a Therapeutic of the invention e.g., encapsulation in liposomes, microparticles, microcapsules, recombinant cells containing the
  • introduction include but are not limited to intradermal, intramuscular, intraperitoneal,
  • the compounds may be administered by any convenient route, for example by infusion or bolus injection, by absorption through epithelial or
  • mucocutaneous linings e.g., oral mucosa, rectal and intestinal mucosa, etc.
  • Administration can be systemic or local.
  • intraventricular injection may be facilitated by an intraventricular catheter, for example, attached to a reservoir, such as an Ommaya reservoir.
  • a reservoir such as an Ommaya reservoir.
  • liposomes targeted via antibodies to specific identifiable cell surface antigens may be desirable to utilize liposomes targeted via antibodies to specific identifiable cell surface antigens.
  • the Therapeutic comprises a syngene that is part of an expression vector that expresses the syngene in a suitable host.
  • a syngene has a promoter operably linked to the syngene coding region, said promoter being inducible or constitutive.
  • the syngene is a nucleic acid molecule in which the syngene coding sequences and any other desired sequences are flanked by regions that promote homologous recombination at a desired site in the genome, thus providing for intrachromosomal expression of the syngene (Roller and Smithies, 1989, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:8932-8935; Zijlstra et al., 1989, Nature 342:435-438).
  • the Therapeutics of the invention may be desirable to administer the Therapeutics of the invention locally to the area in need of treatment; this may be achieved by, for example, and not by way of limitation, local infusion during surgery, topical application, e.g., in conjunction with a , dressing after surgery, by injection, by means of a catheter, by means of a suppository, or by means of an implant, said implant being of a porous, non-porous, or gelatinous material, including membranes, such as sialastic membranes, or fibers.
  • the present invention provides
  • compositions comprise a therapeutically effective amount of a
  • Such a carrier includes but is not limited to saline, buffered saline, dextrose, water, glycerol, ethanol, and combinations thereof.
  • the carrier and composition can be sterile.
  • formulation should suit the mode of administration.
  • the composition can also contain minor amounts of wetting or emulsifying agents, or pH buffering agents.
  • the composition can be a liquid solution, suspension, emulsion, tablet, pill, capsule, sustained release formulation, or powder.
  • the composition can be formulated as a suppository, with traditional binders and carriers such as triglycerides.
  • Oral formulation can include standard carriers such as pharmaceutical grades of mannitol, lactose, starch, magnesium stearate, sodium saccharine, cellulose, magnesium carbonate, etc.
  • the composition is formulated in accordance with routine procedures as a pharmaceutical composition adapted for intravenous administration to human beings.
  • a pharmaceutical composition adapted for intravenous administration to human beings.
  • compositions for intravenous administration are solutions in sterile isotonic aqueous buffer. Where necessary, the composition may also include a
  • solubilizing agent and a local anesthetic such as lignocaine to ease pain at the site of the injection.
  • the ingredients are supplied either separately or mixed together in unit dosage form, for example, as a dry lyophilized powder or water free concentrate in a hermetically sealed container such as an ampoule or sachette indicating the quantity of active agent.
  • a hermetically sealed container such as an ampoule or sachette indicating the quantity of active agent.
  • composition administered by infusion, it can be dispensed with an infusion bottle containing sterile pharmaceutical grade water or saline.
  • an ampoule of sterile water for injection or saline can be provided so that the ingredients may be mixed prior to administration.
  • the Therapeutics of the invention can be formulated as neutral or salt forms.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include those formed with free amino groups such as those derived from hydrochloric, phosphoric, acetic, oxalic, tartaric acids, etc., and those formed with free carboxyl groups such as those derived from sodium, potassium, ammonium, calcium, ferric hydroxides, isopropylamine, triethylamine, 2- ethylamino ethanol, histidine, procaine, etc.
  • the invention also provides a pharmaceutical pack or kit comprising one or more containers filled with one or more of the ingredients of the
  • Optionally associated with such container (s) can be a notice in the form prescribed by a governmental agency regulating the manufacture, use or sale of
  • TSAR library is utilized; however, to those skilled in the art, it will be apparent that other random peptide display libraries may be used.
  • An example of a TSAR library is the TSAR-9 library disclosed in Kay et al., 1993, Gene 128:59-65.
  • TSAR-9 constructs display a peptide of about 38 amino acids in length having 36 totally random positions.
  • H2 ⁇ B-U 5'gggtGGGGATTCCCCatct
  • SEQ ID NO: 136 5' agatGGGGAATCCCCaccc
  • H2 ⁇ b-L 5' agatGGGGAATCCCCaccc
  • H2 ⁇ B oligonucleotide hybridization of H2 ⁇ B-U and H2 ⁇ B-L is called the H2 ⁇ B oligonucleotide.
  • the upper case sequence is the known NF- ⁇ B binding site (see Baldwin and Sharp, 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci, USA 85:723-727). This particular sequence is homologous to the NF- ⁇ B regulatory domain of the murine homologue of the human HLA class I gene.
  • the murine sequence is from the H-2k (d) gene and is in the databases as GenBank accession X01815.
  • the upper case NF- ⁇ B site is completely conserved in human HLA class I genes such as HLA-B27 (GenBank M12967) and HLA-J (GenBank M80470) and HLA-A2 (GenBank K02883).
  • IL-6 is an attractive target for regulation by syngenes since it has been shown to be involved in immune responses and the acute phase protein responses (Kishimoto, 1989, Blood 74:1-10; Clark, 1989, Ann.
  • IL6 ⁇ B-U 5' atgtGGGATTTTCCcatg
  • IL6 ⁇ B-L 5' catgGGAAAATCCCacat
  • IL6 ⁇ B-L 5' catgGGAAAATCCCacat
  • oligonucleotides For the NF- ⁇ B site in the IL-8 gene, the following oligonucleotides are used:
  • IL8 ⁇ B-U 5'atcgTGGAATTTCCtctg
  • IL8 ⁇ B-L 5' cagaGGAAATTCCAcgat
  • IL8 ⁇ B-L 5' cagaGGAAATTCCAcgat
  • NF-IL6 site found in the IL6 gene, the following oligonucleotides are synthesized:
  • NFIL6-U 5' acgtcATTGCACAAtctt
  • NFIL6-L 5' aagaTTGTGCAATgacgt
  • the ligated fragments of DNA can be analyzed by gel electrophoresis with visualization of ethidium bromide stained DNA using short wave UV light to determine the average size of a ligated fragment and thus, the average number of cis-elements per fragment. For the experiments carried out below, it is optimal to have either one site per molecule (unligated fragments) or 10 sites per molecule. Other numbers of sites are less desirable. Fragments of the appropriate size can be recovered by gel electrophoresis or velocity sedimentation centrifugation techniques.
  • Phage from a TSAR library that bind to specific DNA sequences are isolated by a process of screening called panning.
  • panning a process of screening
  • Universal Covalent multiwell plates obtained from Costar (Cambridge, MA) , or similar multiwell plates, are utilized.
  • the specific DNA target is immobilized directly to the wells in a procedure supplied by the manufacturer.
  • Costar' s Universal Covalent surface is intended to covalently immobilize biomolecules via an abstractable hydrogen using UV illumination resulting in a carbon-carbon bond. Although the linkage is non-specific and does not allow for site-directed orientation of a biomolecule, this surface is very useful for the immobilization of double stranded DNA.
  • a 100 ⁇ l DNA sample (10 ⁇ g/ml in 50 mM Na Acetate buffer) is added to each of the appropriate wells and incubated at room temperature for 1 hr. The solution is removed and the DNA covalently immobilized to the surface by exposing the plate to UV light for the time determined to be optimal in the UV Intensity
  • panning can be carried out is as follows. Aliquots of phage are first placed into ELISA plate wells coated only with streptavidin. This removes those phage capable of binding to streptavidin. Then the aliquots are transferred to wells coated with target DNA
  • a biotin linked to streptavidin bound to the surface of an ELISA plate well Preferably, Reacti-Bind brand streptavidin coated strip plates, cat. # 15124 are used. These are obtainable from Pierce, 3747 North Meridian Road, Rockford, IL.
  • E.I.A./R.I.A. multi-well plates (cat. #3590). All wells are coated with streptavidin using 1 ⁇ g/ml in 100 mM Na Bicarbonate, pH 8.4 buffer. 50 ⁇ l are added to each well and incubated at 4oC overnight or 22°C for 4 hrs. The streptavidin solution is pipetted away, and the remaining binding surfaces are blocked with 300 ⁇ l/well of a solution containing 5 mg/ml BSA in 100 mM Na Bicarbonate, pH 8.4 buffer for 1 hr at 37°C or overnight at 4°C.
  • the wells on a coated 96-well multi-well plate are labelled in pairs. Two wells are used for each specific DNA target, one well for each target is labelled "A" and the other is labeled "B".
  • the wells are washed with a Wash Buffer composed of IX phosphate buffered saline (PBS), 0.1% Tween ® 20 and 0.1% bovine serum albumin (BSA). The washing is repeated three times.
  • PBS IX phosphate buffered saline
  • BSA bovine serum albumin
  • oligonucleotide fragments (specific target DNA) are added to wells labelled "B" using 50 ⁇ l of a DNA solution (20 ⁇ g/ml) in lx PBS buffer.
  • the streptavidin is allowed to capture the DNA for 2 hrs at room temperature.
  • the DNA solutions are withdrawn with a pipette and discarded. All non-specifically bound DNA is washed away using wash buffer described above.
  • Elution of DNA binding phage is done by the addition of 60 ⁇ l 50 mM glycine-HCl pH 2.0 buffer for 10 minutes at 65°C. The eluted phage are transferred to a 60 ⁇ l solution of 200 mM sodium phosphate, pH 7.4 to neutralize.
  • One round of panning is now complete.
  • This population of phage is not a pure population of phage that bind specific DNA target sequences, but rather a population that is substantially enriched for phage that bind to the target sequences.
  • four sublibraries are being isolated, one that binds to a NFIL6 site and three that have specificity toward different NF- ⁇ B sites. See Section 6.1.1 for a description of the oligonucleotide target ligands for these sublibraries. These sub-libraries are composed of "DNA binding phage" or DB phage.
  • Each sublibrary of DB phage is amplified, titered and stored, e.g., as described in Kay et al., 1993, Gene 128:59-65.
  • To obtain phage that have the highest affinity for each of the DNA binding targets three more rounds of panning are carried out in substantially the same fashion as described above. However, since the population of DNA binding phage have been significantly enriched there are many copies of each unique phage in each 10 11 aliquot of the amplified sublibrary. Three rounds of additional panning toward each target is carried out without additional amplification of the phage in between adsorption and elution. After the final elution and neutralization, the phage are used to infect E. coli strain DH5 ⁇ rF' and plated out to obtain substantially pure plaques.
  • the TSAR insert in each phage is sequenced by the usual methods, e.g., Sanger dideoxy sequencing. Generally one obtains several identical or very similar phage in each group of 24 from one panning experiment.
  • the translation of the DNA sequence (syngene) encoding the TSAR domain within the phage is the peptide sequence responsible for the binding of a given phage to the DNA target sequence.
  • One isolate for each unique peptide encoding sequence is utilized for further characterization of its DNA binding properties.
  • the selectivity of a given phage for a target sequence can be determined by any of several means.
  • One method involves the carrying out of a "phage" ELISA utilizing an ELISA kit from Pharmacia
  • the phage to be tested is grown in appropriate cells for 6 hrs to overnight in 2XYT at 37°C; 2. The cells are spun down and the
  • This supernatant is collected. This supernatant can be stored at 4°C for several days;
  • the binding selectivity for a given DNA target sequence of any unique TSAR phage can be rapidly determined by bringing aliquots (10 8 phage particles) of a particular phage into contact with specific target DNAs immobilized in wells of a
  • a phage that binds to only one target sequence is a highly specific DNA binding phage (HSDB phage).
  • a phage that binds to more than one target sequence is a cross-specific DNA binding phage.
  • characterization of a given peptide displaying phage's ability to bind to a particular target sequence can be determined by carrying out so-called competition experiments routinely used by those skilled in immunoassays.
  • competition experiments routinely used by those skilled in immunoassays.
  • an aliquot of phage is first brought into contact with diverse pairs of non-biotinylated oligonucleotides under conditions and for a time sufficient to allow any binding to occur. Subsequently each aliquot is added to a well of a multi-well plate coated with a specific DNA target sequence. If the unlabeled competitor DNA is unable to bind to the TSAR domain of the phage, then the phage may bind to the specific DNA target sequence immobilized in the well.
  • the phage bound in the well can be detected and measured by any convenient technique, e.g., use of the horseradish peroxidase conjugated sheep anti-M13 IgG and ABTS ® of the phage ELISA described above. If the unlabeled DNA fragment is able to bind to the TSAR domain in the phage, then that phage will be unable to bind to the target DNA immobilized in the well. By varying the concentration of unlabeled DNA in solution one can estimate the relative affinity of a given phage TSAR domain for a specific DNA target as well as make a determination about the actual specificity of a TSAR domain for a specific DNA site.
  • H2 ⁇ B-L H2 ⁇ B oligonucleotide, see Section 6.1.1 above
  • the R26 library was screened and panned as described above using "Universal Covalent" multiwell plates with the H2 ⁇ B oligonucleotide.
  • Four phage clones were isolated that exhibited specific binding to the H2 ⁇ B oligonucleotide. To examine further the specificity of binding of these clones, they were tested in a phage ELISA (as described above) against the H2 ⁇ B oligonucleotide and three other
  • oligonucleotides The other oligonucleotides that were tested against these four phage were: (1) the oligonucleotide formed by IL6 ⁇ B-U and IL6 ⁇ B-L (IL6 ⁇ B oligonucleotide); (2) the oligonucleotide formed by IL8 ⁇ B-U and IL8 ⁇ B-L (IL8 ⁇ B oligonucleotide); (3) the oligonucleotide formed by NFIL6-U and NFIL6-L (NFIL6 oligonucleotide, see Section 6.1.1).
  • Figure 4 shows the results of these ELISAs.
  • Clones 1, 2, and 6 all showed strong binding to the H2 ⁇ B oligonucleotide as compared to their binding to background (the BSA coated plates) .
  • Clone 5 showed less strong, but still about 2.5-fold greater, binding to the H2 ⁇ B oligonucleotide than to background.
  • This binding on the part of clones 1, 2, 5, and 6 can be contrasted with the binding of m663 and a randomly selected phage from the R26 library, both of which bound the BSA coated plates about as well as they bound the plates coated with the H2kB oligonucleotide.
  • oligonucleotides This is seen by the much higher ratios of binding to the oligonucleotide coated plates versus binding to the BSA coated plates when the oligonucleotide was the H2 ⁇ B oligonucleotide rather than any of the other three oligonucleotides.
  • oligonucleotide sequences of the random inserts of clones 1, 2, 5, and 6 were determined.
  • clone 1 is called H2 ⁇ B-l and clone 2 is called H2 ⁇ B-2.
  • NFIL6 oligonucleotide formed by the sequences NFIL6-U and NFIL6-L (NFIL6 oligonucleotide, see Section 6.1.1 above) were isolated from the DC43 peptide display library. (See Section 6.9.6 and Figure 13 regarding the DC43 library).
  • the DC43 library was screened and panned as described above using "Universal Covalent” multiwell plates with the NFIL6 oligonucleotide.
  • a phage clone (NFIL6-1) was isolated that exhibited specific binding to the NFIL6 oligonucleotide.
  • NFIL6-1 The oligonucleotide sequence of the random insert of NFIL6-1 was determined. This allowed for the determination of the corresponding amino acid sequence for the peptide encoded by this insert. The following was the result obtained: NFIL6-1 - REWGVPGAHNRIRDHCNGPRCHAIRTNASHTQHI
  • oligonucleotides H2 ⁇ B, IL6 ⁇ B, and NFIL6 was tested by phage ELISA. Phage ELISA were performed as- in Section 6.1.3. Each phage was assayed for its ability to bind to each oligonucleotide following immobilization of that oligonucleotide in the well of a microtiter plate. This binding was compared to the binding of the phage to wells that had been coated with BSA
  • Figure 14 shows that libraries of random peptides can be successfully screened to identify and isolate binding domains that specifically bind to specific DNA sequences.
  • Phage NFIL6-1 binds well to the NFIL6 oligonucleotide with some binding to the other two oligonucleotides.
  • Phage H2 ⁇ B-2 binds only to the target H2 ⁇ B oligonucleotide.
  • Phage H2 ⁇ B-1 shows much greater binding to the H2 ⁇ B oligonucleotide than to the other oligonucleotides.
  • oligonucleotide New DNA oligonucleotides were synthesized; the sequences of these oligonucleotides deviated from the sequence of the H2 ⁇ B oligonucleotide by only one or two (and in one instance, three) bases.
  • Oligonucleotides for the upper and lower strands were synthesized. For each pair of upper and lower strands, 20 ⁇ g of upper and lower strands
  • oligonucleotides were combined in 100 ⁇ l of TE buffer supplemented with 200 mM NaCl. Annealing and filling- in was carried out at 65°C for 5 minutes, 42°C for 5 minutes, and 37°C for 15 minutes. The resulting double stranded DNA fragments were diluted in PBS, pH 5.0. 50 ⁇ l of the appropriate DNA fragments were added to Costar Universal Covalent microtiter plates as in Section 6.1.2 and incubated overnight at 4°C. Phage ELISA assays were carried out three times for each target DNA using the H2 ⁇ B-2 phage. The results are shown in Table 8.
  • the binding of H2 ⁇ B-2 to that target was compared to the binding of H2 ⁇ B-2 to the H2 ⁇ B oligonucleotide (wild type (WT) ) and expressed as percent binding compared to the wild type oligonucleotide (% WT).
  • the relative specificity of an HSDB for a specific DNA site is more important than the actual affinity of the domain for the DNA site.
  • the effect of low affinity can be compensated for by increased levels of gene expression within the target cell.
  • amino acid sequence encoded by the TSAR domain of the phage having the best properties can be
  • oligonucleotides synthesized from "doped" nucleotide reservoirs are produced from "doped" nucleotide reservoirs.
  • the doping is carried out such that the original peptide sequence is represented only once in 10 6 unique clones of the mutagenized oligonucleotide.
  • the assembled oligonucleotides are cloned into the parental TSAR vector.
  • the vector is m663 (Fowlkes et al., 1992, BioTechniques 13:422-427).
  • m663 is able to make blue plaques when grown in E.
  • a library of greater than 10 6 is preferred; however a library of 10 5 is
  • DNA binding TSAR mutant library Once a DNA binding TSAR mutant library has been constructed and amplified, it can be panned with immobilized target DNA sequences in a manner analogous to that described for the isolation of the initial DNA binding phage. It is preferable, but not necessary, to selectively pan out those phage capable of binding to sequences related to the target DNA sequence.
  • the related sequence is that of another site subject to regulation by the same transcription factor as the site desired to be regulated by the syngene product. Therefore, it is preferable to use four wells for this set of panning and phage
  • the phage obtained by this process are called "highly specific DNA binding phage" or HSDB phage.
  • Another means for blocking the binding of phage capable of binding to sequences related, but not identical, to the target DNA sequence is to add soluble DNA oligonucleotide fragments (to a final concentration of 0.1 ⁇ g/ml) to aliquots of the mutant library before panning.
  • the added DNA oligonucleotide fragments bear the sequences related (but not
  • HSDB phage To characterize HSDB phage relative to parental and other DB phage isolated from a TSAR-9 library, one takes advantage of the fact that the TSAR-9 library phage have no lacZ activity, whereas the mutant libraries used to clone the HSDB phage are from a vector that expresses lacZ activity in the appropriate E. coli cell lines.
  • a mutant binds to the target DNA with more specificity than its parent DB phage
  • equal amounts of the two phage to be compared are mixed together and then applied to a well containing a target DNA sequence.
  • an equal amount of the two phages are applied to a well containing another DNA sequence.
  • the phage recovered are plaqued onto the appropriate E. coli in the presence of X-gal. Ratios of blue to white phage are calculated. Since the mutant phage can convert X-gal to a blue product, one can readily determine which mutant phage have improved DNA binding
  • Oligonucleotides o8909 and o8545 were synthesized and purified by reverse phase HPLC (see Figure 15). Double stranded DNA fragments were made by annealing 10 ⁇ g of each oligonucleotide in 200 ⁇ l of IX SequenaseTM buffer (United States Biochemical Corp., Cleveland, OH) with 10 mM DTT and 150 ⁇ M of each dNTP. The fill-in reaction was initiated with 3 ⁇ l of SequenaseTM, Version 2.0 (United States
  • the fragments were cloned into m663 in the usual manner.
  • a library of about 1.5 x 10 8 phage variants was obtained. This library is called the ME#1 library (See Figure 15).
  • the ME#1 library was panned using the original H2 ⁇ B
  • IL8 ⁇ B IL8 ⁇ B
  • NFIL6 NFIL6 oligonucleotides
  • binding ability Twenty-two clones from the ME#1 library that bound the H2 «cB oligonucleotide (binders) were selected for further analysis. Also, twenty-six clones were identified that did not have significant ability to bind the H2 ⁇ B oligonucleotide (non-binders). In addition, random plaques from the ME#1 library were tested by phage ELISA for the ability to bind the H2 ⁇ B oligonucleotide; about one third demonstrated some binding ability.
  • Table 9 shows that there was no apparent bias in the sequences for both the binders and non- binders in the first 16 residues. However, at
  • residues 18 through 28 There are significant differences between the two groups for residues 18 through 28. While the original residue is clearly favored in the binding class for residues 18-24 and 26, this is not the case for positions 25, 27, and 28. In position 25, the original methionine was observed at less than the expected frequency in both the binders and non-binders and isoleucine was observed at higher than expected frequency in both classes.
  • Residues 27 and 28 are very informative. For the binders, histidine was observed at position 27 in 73% of the clones, but was never observed at that position in the non-binders. At position 28, lysine was observed in 73% of the binders but in only 12% of the non-binders. Furthermore, the original asparagine was expected at a frequency of 51%, but occurred in only 18% of the binders.
  • H2 ⁇ B-2 clone clearly binds well to the H2 ⁇ B oligonucleotide target, it does not carry the optimal amino acid sequence to do so (see below and Figures 16A and 16B for a further discussion of this point).
  • substituting a histidine for the lysine at position 26 and a lysine for the asparagine at position 28 leads to avid binding of the clones to the target DNA.
  • Phage stocks were prepared for the binders from the ME#1 library as well as for the original H2 ⁇ B-2 clone and the stocks were titered by serial dilution. Subsequently, the appropriate dilutions of each phage were analyzed by phage ELISA for binding to the H2 ⁇ B oligonucleotide. The results are shown in Figures 16A and 16B. Binding is expressed as signal strength (O.D.). Phage having higher relative avidity for the target (as compared to H2 ⁇ B-2) continue to produce a detectable signal at low concentrations of phage and thus the curves for those phage are shifted to the left as compared to the curve for H2 ⁇ B-2.
  • oligonucleotide (as compared to H2 ⁇ B-2) maintained the same relative target specificity as H2 ⁇ B-2. However, some binders with less avidity for the H2 ⁇ B
  • oligonucleotide had increased avidity for certain of the variant H2 ⁇ B oligonucleotide targets.
  • sequences e.g., nuclear localization sequences, transcriptional activation sequences, for constructing a functional syngene directed to the regulation of the activity of a gene with H2 ⁇ B sequences.
  • Molecular evolution library #2a (the ME#2a library) contained the critical residues as a fixed core flanked by 10 random residues on each side.
  • Molecular evolution library #2b (the ME#2b library) was constructed in a similar manner, but with a smaller group of core residues. Specifically, the ME#2b library lacks the initial arginine, serine, glycine, and arginine found within the core of the ME#2a library. In addition, the core of the ME#2b library was flanked with 12 random residues on each side.
  • Figures 17A and 17B summarize the construction of the ME#2a and ME#2b libraries.
  • the ME#2a and ME#2b libraries were panned using the H2 ⁇ B oligonucleotide as ligand. A number of clones were isolated as binders from the ME#2a and ME#2b libraries. Phage stocks were prepared for the binders from the ME#2a and ME#2b libraries as well as for the original H2 ⁇ B-2 clone and the stocks were titered by serial dilution. Subsequently, the
  • Binding is expressed as signal strength (O.D.). Phage having higher relative avidity for the target (as compared to H2 ⁇ B-2) continue to produce a detectable signal at low concentrations of phage and thus the curves for those phage are shifted to the left as compared to the curve for H2 ⁇ B-2.
  • Table 12 shows the amino acid sequences of the inserts of the binders from the ME#2a and ME#2b libraries as well as the inserts of clone 959496-10 and H2 ⁇ B-2.
  • the major modification consists in the use of DNA target sequences from GATA transcription factor binding sites rather than DNA target sequences from
  • the target DNA sequence is 5' ctggccTTATCTccggct (SEQ ID NO: 180) for the upper strand and 5 ' agccggAGATAAggccag (SEQ ID NO: 181) for the lower strand (Dorfman et al., 1992, J. Biol. Chem. 267:1279-1285).
  • the human gastric (H + + K + ) ATPase gene is responsible for maintaining the large (about 5 units) pH difference between the cytoplasm and gastric lumen in the stomach. It has been proposed that regulation of the human gastric (H + + K + ) ATPase gene would be useful in the treatment of gastric ulcers (Maeda,
  • HSDBs can be obtained by screening random peptide libraries with the an oligonucleotide formed from an upper strand of 5 'gacatGGGGGGATCTGGgca (SEQ ID NO: 182) and a lower strand of
  • oligonucleotide represents a sequence similar to that of bindings site for the GATA-GT family of
  • the target DNA sequence is 5' gacactTGATAAcagaaa (SEQ ID NO: 184) for the upper strand and 5' tttctgTTATCAagtgtc (SEQ ID NO: 185) for the lower strand (Ko et al., 1991, Mol. Cell. Biol. 11:2778-2784).
  • the DNA target sequences for the isolation of GATA transcription factor binding site HSDBs can be monovalent or multivalent. Panning, amplification, and analysis of the isolated phage are done as for NF- ⁇ B or NF-IL6. Mutagenesis to produce HSDBs of greater selectivity can also be done as for NF- ⁇ B or NF-IL6.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Zoology (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Microbiology (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Plant Pathology (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Toxicology (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Virology (AREA)
  • Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Peptides Or Proteins (AREA)
  • Micro-Organisms Or Cultivation Processes Thereof (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
  • Preparation Of Compounds By Using Micro-Organisms (AREA)
  • Measuring Or Testing Involving Enzymes Or Micro-Organisms (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention relates generally to synthetic gene sequences ('syngenes') that are identified by screening random peptide librairies for peptides that bind a ligand of choice. The synthetic gene sequences, together with, optionally, other DNA sequences that target the synthetic gene sequences or their encoded proteins to particular locations in vivo or intracellularly, or that contain processing signals, or that code for other peptides or amino acid sequences, are cloned into suitable expression vectors. The syngenes are used, for example, in gene therapy to supply, via expression of their encoded proteins, a therapeutic product. In another aspect, the invention relates to protein or peptide products of syngenes and their therapeutic and diagnsotic uses.

Description

PEPTIDE LIBRARIES AS A SOURCE OF SYNGENES
This application is a continuation-in-part of co-pending U.S. Patent Application Serial No.
08/292,902 filed August 18, 1994, the entire
disclosure of which is incorporated herein by
reference.
1. FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates generally to synthetic gene sequences ("syngenes"), particularly for use in gene therapy. Syngenes are nucleic acids that comprise synthetic gene sequences identified by screening synthetic random peptide libraries, for peptides that bind a ligand of choice. The synthetic gene sequences, together with, optionally, other DNA sequences that target the synthetic gene sequences or their encoded proteins to particular locations in vivo or intracellularly, or that contain processing
signals, or that code for other peptides or amino acid sequences, are cloned into suitable expression
vectors. The syngenes are used, for example, in gene therapy to supply, via expression of their encoded proteins, a therapeutic product. In another aspect, the invention relates to protein or peptide products of syngenes and their therapeutic and diagnostic uses.
2. BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
2.1. GENE THERAPY
Gene therapy today is often directed to the replacement of a product of a defective gene. For example, a human adenosine deaminase gene has been engineered into skin fibroblasts of mice through the use of a retroviral vector (Palmer et al., 1988,
Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 88:1330-1334). The human β-globin gene has been transferred into mouse bone marrow cells and mouse erythroleukemia cells as a model for the treatment of β-thalassemia and sickle cell anemia (Novak et al., 1990, Proc. Natl. Acad.
Sci. USA 87:3386-3390; Bender et al., 1988, Mol. Cell. Biol. 8:1725-1735; Chao et al., 1983, Cell 32:483- 493).
Other examples of the replacement of a defective gene product include: the delivering of the human cystic fibrosis transmembrane conductance regulator via a retrovirus into airway epithelia of mice (Hyde et al., 1993, Nature 362:250-255); in a rabbit model, the transfer of human low density lipoprotein receptor cDNA into hepatocytes (Wilson et al., 1992, J. Biol. Chem. 267:963-967); the transfer of human Factor IX cDNA into skin fibroblasts,
followed by engraftment of the fibroblasts into mice (Louis and Verma, 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85:3150-3154).
In addition to replacing a defective gene product, gene therapy can also be used to provide a cell or an organism with a new function. Examples of such a use include: transferring the human growth hormone gene via a retrovirus into human keratinocytes and then grafting the keratinocytes into nude mice. (Morgan et al., 1987, Science 237:1476-1479);
expressing therapeutics for cardiovascular disease in endothelial cells with the aim of delivering the therapeutics through the circulation (Nabel et al., 1989, Science 244:1342-1344); the use of antisense c- myb oligonucleotides to prevent the proliferation of vascular smooth muscle cells (Simons et al., 1992, Nature 359:67-70).
Another aspect of gene therapy involves the inhibition or enhancement of the activity of a
preselected gene. The preselected gene is one that is involved in some aspect of a diseased state. The ability to modulate the activity of such a gene would be useful in the treatment of the diseased state. In this aspect, gene therapy is limited by the
availability of specific modulators of specific target genes. Currently, there is no easy method of
increasing the specificity of known modulators or discovering new modulators. It would be of great value to have reagents and methods for identifying such modulators. This would permit virtually any gene to be the subject of this aspect of gene therapy.
Currently, all gene therapy programs use either l) cloned genes that are endogenous in some organism or 2) genes encoding mRNAs that are antisense to known genes. Current methods of gene therapy usually utilize human genes, either in their sense or anti-sense orientations. It would be of great value to have a source of genes other than the human genome since the use of the human genome presents certain problems. Using the human genome entails the
laborious procedures of the identification and
isolation of a gene having a desired function. A further problem is the possibility that no human gene may possess the desired function. Even if a human gene is found that has the desired function, that gene may not have the desired specificity; it may be too large to be easily used in current gene therapy protocols; it may be encoded by multiple exons; and fragments of the gene may not be suitable for use in gene therapy because the gene's binding regions may be too complex for fragments of the endogenous protein to mimic its function. In order to avoid these problems, it would be highly desirable to have a method of producing genes for use in gene therapy that does not rely on the human genome as a source of those genes.
2.2. PEPTIDE LIBRARIES
The use of peptide libraries is well known in the art. Such peptide libraries have generally been constructed by one of two approaches. According to one approach, peptides have been chemically
synthesized in vi tro in several formats. For example, Fodor, S., et al., 1991, Science 251: 767-773,
describes use of complex instrumentation,
photochemistry and computerized inventory control to synthesize a known array of short peptides on an individual microscopic slide. Houghten, R., et al., 1991, Nature 354: 84-86, describes mixtures of free hexapeptides in which the first and second residues in each peptide were individually and specifically defined. Lam, K., et al., 1991, Nature 354: 82-84, describes a "one bead, one peptide" approach in which a solid phase split synthesis scheme produced a library of peptides in which each bead in the
collection had immobilized thereon a single, random sequence of amino acid residues. For the most part, the chemical synthetic systems have been directed to generation of arrays of short length peptides,
generally fewer than about 10 amino acids or so, more particularly about 6-8 amino acids. Direct amino acid sequencing, alone or in combination with complex record keeping of the peptide synthesis schemes, is required to use these libraries.
According to a second approach using
recombinant DNA techniques, peptides have been
expressed in biological systems as either soluble fusion proteins or viral capsid fusion proteins.
A number of peptide libraries according to the second approach have used the M13 phage. M13 is a filamentous bacteriophage that has been a workhorse in molecular biology laboratories for the past 20 years. M13 viral particles consist of six different capsid proteins and one copy of the viral genome, as a single-stranded circular DNA molecule. Once the M13 DNA has been introduced into a host cell such as E. coli , it is converted into double-stranded, circular DNA. The viral DNA carries a second origin of replication that is used to generate the single- stranded DNA found in the viral particles. During viral morphogenesis, there is an ordered assembly of the single-stranded DNA and the viral proteins, and the viral particles are extruded from cells in a process much like secretion. The M13 virus is neither lysogenic nor lytic like other bacteriophage (e.g., λ); cells, once infected, chronically release virus. This feature leads to high titers of virus in infected cultures, i.e., 1012 pfu/ml.
The genome of the M13 phage is ~8000
nucleotides in length and has been completely
sequenced. The viral capsid protein, protein III (pIII) is responsible for infection of bacteria. In E. coli , the pillin protein encoded by the F factor interacts with pIII protein and is responsible for phage uptake. Hence, all E. coli hosts for M13 virus are considered male because they carry the F factor. Several investigators have determined from mutational analysis that the 406 amino acid long pIII capsid protein has two domains. The C-terminus anchors the protein to the viral coat, while portions of the
N-terminus of pIII are essential for interaction with the E. coli pillin protein (Crissman, J.W. and Smith, G.P., 1984, Virology 132: 445-455). Although the
N-terminus of the pIII protein has been shown to be necessary for viral infection, the extreme N-terminus of the mature protein does tolerate alterations. In 1985, George Smith published experiments reporting the use of the pIII protein of bacteriophage M13 as an experimental system for expressing a heterologous protein on the viral coat surface (Smith, G.P., 1985, Science 228: 1315-1317). It was later recognized, independently by two groups, that the M13 phage pIII gene display system could be a useful one for mapping antibody epitopes. De la Cruz, V., et al., (1988, J. Biol. Chem. 263: 4318-4322) cloned and expressed segments of the cDNA encoding the Plasmodium
falciparum surface coat protein into the pIII gene, and recombinant phage were tested for immunoreactivity with a polyclonal antibody. Parmley, S.F. and Smith, G.P., (1988, Gene 73: 305-318) cloned and expressed segments of the E. coli β-galactosidase gene in the pIII gene and identified recombinants carrying the epitope of an anti-β-galactosidase monoclonal
antibody. The latter authors also described a process termed "biopanning", in which mixtures of recombinant phage were incubated with biotinylated monoclonal antibodies, and phage-antibody complexes could be specifically recovered with streptavidin-coated
plastic plates.
In 1989, Parmley and Smith, 1989, Adv. Exp.
Med. Biol. 251:215-218 suggested that short, synthetic DNA segments cloned into the pIII gene might represent a library of epitopes. These authors reasoned that since linear epitopes were often -6 amino acids in length, it should be possible to use a random
recombinant DNA library to express all possible
hexapeptides to isolate epitopes that bind to
antibodies.
Scott and Smith, 1990, Science 249:386-390 describe construction and expression of an "epitope library" of hexapeptides on the surface of M13. The library was made by inserting a 33 base pair Bgl I digested oligonucleotide sequence into an Sfi I digested phage fd-tet, i.e., fUSE5 RF. The 33 base pair fragment contains a random or "degenerate" coding sequence (NNK)6 (SEQ ID NO: 1) where N represents G, A, T or C and K represents G or T. The authors stated that the library consisted of 2 x 108 recombinants expressing 4 x 107 different hexapeptides;
theoretically, this library expressed 69% of the
6.4 x 107 possible peptides (206). Cwirla et al., 1990, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87: 6378-6382 also described a somewhat similar library of hexapeptides expressed as pIII gene fusions of M13 fd phage. PCT publication WO 91/19818 dated December 26, 1991 by Dower and Cwirla describes a similar library of pentameric to octameric random amino acid sequences.
Devlin et al., 1990, Science, 249:404-406, describes a peptide library of about 15 residues generated using an (NNS) coding scheme for
oligonucleotide synthesis in which S is G or C.
Christian et al., 1992, J. Mol .
Biol. 227:711-718 described a phage display library, expressing decapeptides. The starting DNA was
generated by means of an oligonucleotide comprising the degenerate codons [NN(G/T)]10 (SEQ ID NO: 2) with a self-complementary 3' terminus. This sequence, in forming a hairpin, creates a self-priming replication site which could be used by T4 DNA polymerase to generate the complementary strand. The double- stranded DNA was cleaved at the Sfii sites at the 5' terminus and hairpin for cloning into the fUSE5 vector described by Scott and Smith, supra.
Other investigators have used other viral capsid proteins for expression of non-viral DNA on the surface of phage particles. The protein pVIII is a major M13 viral capsid protein and interacts with the single stranded DNA of M13 viral particles at its C-terminus. It is 50 amino acids long and exists in approximately 2,700 copies per particle. The
N-terminus of the protein is exposed and will tolerate insertions, although large inserts have been reported to disrupt the assembly of pVIII fusion proteins into viral particles (Cesareni, 1992, FEBS Lett. 307:66- 70). To minimize the negative effect of pVIII fusion proteins, a phagemid system has been utilized.
Bacterial cells carrying the phagemid are infected with helper phage and secrete viral particles that have a mixture of both wild-type and pVIII fusion capsid molecules. pVIII has also served as a site for expressing peptides on the surface of M13 viral particles. Four and six amino acid sequences
corresponding to different segments of the Plasmodium falciparum major surface antigen have been cloned and expressed in the comparable gene of the filamentous bacteriophage fd (Greenwood et al., 1991, J. Mol.
Biol. 220:821-827).
Lenstra, 1992, J. Immunol. Meth. 152:149-157 describes construction of a library by a laborious process encompassing annealing oligonucleotides of about 17 or 23 degenerate bases with an 8 nucleotide long palindromic sequence at their 3' ends. This resulted in the expression of random hexa- or octa- peptides as fusion proteins with the β-galactosidase protein in a bacterial expression vector. The DNA was then converted into a double-stranded form with Klenow DNA polymerase, blunt-end ligated into a vector, and then released as Hind III fragments. These fragments were then cloned into an expression vector at the
C-terminus of a truncated β-galactosidase to generate 107 recombinants. Colonies were then lysed, blotted on nitrocellulose filters (104/filter) and screened for immunoreactivity with several different monoclonal antibodies. A number of clones were isolated by repeated rounds of screening and were sequenced.
Screening of peptide libraries has generally been confined to the use of a restricted number of ligands. Most commonly, the ligand has been an antibody (Parmley and Smith, 1989, Adv. Exp. Med.
Biol. 251:215-218; Scott and Smith, 1990,
Science 249:386-390). Streptavidin (Fowlkes et al., 1992; BioTechniques, 13:422-427) and concanavalin A (Oldenburg et al., 1992, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:5393-5397) have also been used as ligands. SH2 and SH3 domains have been used (Yu et al., 1994, Cell 76:933-945). Oligonucleotides have been used to screen a conventional cDNA library (Staudt et al., 1988,
Science 241: 577-580). This resulted in the isolation of naturally occurring DNA binding proteins. Also, random DNA libraries have been screened for ligand binding properties (Bock et al., 1992, Nature 355:564- 566; Tuerk et al., 1992, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:6988-6992; Ellington et al., 1992, Nature 355:850- 852). U. S. Patent No. 5,096,815, U.S. Patent No. 5,223,409, and U.S. Patent No. 5,198,346, all to
Ladner et al., disclose the use of oligonucleotide ligands to screen a phage display library in which known, naturally occurring DNA binding proteins have been cloned. Following mutagenesis of certain defined positions in the sequences of the naturally occurring DNA binding proteins, stronger binding versions of those proteins were isolated. Another example of the screening of a non-random phage display library with an oligonucleotide is given in Rebar and Pabo, 1993, Science 263:671-673. This work resulted in the isolation of variants of known zinc finger DNA binding proteins. Rebar and Pabo do not disclose the use of random peptide libraries that are totally synthetic. As yet, oligonucleotides have not been used to screen a totally synthetic, random, phage display peptide library.
A common goal of screening peptide libraries has generally been to find a peptide with a desired biological effect and (1) use that peptide directly; (2) use the peptide as a basis for designing
peptidomimetics for therapeutic use; and (3) use the peptide for research to map protein/target
interactions, such as epitope mapping. Under current practice, once an appropriate peptide is identified from a library, that peptide, or a peptidomimetic of it, may be used therapeutically. However, use of such peptides or peptidomimetics may lead to problems of peptide instability, delivery problems, or difficulty in making the peptidomimetic. The use of the syngenes of the present invention can obviate such
difficulties. The use of syngenes is especially advantageous in cases where use of a long peptide (>20 amino acids) is necessary. In such cases, making an appropriate peptidomimetic is difficult or impossible.
U.S. Patent 5,198,346 to Ladner et al.
("Ladner"), at column 20, suggests the in vivo
therapeutic use of genes encoding certain DNA binding proteins selected from peptide display libraries.
Ladner does not, however, disclose the use of totally synthetic random peptide libraries. In contrast to the syngenes of the present invention, Ladner stresses the use of peptide display libraries that are derived from naturally occurring sequences (in this instance, sequences encoding known binding proteins) by in vitro mutagenesis of these sequences. Prior to the present invention, it had not been recognized that totally synthetic random peptide libraries are a tremendous source of synthetic genes.
Citation or identification of any reference herein shall not be construed as an admission that such reference is available as prior art to the present invention.
3. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates generally to synthetic gene sequences ("syngenes''), particularly for use in gene therapy. Syngenes are nucleic acids that comprise synthetic gene sequences identified by screening random peptide libraries for peptides that bind a ligand of choice. The synthetic gene sequences are cloned into suitable expression vectors together with, optionally, other DNA sequences that target the synthetic gene sequences or their encoded proteins to particular locations in vivo or intracellularly, or that contain processing signals, or that code for other peptides or amino acid sequences. The syngenes are used, for example, in gene therapy to supply a therapeutic product via expression of their encoded proteins. In another aspect, the invention relates to protein or peptide products of syngenes and their therapeutic and diagnostic uses.
Pharmaceutical compositions comprising syngenes or their encoded peptides are also provided.
In one embodiment, the invention provides methods of identifying syngenes that bind to a
particular ligand of choice. In specific aspects, the ligand of choice is a transcriptional regulatory site, a transcription factor that binds to a transcriptional regulatory site, or a binding partner/inhibitor of the transcription factor. In one aspect, such a
transcriptional regulatory site is an NF-κB, AP-1, or ATF binding site. In other aspects, the transcription factor is NF-κB, AP-1, or ATF. Accordingly, in a specific embodiment, the present invention provides methods for identifying syngenes that inhibit or enhance the transcriptional activity of a wide variety of naturally occurring genes, preferably with a specificity not found in natural systems. Syngenes are also useful for modulating signal transduction pathways, metabolic pathways, RNA translation, and intracellular trafficking. In the cell membrane, syngenes may be used to modulate the activity of membrane receptors, ion channels, or exocytotic and endocytotic pathways. In tissue, syngenes, via expression of their encoded proteins, may be used to regulate cell/cell signalling and transcytosis.
Cell/cell junctions and the extracellular matrix are appropriate targets for syngenes. Syngenes may be used to regulate cell adhesion or cell/cell
recognition. In the general circulation, syngenes may be used to regulate the activity of receptor ligands. 4. FIGURE LEGENDS
The present invention may be understood more fully by reference to the following detailed
description of the invention, examples of specific embodiments of the invention and the appended figures in which:
Figure 1 (A-F) schematically illustrates construction of TSAR libraries. Figure 1A
schematically depicts the synthesis and assembly of synthetic oligonucleotides for the linear libraries and bimolecular libraries illustrated in Figure 1B and 1C. N = A, C, G or T; B = G, T or C and V = G, A, or C; and n and m are integers, such that 10 ≤ n ≤ 100 and 10 ≤ m ≤ 100. Figure 1D-F schematically depicts representative libraries which are designed to be semirigid libraries. The synthesis and assembly of the oligonucleotides for the semirigid libraries are as in Figure 1A with modifications to include
specified invariant positions. See Section 5.1.3.1.
Figure 2 schematically depicts an exemplary mRNA expressed by a syngene.
Figure 3 is a schematic depiction of a shuttle vector which can be used in one embodiment of the invention. (1) and (2) allow replication in E. coli and mammalian cells, respectively. (3) allows selection in E. coli . (4) and (5) allow transcription and mRNA processing, respectively, in mammalian cells. (6) is a syngene that preferably encodes amino-terminal spacer sequences, binding domain, targeting/localization signal, and, optionally, a second functional domain.
Figure 4 presents the results of ELISAs on phage clones isolated from the R26 library using the H2κB oligonucleotide as a target. See Section 6.1.4 for details. Numbers along the abscissa refer to phage clones as follows: 1 - clone 1; 2 = clone 2; 3 = clone 6; 4 = clone 5; 5 = m663; 6 = a random clone. H2κB, IL6κB, IL8κB, and NFIL6 refer to oligonucleotide ligands as described in Section 6.1.1. Phage clones were tested for binding to plates coated with the oligonucleotide ligands. Phage clones were also tested for binding to plates coated with BSA. The height of the bars above the numbers along the
abscissa represents the ratio of a phage clone's binding to an oligonucleotide ligand-coated plate compared to the phage clone's binding to the BSA- coated plate.
Figure 5 schematically illustrates construction of the TSAR-9 library. N = A, C, G or T; B = G, T or C and V = G, A or C.
Figure imgf000015_0001
Figure 6 schematically illustrates the m663 expression vector.
Figure 7 schematically illustrates construction of the TSAR-12 library. N - A, C, G or T; B = G, T or C and V = G, A or C. Insertion into a representative, appropriate vector and expression in an appropriate host is illustrated.
Figure imgf000015_0002
Figure 8 schematically illustrates construction of the TSAR-13 librar .
Figure imgf000015_0003
Figure 9 schematically depicts the
construction of the R26 library. The R26 expression library was constructed essentially as described for the TSAR-9 library that is described in Section 6.9.1 and its subsections, except for the modifications depicted in Figure 9. ctgtgcctcgagB (NNB)12Nccgcgg is SEQ ID NO: 17; ctgtgctctaga (VNN)12VNccgcgg is SEQ ID NO: 18; tcgagB (NNB) 12Nccgcgg is SEQ ID NO: 19;
ctaga (VNN) 12VNccgcgg is SEQ ID NO: 20;
SHSS(S/R)X12 πAδX12SRPSRT is SEQ ID NO: 21.
Figure 10 (A-D) represents circular restriction maps of phagemid vectors, derived from phagemid pBluescript II SK+, in which a truncated portion encoding amino acid residues 198-406 of the pIII gene of M13 is linked to a leader sequence of the E. coli Pel B gene and is expressed under control of a lac promoter. G and S represent the amino acids glycine and serine, respectively; c-myc represents the human c-myc oncogene epitope recognized by the 9E10 monoclonal antibody described in Evan et al., 1985,
Mol. Cell. Biol. 5:3610-3616. Figure 10A illustrates the restriction map of phagemid pDAF1; Figure 10B illustrates the restriction map of phagemid pDAF2; Figure 10C illustrates the restriction map of phagemid pDAF3; Figure 10D schematically illustrates the construction of phagemids pDAF1, pDAF2 and pDAF3.
Figure 11 schematically depicts the construction of the R8C library. The R8C expression library was constructed essentially as described for the TSAR-9 library that is described in Section 6.9.1 and its subsections, except for the modifications de icted in Figure 11.
Figure imgf000016_0001
Figure 12 schematically depicts the origin of one class of double-insert recombinants in the R8C library. TCGAGTTGT (NNK)8TGTGGATCTAGATCCACA(MNN)8AAAAC is SEQ ID NO: 27; TCGAGTTGT(NNK)8TGTGGA
TCTAGATCCACA(MNN)8ACAAC is SEQ ID NO: 28;
SSCX8CGSRSTX8TTR is SEQ ID NO: 29.
Figure 13 schematically illustrates the construction of the DC43 TSAR library. The DC43 expression library was constructed essentially as described for the TSAR-9 library that is described in Section 6.9.1 and its subsections, except for the modifications depicted in Figure 13.
Figure imgf000017_0001
Figure 14 shows the selectivity of binding of two H2κB binding phage (H2κB-1 and H2κB-2), the NFIL6 binding phage NFIL6-1, and the parental phage m663 for three different target sites: the H2κB oligonucleotide, the NFIL6 oligonucleotide, and the IL6κB oligonucleotide. The numbers along the abscissa refer to the various phage as follows: 1 = H2κB-1; 2 = H2κB-2; 3 = m663; 4 = NFIL6-1.
Figure 15 illustrates the molecular evolution scheme for phage H2κB-2 described in Section 6.1.5 that produced the ME#1 library. %p indicates the approximate frequency at which the original amino acid residue is expected to occur in the phage of the
Figure imgf000017_0002
Figures 16A and 16B present the results of phage ELISAs that show the relative binding avidity for the H2κB oligonucleotide of clones isolated from the ME#1 library as compared to the H2κB-2 clone. For 16A:
Figure imgf000018_0001
Figures 17A and 17B illustrate the molecular evolution schemes described in Section 6.1.5 that produced the ME#2a and ME#2b libraries, respectively.
Figure imgf000019_0001
: .
Figure 18 presents the results of phage
ELISAs that show the relative binding avidity for the H2κB oligonucleotide of clones isolated from the ME#2a and ME#2b libraries as compared to the H2κB-2 clone.
Figure imgf000019_0002
5. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates to nucleic acids ("syngenes") that comprise a random synthetic nucleic acid sequence that encodes a protein, peptide, or polypeptide (used interchangeably hereinafter and most commonly collectively referred to as "peptide" unless indicated otherwise explicitly or by context) that binds to a ligand of choice, and their uses in gene therapy fo myriad diseases and disorders of interest. The invention provides methods for
identification of syngenes that encode peptides that specifically bind to a ligand of choice. Also
provided are compositions comprising syngenes as well as uses of the syngenes, e . g. , in diagnosis and therapy of various disorders.
Syngenes encode a syngene product which is a peptide having at least one functional domain. The functional domain is a binding domain with affinity for a ligand of choice.
The syngenes of the present invention are synthetic genes, that is, genes that are not known to be present in a naturally occurring genome. In a specific embodiment, a syngene is a nucleic acid encoding a peptide comprising a binding domain in which the binding domain sequence is identified from a peptide library comprising at least 5 unpredictable contiguous amino acids in the variable portion of the library. In another embodiment, syngenes are made up of, at least in part, combinations of genes encoding functional domains, such combinations not occurring in nature. Syngenes may be composed of totally synthetic gene sequences, combinations of natural and totally synthetic gene sequences, or combinations of natural DNA sequences juxtaposed so as not to form a gene present in nature. The present invention vastly expands the number of genes that are available for use in gene therapy. The present invention provides methods for finding synthetic nucleic acids encoding peptides with diagnostic or therapeutic value. The present
invention further provides methods for delivery of such peptides in vivo by expression in vivo from the administered syngene, that potentially avoid the common problems of instability, clearance, etc. faced when dosing with proteins directly. More importantly, however, there are many instances where a protein that possesses a desired biological effect is unknown. For example, a known protein may not possess a desired level of binding specificity for a particular ligand. Syngenes encoding peptides with such novel
specificities can be advantageously identified by the methods of the present invention.
The present invention provides methods for identifying synthetic peptides, and the nucleic acids encoding them, to fulfill roles that naturally
occurring proteins have not necessarily been evolved for. One need only identify a target whose activity it would be desirable to modulate. Given such a target, a synthetic peptide in a random peptide library that binds the target and can thus modulate the target's activity can be readily identified by the present invention. The present invention also
provides for the identification of a nucleic acid (syngene) that encodes the peptide. Such a gene, referred to as a syngene, can then be used, e. g. , in gene therapy. Alternatively, the syngene may be introduced into an appropriate host cell and thereby used for the recombinant production of its encoded protein.
In a specific embodiment, the present invention provides methods for identifying syngenes that inhibit or enhance the transcriptional activity of a wide variety of naturally occurring genes, preferably with a specificity not found in natural systems.
In addition to affecting transcription, among the other nuclear processes that syngenes may be useful in modulating are: post-transcriptional
processing of RNA, DNA repair, and DNA replication.
Syngenes are also useful for modulating processes that occur outside of the nucleus. For example, in the cytoplasm, the encoded protein of a syngene, produced by intracellular expression of the syngene, may be used to affect the activity of
inhibitors of transcription factors such as IF-κB. Syngenes may also be used to modulate signal
transduction pathways, metabolic pathways, RNA
translation, and intracellular trafficking. In the cell membrane, syngenes may be used to modulate the activity of membrane receptors, ion channels, or exocytotic and endocytotic pathways.
In tissue, syngenes, via expression of their encoded proteins, may be used to regulate cell/cell signalling and transcytosis. Cell/cell junctions and the extracellular matrix are appropriate targets for syngene expressed peptides. Syngenes may be used to regulate cell adhesion or cell/cell recognition. In the general circulation, syngenes may be used to regulate the activity of receptor ligands.
In another embodiment, the invention provides the peptides comprising binding domains that are encoded by syngenes, as well as their therapeutic and diagnostic uses, and compositions comprising such peptides.
5.1. RANDOM PEPTIDE LIBRARIES FOR USE IN
IDENTIFYING SYNTHETIC GENE SEQUENCES ENCODING A BINDING DOMAIN Binding domains encoded by the syngenes of the invention can be identified from a random peptide expression library or a chemically synthesized random peptide library. A nucleic acid which expresses a peptide which binds to a ligand of choice can be identified and recovered from a random peptide
expression library, and then sequenced to determine its nucleotide sequence and hence its deduced amino acid sequence that mediates binding. Alternatively, the amino acid sequence of an appropriate binding domain can be determined by direct determination of the amino acid sequence of a peptide selected from a random peptide library containing chemically
synthesized peptides, whereby an appropriate syngene encoding the peptide can be designed and made. In a less preferred aspect, direct amino acid sequencing of a binding peptide selected from a random peptide expression library can also be performed, and an encoding nucleic acid designed. Where it is desired to decrease the size of the syngene-encoded binding domain, methods can be used to identify portions of the determined synthetic amino acid or nucleotide sequences which respectively mediate binding, or encode the sequences which mediate binding, as
described in Section 5.3 below.
The term "random" peptide libraries is meant to include within its scope libraries of both
partially and totally random peptides. Thus, peptide sequences with a stretch of at least 5 unpredictable amino acids as well as invariant amino acid sequences are included within the scope of the random peptides. The syngenes encoding such peptides will have both codons of unpredictable and codons of invariant sequence or (due to the degeneracy of the genetic code) degenerate codons thereof. However, the binding domains of syngenes are not cDNA or generated so as to be genomic sequences. The syngenes of the invention are not sequences generated by a method comprising mutagenesis (even random mutagenesis) of a cDNA sequence or portion thereof or genomic sequence or portion thereof coding for a peptide having a
predetermined activity.
By the methods of the present invention, the binding domains encoded by syngenes are advantageously identified from random peptide libraries. Typically, random peptide libraries will be encoded by synthetic oligonucleotides with at least 15 contiguous variant nucleotide positions having the potential to encode all 20 naturally occurring amino acids. The sequence of amino acids encoded by the variant nucleotides is unpredictable and substantially random. The terms "unpredicted", "unpredictable" and "substantially random" are used interchangeably with respect to the amino acids encoded and are intended to mean that the variant nucleotides at any given position encoding the binding domain of the syngene product are such that it cannot be predicted which of the 20 naturally
occurring amino acids will appear at that position. These variant nucleotides are the product of random chemical synthesis. As will become clear, the
biological random peptide libraries envisioned for use include those in which a bias has been introduced into the random sequence, e.g., to disfavor stop codon usage.
In a specific embodiment, a syngene of the invention encodes a peptide comprising a binding domain (which binds to a ligand of choice), in which the nucleotide sequence encoding the binding domain is a sequence identified by a method comprising screening a library of recombinant vectors, said vectors
comprising unpredictable nucleotides arranged in one or more contiguous sequences, wherein the total number of unpredictable nucleotides is greater than or equal to 15 and less than or equal to about 300. In other specific embodiments, the total number of such
unpredictable nucleotides is in the range of 15-600, 24-600, 60-600, 15-120, 60-120, or 60-300. 5.1.1. CHEMICALLY SYNTHESIZED PEPTIDE LIBRARIES
The peptide libraries used in the present invention may be libraries that are chemically
synthesized in vi tro. Examples of such libraries are given in Fodor, S., et al., 1991, Science 251:767-773, which describes the synthesis of a known array of short peptides on an individual microscopic slide;
Houghten, R., et al., 1991, Nature 354:84-86, which describes mixtures of free hexapeptides in which the first and second residues in each peptide were
individually and specifically defined; Lam, K., et al., 1991, Nature 354:82-84, which describes a split synthesis scheme; and Medynski, 1994, Bio/Technology 12:709-710, who describes split synthesis and T-bag synthesis methods as well. See also Gallop et al., 1994, J. Medicinal Chemistry 37 (9):1233-1251.
Screening of chemically synthesized peptide libraries to identify peptides which bind to a ligand of choice can be carried out by methods well known in the art.
In a specific embodiment, the total number of unpredictable amino acids in the peptides of the library used for screening is greater than or equal to 5 and less than or equal to 25; in other embodiments the total is in the range of 5-15 or 5-10 amino acids, preferably contiguous amino acids.
While a binding domain can be identified from chemically synthesized peptide libraries and an appropriate syngene synthesized to encode such a binding domain, such domains would be small (i.e. less than 10 amino acids, and most probably 5-6 amino acids, in length). Therefore, this approach is less preferred than the biological peptide libraries containing unpredictable sequences of greater length, described below.
5.1.2. BIOLOGICAL PEPTIDE LIBRARIES In another embodiment, biological random peptide libraries are used to identify a binding domain which binds to a ligand of choice. Many suitable biological random peptide libraries are known in the art and can be used to screen for a peptide that binds to a ligand of choice, according to
standard methods commonly known in the art.
According to this second approach, involving recombinant DNA techniques, peptides have been
expressed in biological systems as either soluble fusion proteins or viral capsid fusion proteins.
A number of peptide libraries according to this approach have used the M13 phage. Although the N-terminus of the viral capsid protein, protein III (pIII), has been shown to be necessary for viral infection, the extreme N-terminus of the mature protein does tolerate alterations such as insertions. Accordingly, various random peptide libraries, in which the diverse peptides are expressed as pIll fusion proteins, are known in the art; these libraries can be used to identify syngene-encoded binding domains by screening against a ligand of choice.
Examples of such libraries are described below.
Scott and Smith, 1990, Science 249:386-390 describe construction and expression of an "epitope library" of hexapeptides on the surface of M13.
Cwirla et al., 1990, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87: 6378-6382 also described a somewhat similar library of hexapeptides expressed as pIII gene fusions of M13 fd phage. PCT publication WO 91/19818 dated December 26, 1991 by Dower and Cwirla describes a similar library of pentameric to octameric random amino acid
sequences. Devlin et al., 1990, Science, 249:404-406, described a peptide library of about 15 residues generated using an (NNS) coding scheme for
oligonucleotide synthesis in which S is G or C.
Christian et al., 1992, J. Mol. Biol. 227:711-718 described a phage display library expressing
decapeptides. Lenstra, 1992, J. Immunol. Meth.
152:149-157 described construction of a library by a laborious process encompassing annealing
oligonucleotides of about 17 or 23 degenerate bases with an 8 nucleotide long palindromic sequence at their 3' ends.
Other biological peptide libraries which can be used include those described in U.S. Patent No. 5,270,170, dated December 14, 1993; and PCT
Publication No. WO 91/19818, dated December 26, 1991.
In a specific embodiment, the R8C random peptide library (described in Section 6.10 and Figures 11 and 12) is used. In another specific embodiment, the R26 peptide library (described in Section 6.9.4 and Figure 9) is used. In yet another specific embodiment, the DC43 peptide library (described in Section 6.9.5 and Figure 13 is used).
The protein pVIII is a major M13 viral capsid protein which can also serve as a site for expressing peptides on the surface of M13 viral particles in the construction of random peptide libraries.
While it would be understood by one skilled in the art that as few as 5 amino acids can constitute a binding domain, the average functional domain within a natural protein is considered to be about 40 amino acids. Thus, the random peptide libraries from which the binding domains encoded by the syngenes of the present invention are preferably identified encode peptides having in the range of 5 to 200 total variant amino acids. Although it is contemplated that
biologically expressed random peptide libraries displaying short random inserts (i.e. less than 20 amino acids in length) could be used to identify syngenes of the invention, the most preferred binding domains will be identified from biologically expressed random peptide libraries in which the displayed peptide has 20 or greater unpredictable amino acids i.e. preferably in the range of 20 to 100, and most preferably 20 to 50 amino acids, as exemplified by the TSAR libraries described herein.
One of the objects of the present invention is to provide syngenes encoding binding domains of greater binding specificity than found in nature. To accomplish this, the invention preferably uses
libraries of greater complexity than are commonly employed in the art. The conventional teaching in the random peptide library art is that the length of inserted oligonucleotides should be kept short, encoding preferably fewer than 15 and most preferably about 6-8 amino acids. However, not only can
libraries encoding more than about 20 amino acids be constructed, but such libraries can be advantageously screened to identify peptides having binding
specificity for a variety of ligands. Such libraries with longer length inserts are exemplified by the TSAR libraries, described in detail hereinbelow in Section 5.1.3 and its subsections.
Libraries composed of longer length oligonucleotides afford the ability to identify peptides in which a short sequencenof amino acids is common to or shared by a number of peptides binding a given ligand, i.e., library members having shared binding motifs. The use of longer length libraries also affords the ability to identify peptides which do not have any shared sequences with other peptides but which nevertheless have binding specificity for the same ligand. Libraries having large inserted
oligonucleotide sequences provide the opportunity to identify or map binding sites which encompass not only a few contiguous amino acid residues, i.e., simple binding sites, but also those which encompass
discontinuous amino acids, i.e., complex binding sites.
Additionally, the large size of the inserted synthesized oligonucleotides of certain libraries provides the opportunity for the development of secondary and/or tertiary structure in the potential binding peptides and in sequences flanking the actual binding site in the binding domain. Secondary and tertiary structure often significantly affect the ability of a sequence to mediate binding, as well as the strength and specificity of any binding which occurs. Such complex structural developments are not feasible when only small length oligonucleotides are used.
Finally, e.s has been overlooked by the conventional wisdom, longer length peptide libraries provide a greatly enhanced complexity over shorter length peptide libraries. This greatly enhanced complexity is associated with the concept of sliding windows which must be counted inclusively, i.e., number of windows = [length of sequence] - [window size] + 1. This concept can be illustrated by
comparison of two libraries, as follows. Assume that a binding site to a ligand requires 5 contiguous amino acid residues (pentamer) . In two libraries composed of equal numbers of recombinants, a first library expressing pentamers, and another library constructed according to the present invention expressing 30-mers, the second library will be 26 times "richer" in binding sites relative to the first library, with the additional potential complexity contributed by secondary or tertiary structure provided by flanking regions.
Therefore, it is contemplated that the most preferred binding domains and the syngenes encoding them will be identified from biologically expressed random peptide libraries in which the displayed peptide is 20 or greater amino acids in length.
Examples of such random peptide libraries are the TSAR libraries described in detail in Section 5.1.3 and its subsections.
The most preferred libraries for practicing the invention are those that are generated or
constructed to express a plurality of heterofunctional fusion peptides. The putative binding domains in these peptides are not known to be naturally occurring amino acid sequences or encoded by naturally occurring nucleotide sequences. Thus, for example, the random peptide libraries from which the binding domains encoded by syngenes are identified are not cDNA or genomic libraries. The sequence of any given peptide from the preferred libraries cannot be predicted in advance. In a preferred embodiment, the peptides are expressed on the surface of the recombinant vectors of the library.
In one embodiment, the random library is a linear, non-constrained library. As would be
understood by one in the art having considered the present disclosure, in another specific embodiment, "constrained", "structured" or "semi-rigid" random peptide libraries could also be used in the present methods to identify binding domains encoded by
syngenes. Typically, these libraries express peptides that are substantially random but contain a small percentage of fixed residues within or flanking the random sequences that have the result of conferring structure or some degree of conformational rigidity to the peptide. In a semirigid peptide library, the plurality of synthetic oligonucleotides express peptides that are each able to adopt only one or a small number of different conformations that are constrained by the positioning of codons encoding certain structure conferring amino acids in or
flanking the synthesized variant or unpredicted oligonucleotides. Unlike linear, unconstrained libraries in which the plurality of proteins expressed potentially adopt thousands of short-lived different conformations, in a semirigid peptide library, the plurality of proteins expressed can adopt only a single or a small number of conformations. Such libraries are exemplified by the TSAR-13 and TSAR-14 libraries described in Section 6.4 and its
subsections; by a library of random 6 amino acid sequences, each flanked by invariant cysteine residues (O'Neil et al., 1992, Proteins 14:509-515); by a library of random 8 amino acid sequences, each flanked by invariant cysteine residues as in the R8C library described in Section 6.10 and Figures 11 and 12; and by those libraries disclosed in PCT Publication No. W094/11496, dated May 26, 1994.
The DNA encoding the random peptides of the libraries can be synthetic or natural in origin. For example, DNA can be prepared by a method similar to methods used for constructing a cDNA library.
However, the DNA is then sheared and/or digested into DNA pieces of 30 base pairs or smaller. The DNA pieces are then ligated together, preferably to sizes of about 120 base pairs to create DNA sequences that do not occur in nature. Peptides encoded by such sequences can be expressed in a library and screened for binding domains. However, as would be appreciated by one of skill in the art, such DNA sequences will contain stop codons and therefore would be a less desirable source of coding sequences. It is noted that such a library, by virtue of the juxtaposition of cDNA sequences used in creating it, is not a cDNA library.
It is not intended by the present invention to use cDNA libraries for identifying syngenes. Such libraries have been screened with oligonucleotides (Staudt et al., 1988, Science 241:577-580; Singh et al., 1988, Cell 52:415-423). These approaches yielded naturally occurring DNA binding proteins. The object of syngenes is to identify genes encoding sequences that are not present in nature.
5.1.3. TSAR LIBRARIES
In a preferred embodiment, a biological peptide library that is a random peptide "TSAR" library is screened to identify the synthetic gene sequences encoding a binding domain, for use in constructing a syngene. In this embodiment, the syngenes of the present invention encode peptides called TSARs which bind to a ligand of choice. TSARs is an acronym for "Totally Synthetic Affinity
Reagents" as described in PCT publication WO 91/12328, dated August 22, 1991. TSAR libraries, their
construction and use, and specific examples of TSAR libraries are described in these publications and in detail below. As described herein, nucleic acids encoding TSARs or a TSAR portion which mediates binding to the ligand of choice can be used to
identify and construct the syngenes of the present invention.
As used in the present invention, a TSAR is intended to encompass a concatenated heterofunctional peptide that includes at least two distinct functional regions. One region of the heterofunctional TSAR molecule is a binding domain with affinity for a ligand, that is preferably characterized by 1) its strength of binding under specific conditions, 2) the stability of its binding under specific conditions, and 3) its selective specificity for the chosen ligand. A second region of the heterofunctional TSAR molecule is an effector domain which in specific embodiments of the TSAR libraries is the pIII protein or other structural protein providing for phage display of the heterofunctional peptide. In other embodiments, such a sequence can also include a sequence that is biologically or chemically active to enhance expression and/or detection and/or
purification of the TSAR. Such a sequence can be chosen from a number of biologically or chemically active proteins including a structural protein or fragment that is accessibly expressed as a surface protein of a vector, an enzyme or fragment thereof, a toxin or fragment thereof, a therapeutic protein or peptide, or a protein or peptide whose function is to provide a site for attachment of a substance such as a metal ion, etc., that is useful for enhancing
expression and/or detection and/or purification of the expressed TSAR.
A TSAR can contain an optional additional linker domain or region between the binding domain and the effector domain. The linker region serves (1) as a structural spacer region between the binding and effector domains; (2) as an aid to uncouple or
separate the binding and effector domains; or (3) as a structural aid for display of the binding domain and/or the TSAR by the expression vector.
A TSAR may be a heterofunctional fusion protein, said fusion protein comprising (a) a binding domain encoded by an oligonucleotide comprising unpredictable nucleotides in which the unpredictable nucleotides are arranged in one or more contiguous sequences, wherein the total number of unpredictable nucleotides is greater than or equal to about 60 and less than or equal to about 600, and optionally, (b) an effector domain encoded by an oligonucleotide sequence which is a protein or peptide that enhances expression or detection of the binding domain.
Alternatively, a TSAR may be a heterofunctional fusion protein comprising (i) a binding domain encoded by a double stranded oligonucleotide comprising unpredictable nucleotides in which the unpredictable nucleotides are arranged in one or more contiguous sequences, wherein the total number of unpredictable nucleotides is greater than or equal to about 60 and less than or equal to about 600 and the contiguous sequences are flanked by invariant residues designed to encode amino acids that confer a desired structure to the binding domain of the expressed
heterofunctional fusion protein, and, optionally, (ii) an effector domain encoded by an oligonucleotide sequence encoding a protein or peptide that enhances expression or detection of the binding domain.
5.1.3.1. CONSTRUCTION OF TSAR LIBRARIES In one embodiment of the present invention, in order to identify and obtain the syngenes of the present invention, use is made of TSAR libraries. In order to prepare a library of vectors expressing a plurality of protein TSARs according to one embodiment of the present invention, single stranded sets of nucleotides are synthesized and assembled in vi tro, by way of example, according to the following scheme.
The synthesized nucleotide sequences are designed to have variant or unpredicted as well as invariant nucleotide positions. Pairs of variant nucleotides in which one individual member is
represented by 5' (NNB)n 3' and the other member is represented by 3' (NNV)m 5' where N is A, C, G or T; B is G, T or C; V is G, A or C; n is an integer, such that 10 ≤ n ≤ 100, and m is an integer, such that 10 ≤ m≤ 100, are synthesized for assembly into synthetic oligonucleotides. As assembled, there are at least n + m variant codons in each inserted synthesized double stranded oligonucleotide sequence.
As would be understood by those of skill in the art, the variant nucleotide positions have the potential to encode all 20 naturally occurring amino acids and, when assembled as taught by the present method, encode only one stop codon, i.e., TAG. The sequence of amino acids encoded by the variant
nucleotides is unpredictable and substantially random in sequence. As explained hereinabove, the terms "unpredicted", "unpredictable" and "substantially random" are used interchangeably in the present application with respect to the amino acids encoded and are intended to mean that at any given position within the binding domain of the TSARs encoded by the variant nucleotides which of the 20 naturally
occurring amino acids will occur cannot be predicted.
The variant nucleotides, according to the TSAR scheme, encode all twenty naturally occurring amino acids by use of 48 different codons.
Invariant nucleotides are positioned at particular sites in the nucleotide sequences to aid in assembly and cloning of the synthesized
oligonucleotides. At the 5' termini of the sets of variant nucleotides, the invariant nucleotides encode for efficient restriction enzyme cleavage sites. The invariant nucleotides at the 5' termini are chosen to encode pairs of sites for cleavage by restriction enzymes (1) which can function in the same buffer conditions; (2) are commercially available at high specific activity; (3) are not complementary to each other to prevent self-ligation of the synthesized double stranded oligonucleotides; and (4) which require either 6 or 8 nucleotides for a cleavage recognition site in order to lower the frequency of cleaving within the inserted double stranded
synthesized oligonucleotide sequences. According to one particular method of constructing peptide
libraries, the selected restriction site pairs are selected from Xho I and Xba I, and Sal I and Spe I. Other examples of useful restriction enzyme sites include, but are not limited to: Nco I, Nsi I, Pal I, Not I, Sfi I, Pme I, etc. Restriction sites at the 5' termini invariant positions function to promote proper orientation and efficient production of recombinant molecule formation during ligation when the
oligonucleotides are inserted into an appropriate expression vector.
According to an alternative method of constructing peptide libraries, the variant
nucleotides are synthesized using one or more
methylated dNTPs and the 5' termini invariant
nucleotides, encoding restriction sites for efficient cleavage, are synthesized using non-methylated dNTPs. This embodiment provides for efficient cleavage of long length synthesized oligonucleotides at the termini for insertion into an appropriate vector, while avoiding cleavage in the variant nucleotide sequences.
The 3' termini invariant nucleotide positions are complementary pairs of 6, 9 or 12 nucleotides to aid in annealing two synthesized single stranded sets of nucleotides together and conversion to double-stranded DNA, designated herein synthesized double stranded oligonucleotides.
In particular peptide libraries, the 3' termini invariant nucleotides are selected from
5'GCGGTG3' and 3'CGCCAC5', and 5'CCAGGT3' and 3'GGTCCA5', which also encode either a particular amino acid, glycine, or dipeptide proline-glycine, which provides the flexibility of either a swivel or hinge type configuration to the expressed proteins, polypeptides and/or peptides, respectively. In yet another specific library, the 3' termini invariant nucleotides of the coding strand are 5' GGGTGCGGC 3' which encode glycine, cysteine, glycine. In an oxidizing environment the cysteine forms a disulfide bond with another cysteine
engineered into the binding domain to form a semirigid conformation in the expressed peptide.
In another library, the complementary 3' termini also encode an amino acid sequence that provides a short charge cluster (for example, KKKK
(SEQ ID NO: 49), DDDD (SEQ ID NO: 50) or KDKD (SEQ ID NO: 51)), or a sharp turn (for example, NPXY (SEQ ID NO: 52), YXRF (SEQ ID NO: 53) where X is any amino acid). In another alternative library, the
complementary 3' termini also encode a short amino acid sequence that provides a peptide known to have a desirable binding or other biological activity.
Specific examples include complementary pairs of sequences encoding peptides including but not limited to RGD, HAV, HPQθ where θ is a non-polar amino acid. These short amino acid sequences are intended to aid in screening the library and retrieving members of the library; they are not intended to be binding domains.
Figure 1A generally illustrates an assembly process. The oligonucleotide sequences are thus assembled by a process comprising: synthesis of pairs of single stranded nucleotides having a formula represented by:
(a) 5' → 3' Restriction site- (NNB)n-Complementary site; and
(b) 3' → 5' Complementary site- (NNV)--Restriction site, where n is an integer, such that 10 ≤ n ≤ 100 and m is an integer, such that 10 ≤ m ≤l00. More particularly, the single stranded nucleotides are represented as : pairs of nucleotide sequences of a first formula 5' X (NNB)n J Z 3' and a second nucleotide sequence of the formula 3' Z' O U (NNV). Y 5' where X and Y are restriction enzyme recognition sites, such that X≠ Y;
N is A, C, G or T;
B is G, T or C;
V is G, A or C;
n is an integer, such that 10 ≤ n ≤ 100;
m is an integer, such that 10 ≤ m ≤ 100;
Z and Z' are each a sequence of 6, 9 or 12 nucleotides, such that
Z and Z' are complementary to each other; and J is A, C, G, T or nothing;
0 is A, C, G, T or nothing; and
U is G, A, C or nothing; provided, however, if any one of J, O or U is nothing then J, O and U are all nothing.
Any method for synthesis of the single stranded sets of nucleotides is suitable, including use of an automatic nucleotide synthesizer. The synthesizer can be programmed so that the nucleotides can be incorporated, either in equimolar or non- equimolar ratios at the variant positions, i.e., N, B, V, J, O or U. The nucleotide sequences of the desired length are purified, for example, by HPLC.
Pairs of the purified, single stranded nucleotides of the desired length are reacted together in appropriate buffers through repetitive cycles of annealing and DNA synthesis using an appropriate DNA polymerase, such as Taq, Vent™ or Bst DNA polymerase, and appropriate temperature cycling. Sequenase™
(modified T7 DNA polymerase) is preferred for use, and can be employed according to the instructions of the manufacturer (U.S. Biochemical, Cleveland, OH), without temperature cycling. Klenow fragment of E. coli DNA polymerase could be used but, as would be understood by those of skill in the art, such
polymerase would need to be replenished at each cycle and thus is less preferred. The double stranded DNA reaction products, now greater than m + n in length, are isolated, for example, by phenol/chloroform extraction and precipitation with ethanol.
After resuspension in buffer, the double stranded synthetic oligonucleotides are cleaved with appropriate restriction enzymes to yield a plurality of synthesized oligonucleotides. The double-stranded synthesized oligonucleotides should be selected for those of the appropriate size by means of high
resolution polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis, or NuSieve/MetaMorph (FMC Corp., Rockland, MA) agarose gel electrophoresis, or the like. Size selection of the oligonucleotides substantially eliminates abortive assembly products of inappropriate size and incomplete digestion products.
This scheme for synthesis and assembly of the unpredictable oligonucleotides used to construct the TSAR libraries incorporates m + n variant, unpredicted nucleotide sequences of the formula
(NNB)n+m where B is G, T or C and n and m are each an integer, such that 20 ≤ n + m≤ 220; thus, from 20 to 200 unpredicted codons are incorporated into the synthesized double stranded oligonucleotides. Such a scheme provides a number of important advantages not available with conventional libraries. As assembled, the synthesized oligonucleotides encode all twenty naturally occurring amino acids by use of 48 different amino acid encoding codons. Although this uses somewhat less variability than that found in nature where 64 different codons are used, the scheme
advantageously provides greater variability than other conventional schemes. For example, conventional schemes in which the variant nucleotides have the formula NNK, where K is G or T (see Dower, PCT
Publication No. WO 91/19818), or the formula NNS, where S is C or G (see Devlin, PCT Publication No. WO 91/18980), use only 32 different amino acid- encoding codons. The use of a larger number of amino acid encoding codons may make the TSAR libraries less susceptible to codon preferences of the host when the libraries are expressed. Although both the TSAR scheme and conventional schemes retain only 1 stop codon, use of NNB as taught in the TSAR scheme
advantageously provides synthesized oligonucleotides in which the probability of a stop codon is decreased compared to conventional NNS or NNK schemes.
Perhaps most significantly, the TSAR scheme for synthesis and assembly of the oligonucleotides provides sequences of oligonucleotides encoding unpredicted amino acid sequences which are larger in size than conventional libraries. The present
synthesized double stranded oligonucleotides comprise at least about 77-631 nucleotides encoding the
restriction enzyme sites, the complementary site and about 20-200 unpredicted amino acids in the TSAR binding domain. According to a preferred embodiment, n and m are greater than or equal to 10 and less than or equal to 50. Thus, the synthesized double stranded oligonucleotides comprise at least 77-331 nucleotides and encode about 20-100 unpredicted amino acids in the TSAR binding domain. In specific examples, the synthesized oligonucleotides encode 20, 24 and 36 unpredicted amino acids and 27, 35 and 42 total amino acids, respectively for the TSAR-9, TSAR-12, and
TSAR-13 libraries, in the TSAR binding domain.
According to an alternative embodiment, syngenes are isolated from a library which expresses a plurality of TSAR peptides having some degree of conformational rigidity in their structure
(constrained or semirigid peptide libraries,
illustrated in Figure 1D-F and exemplified by the
TSAR-13 and TSAR-14 libraries described in Section 6.4 and its subsections. At least four different methods can be used to engineer TSAR libraries used to identify syngene sequences encoding a binding domain, so that the expressed peptides are semirigid or have some degree of conformational rigidity. In the first method, the synthesized oligonucleotides are designed so that the expressed peptides have a pair of invariant cysteine residues positioned in, or flanking, the unpredicted or variant residues (See Figure ID). When the library is expressed in an oxidizing environment, the cysteine residues should be in the oxidized state, most likely cross-linked by disulfide bonds to form cystines.
Thus, the peptides would form rigid or semirigid loops. The nucleotides encoding the cysteine residues should be placed from 6 to 27 amino acids apart flanking the variant nucleotide sequences. A
particular peptide library having such structure is the R8C library described in Section 6.13 infra .
The actual positions of the invariant residues can be modeled on the arrangement observed in isolates from a linear peptide library, for example, TSAR peptides in which two or four cysteines are encoded by the inserted synthesized oligonucleotides, isolated from the TSAR-9 or TSAR-12 libraries (see Section 6.9 and its subsections infra) . The following general formulas illustrate the structure of these peptides:
(1) X(NNB)6(TGC)(NNB) 11Z (HUB) 14 (TGC)(NNB)3Y
(2) X(NNB)1(TGC) (NNB)10(TGC)2(NNB)4Z(NNB)8(TGC ) (NNB)9Y;
(3) X(NNB)16(TGC)(NNB)1Z(NNB)16(TGC)(NNB)1Y;
(4) X(NNB)n(TGC) (NNB)6Z(NNB)7(TGC) (NNB)10Y The positions of the cysteines are well tolerated as these phage are stable and infectious.
In the second method, a double stranded oligonucleotide sequence providing a cloverleaf structure (see Figure 1E) can be represented, for example, by the formula:
X(TGC)1 (NNB) 10 (TGC)1 (NNB)6Z (NNB) 2 (TGC) 1 (NNB) 14 (TGC)1Y . When these peptides are expressed by the appropriate vectors, the cysteine residues may adopt three
different disulfide bond arrangements, thereby
generating three different patterns of "cloverleafs". The plurality of proteins, polypeptides and/or
peptides expressed by this type of rigid library should form many different ligand binding pockets from which to select the best fit. It should be noted that when a semirigid library of the first or second type above is expressed in a viral vector in an oxidizing environment, there will likely be a selection against odd numbers of cysteines occurring within the
unpredicted or random peptide regions expressed because one unpaired cysteine residue will likely cross-link the viral vectors and make them non- infectious. Examples of semi-rigid libraries
providing a cloverleaf structure are the TSAR-13 and TSAR-14 libraries described in Sections 6.9.4 and 6.9.4.1 infra .
In the third method, the synthesized
nucleotides are designed and assembled so that the plurality of proteins expressed have both invariant cysteine and histidine residues positioned within the variant nucleotide sequences (see Figure 1F). The positions of the invariant residues can be modeled after the arrangement of cysteine and histidine residues seen in zinc finger proteins (i.e., -CX2- 4CX12HX3-4H-, where X is any amino acid), thereby creating a library of zinc finger-like proteins. As used herein the term "zinc finger-like proteins" is intended to mean any of the plurality of proteins expressed which contain invariant cysteine and
histidine residues which confer a zinc finger or similar structure on the expressed protein. In the fourth method, (see Figure 1F), the plurality of proteins are designed to have invariant histidine residues positioned within the variant nucleotide sequences. To illustrate, exemplary histidine containing TSARs can be represented by the following general formulas:
(1) X(NNB)4(CAC)(NNB)4(CAC)(NNB)8Z(NNB)-(CAC)(NNB)8(CAC )2(NNB)Y;
(2) X(NNB)6(CAC)(NNB)9(CAC)(NNB)Z(CAC)(NNB)4(CAC)2(NNB) -(CAC)(NNB)(CAC)(NNB)2Y;
(3) X(NNB)1(CAC)(NNB)11(CAC)1(NNB)(CAC)(NNB)2Z(NNB)6(CAC ) (NNB)5(CAC)2(NNB)4Y; and
(4 ) X(CAC)(NNB)2(CAC)(NNB)9(CAC)(NNB)-(CAC)(NNB)Z(CAC) (NNB)6(CAC)(NNB)4(CAC)(NNB)(CAC)(NNB)3Y, where CAC represents the codon for histidine.
To maintain the rigid cloverleaf
conformation of this plurality of proteins, the TSAR proteins are expressed and harvested in the presence of 1-1000 μM zinc chloride. The expressed proteins could also be saturated with other divalent metal cations, such as Cu2+ and Ni2+. The members of this type of rigid library may have advantageous chemical reactivity, since metal ions are often within the catalytic sites of enzymes.
To prepare a libary of syngenes encoding semi-rigid or constrained peptides, the synthesized single stranded nucleotides are assembled by annealing a first nucleotide sequence of the formula: 5'X [α (NNB)a]c JZ 3' with a second nucleotide
sequence of the formula
3' Z'OU [(NNV)b β]d Y 5' where a, c, b, d are integers such that 20 ≤ [a]c +
[b]d ≤ 200; and
c and d are each ≥ 1; a is an invariant nucleotide sequence that
confers some structure in the peptide it encodes and β is an invariant nucleotide sequence whose complimentary nucleotide sequence confers some structure in the encoded peptide; and
X, Y, N, B, V, Z, Z', J, O, U are as defined above.
This scheme for synthesis of unpredictable oligonucleotides incorporates a total of the
arithmetic sum of (a x e) + (b x d), i.e., [a]c+[b]d variant, unpredicted nucleotide sequences, i.e.,
[(NNB)a]c + [(NNV)b]d, flanked by invariant nucleotides, i . e . , a and β, which encode structure-conferring amino acid sequences.
By way of example, a and β could include a codon for one or more cysteine residues, for example Gly-Cys-Gly, in which instance a and b are each preferably ≥6 and ≤27, to generate disulfide bonds between different cysteines in the expressed loop forming peptide structures. Appropriate
oligonucleotides could be assembled, by annealing for example, a first nucleotide sequence of the formula: 5' X α(NNB)a α(NNB)aZ 3' with a second nucleotide sequence of the formula
3' Z' (NNV)b β Y 5'.
More particularly, where CK encodes the sequence Gly- Cys-Gly (and the complementary sequence of β encodes the same sequence, and where both a and b are equal to seven, the synthesized single stranded nucleotides are assembled by annealing a first nucleotide sequence: 5' X(GGG)(TGT)(GGG)(NNB)7(GGG)(TGT)(GGG)(NNB)7(GGG) (TGT)(GGG) 3' with a second nucleotide sequence:
3' (CCC)(ACA)(CCC)(NNV)7(CCC)(ACA)(CCC)Y 5'
where GGG represents the codon for glycine and TGT represents the codon for cysteine. This
oligonucleotide scheme encodes peptides, whose amino acid sequence would be GCGX-GCGX-GCGX-GCG. Alternatively, a and β could encode one or more histidine residues, for example GHGHG (SEQ ID NO: 54). In yet another alternative embodiment, or and β could encode a Leu residue in which instance a and b are each s about 7. Such alternative embodiment would provide an alpha helical structure in the expressed peptides.
Additionally, according to yet another alternative embodiment, an a group could be used for Z, and β for Z' to provide the complementary sequences to aid in annealing the nucleotides.
Other nucleotide sequences encoding amino acids that will impose structural constraints on the expressed peptides are possible as would become apparent to one of skill in the art based on the above description and syngenes encoding such constrained peptides are encompassed within the scope of the present invention.
An additional feature of these semirigid libraries is the potential to control the binding properties of isolates by reversibly destroying or altering the rigidity of the peptide. For example, it should be possible to elute a TSAR bound to a
particular ligand in a gentle manner with reducing agents (i . e . , DTT, β-mercaptoethanol) or divalent cation chelators (i.e., EDTA, EGTA) . Such reagents can be used, for example, to elute a TSAR library expressed on phage vectors from target ligands. EDTA or EGTA, at low concentrations, does not appear to disrupt phage integrity or infectivity.
Once the phage have been recovered and it is deemed necessary to remove thiols from the solution, the reduced cysteine residues can be alkylated with iodoacetamide. This treatment prevents renewed disulfide bond formation and only diminishes phage infectivity 10-100 fold, which is tolerable since phage cultures usually attain titers of 1012 plaque forming units per milliliter. Alternatively, the elution reagents can be removed by dialysis (i.e., dialysis bag, Centricon/Amicon microconcentrators).
5.1.3.2. EXPRESSION OF VECTORS ENCODING TSARS In constructing a TSAR library, the plurality of oligonucleotides of appropriate size prepared as described above is inserted into an appropriate vector which, when inserted into a
suitable host, expresses the plurality of peptides as heterofunctional fusion proteins with an expressed component of the vector (effector domain) which are screened to identify TSARs having affinity for a ligand of choice. According to an optional
embodiment, the plurality of peptides further comprise a linking domain between the binding and effector domains. In a preferred mode of this embodiment, the linker domain is expressed as a fusion protein with the effector domain of the vector into which the plurality of oligonucleotides are inserted.
The skilled artisan will recognize that to achieve transcription and translation of the plurality of TSAR encoding oligonucleotides, the synthetic oligonucleotides must be placed under the control of a promoter compatible with the chosen vector-host system. A promoter is a region of DNA at which RNA polymerase attaches and initiates transcription. The promoter selected may be any one that has been
synthesized or isolated that is functional in the vector-host system. For example, E. coli , a commonly used host system, has numerous promoters such as the lac or trp promoter or the promoters of its
bacteriophages or its plasmids. Also synthetic or recombinantly produced promoters such as the pTAC promoter may be used to direct high level expression of the gene segments adjacent to them. Signals are also necessary in order to attain efficient translation of the inserted
oligonucleotides. For example in E. coli mRNA, a ribosome binding site includes the translational start codon AUG or GUG in addition to other sequences complementary to the bases of the 3' end of 165 ribosomal RNA. Several of these latter sequences such as the Shine/Dalgarno (S/D) sequence have been
identified in E. coli and other suitable host cell types. Any S/D-ATG sequence which is compatible with the host cell system can be employed. These S/D-ATG sequences include, but are not limited to, the S/D-ATG sequences of the cro gene or N gene of bacteriophage lambda, the tryptophan E, D, C, B or A genes, a synthetic S/D sequence or other S/D-ATG sequences known and used in the art. Thus, regulatory elements control the expression of the polypeptide or proteins to allow directed synthesis of the reagents in cells and to prevent constitutive synthesis of products which might be toxic to host cells and thereby
interfere with cell growth.
Any of a variety of vectors can be used, including, but not limited to bacteriophage vectors such as ∅X174, λ, M13 and its derivatives, f1, fd, Pf1, etc., phagemid vectors, plasmid vectors, insect viruses, such as baculovirus vectors, mammalian cell vectors, including such virus vectors as parvovirus vectors, adenovirus vectors, vaccinia virus vectors, retrovirus vectors, etc., yeast vectors such as Tyl, killer particles, etc.
An appropriate vector contains or is
engineered to contain a gene encoding an effector domain of a TSAR comprising the pIII protein or other suitable protein or portion thereof providing for phage display. The effector domain gene contains or is engineered to contain multiple cloning sites. At least two different restriction enzyme sites within such gene, comprising a polylinker, are preferred. The vector DNA is cleaved within the polylinker using two different restriction enzymes to generate termini complementary to the termini of the double stranded synthesized oligonucleotides assembled as described above. Preferably the vector termini after cleavage have or are modified, using DNA polymerase, to have non-compatible sticky ends that do not self-ligate, thus favoring insertion of the double-stranded
synthesized oligonucleotides and hence formation of recombinants expressing the TSAR fusion proteins, polypeptides and/or peptides. The double stranded synthesized oligonucleotides are ligated to the appropriately cleaved vector using DNA ligase.
It is particularly useful to include a
"stuffer fragment" within the polylinker region of the vector when the vector (e.g. phage or plasmid) is intended to express the TSAR as a heterofunctional fusion protein that is expressed on the surface of the vector. As used in the present application, a
"stuffer fragment" is intended to encompass a
relatively short, i.e., about 24-45 nucleotides, known DNA sequence flanked by at least 2 restriction enzyme sites, useful for cloning, said DNA sequences coding for a binding site recognized by a known ligand, such as an epitope of a known monoclonal antibody. The restriction enzyme sites at the termini of the stuffer fragment are useful for insertion of the synthesized double stranded oligonucleotides, resulting in
deletion of the stuffer fragment.
Because of the physical linkage between the expressed heterologous fusion protein and the phage or plasmid vector containing the stuffer fragment and because the stuffer fragment can comprise a known DNA sequence encoding a protein that is immunologically active (i.e., an immunological marker), the presence or absence of the stuffer fragment can be easily detected either at the nucleotide level, by DNA sequencing, PCR or hybridization, or at the amino acid level, e. g. , using an immunological assay. Such determination allows rapid discrimination between recombinant (TSAR expressing) vectors generated by insertion of the synthesized double stranded
oligonucleotides and non-recombinant vectors.
According to a preferred embodiment, the stuffer fragment comprises the DNA fragment encoding the epitope of the human c-myc protein recognized by the murine monoclonal antibody 9E10 having the amino acid sequence EQKLISEEDLN (SEQ ID NO: 55) (Evan et al., 1985, Mol. Cell. Biol. 5:3610-3616) with a short flanking sequence of amino acids at the 5' and 3' termini which serve as restriction enzyme sites so that the stuffer fragment can be removed and the synthesized double stranded oligonucleotides can be inserted using the restriction sites.
In another aspect, the stuffer fragment provides an efficient means to remove any non- recombinant vectors to enhance or enrich the
population of TSAR expressing vectors, if necessary. Because the stuffer fragment is expressed e . g. , as an immunologically active surface protein on the surface of non-recombinant vectors, it provides an accessible target for binding e. g. , to an immobilized antibody. The non-recombinants thus could be easily removed from a library for example by serial passage over a column having the antibody immobilized thereon to enrich the population of recombinant TSAR-expressing vectors in the library.
In a preferred embodiment, the vector providing for expression of the TSAR libraries is or is derived from a filamentous bacteriophage, including but not limited to M13, f1, fd, Pf1, etc. vector encoding a phage structural protein, preferably a phage coat protein, such as pIII, pVIII, etc. In a more preferred embodiment, the filamentous phage is an M13-derived phage vector such as m655, m663, and m666 described in Fowlkes et al., 1992, BioTechniques, 13:422-427 which encodes the structural coat protein pIII.
The phage vector is chosen to contain or is constructed to contain a cloning site located in the 5 ' region of a gene encoding a bacteriophage
structural protein so that the plurality of
synthesized double stranded oligonucleotides inserted are expressed as fusion proteins on the surface of the bacteriophage. This advantageously provides not only a plurality of accessible expressed peptides but also provides a physical link between the peptides and the inserted oligonucleotides to provide for easy
screening and sequencing of the identified TSARs.
Alternatively, the vector is chosen to contain or is constructed to contain a cloning site near the 3' region of a gene encoding structural protein so that the plurality of expressed proteins constitute C- terminal fusion proteins.
According to a preferred embodiment, the structural bacteriophage protein is pIII. The m663 vector described by Fowlkes et al. (1992,
BioTechniques 13:422-427), containing the pIII gene having a c-myc-epitope (comprising the "stuffer fragment") introduced at the N-terminal end, flanked by Xho I and Xba I restriction sites may be used. The library may be constructed by cloning the plurality of synthesized oligonucleotides into a cloning site near the N-terminus of the mature coat protein of the appropriate vector, preferably the pIII protein, so that the oligonucleotides are expressed as coat protein-fusion proteins.
Alternatively, the plurality of
oligonucleotides is inserted into a phagemid vector. Phagemids are utilized in combination with a defective helper phage to supply missing viral proteins and replicative functions. Helper phage useful for propagation of Ml3 derived phagemids as viral
particles include but are not limited to M13 phage K07, R408, VCS, etc. Generally, according to a preferred mode of this embodiment, the appropriate phagemid vector is constructed by engineering the Bluescript II SK+ vector (GenBank #52328) (Alting-Mees et al., 1989, Nucl. Acid Res. 17:9494); to contain (1) a truncated portion of the M13 pIII gene, i.e., nucleotides encoding amino acid residues 198-406 of the mature pIII, (2) the PelB signal leading with an upstream ribosome binding site and a short polylinker of Pst I, Xho I, Hind III, and Xba I restriction sites, in which the Xho I and Xba I sites are
positioned so the synthesized double stranded
oligonucleotides could be cloned and expressed in the same reading frame as the m663 phage vector; and (3) the linker sequence encoding GGGGS (SEQ ID NO: 56) between the polylinker and the pIII gene.
Alternatively, the synthesized
oligonucleotides are inserted into a plasmid vector. An illustrative suitable plasmid vector for expressing the TSAR libraries is a derivative of plasmid p340-1 (ATCC No. 40516).
In order to obtain the appropriate p340-1 derivative suitable as an expression vector, the Nco I - Bam HI fragment is removed from p340-1 plasmid and replaced by a double stranded sequence having Xho I and Xba I restriction sites in the correct reading frame. In practice, p340-1 is cleaved using
restriction enzymes at the Bgl II and Xba I sites and annealed with two oligonucleotides:
(1) 5'-CATGGCTCGAGGCTGAGTTCTAGA-3' (SEQ ID NO: 57) and (2) 5'-GATCTCTAGAACTCAGCCTCGAGC-3' (SEQ ID NO: 58) having Nco I and Bam HI sticky ends. After ligation and transformation of E. coli , recombinants containing the desired plasmid designated p340-lD are selected based on the inserted SEQ ID NOS: 57 and 58 and verified by sequencing. Like the parent p340-1, the desired p340-lD does not produce functional β- galactosidase because this gene is out of frame.
Thus, when the synthesized double stranded
oligonucleotides are inserted, using the Xho I and Xba I restriction sites, into the p340-lD vector the coding frame is restored and the TSAR binding domain is expressed as a fusion protein with the β- galactosidase. When exposed to IPTG, the vectors expressing the TSAR library would produce identifiable blue colonies.
Another illustrative plasmid vector useful to express a TSAR library is a plasmid derivative of plasmid pTrc99A (Amann et al., 1988, Gene 69:301-315) (Pharmacia, Piscataway, NJ) designated plasmid pLamB which is constructed to contain the LamB protein gene of E. coli (Clement and Hofnung, 1981, Cell
27:507-514) having a cloning site so that the
plurality of oligonucleotides inserted are expressed as fusion proteins of the LamB protein.
Once the appropriate expression vectors are prepared, they are inserted into an appropriate host, such as E. coli , Bacillus subtil is, insect cells, mammalian cells, yeast cells, etc., for example by electroporation, and the plurality of oligonucleotides is expressed by culturing the transfected host cells under appropriate culture conditions for colony or phage production. Preferably, the host cells are protease deficient, and may or may not carry
suppressor tRNA genes.
A small aliquot of the electroporated cells are plated and the number of colonies or plaques are counted to determine the number of recombinants. The library of recombinant vectors in host cells is plated at high density for a single amplification of the recombinant vectors.
For example, recombinant M13 vector m666, m655 or m663, engineered to contain the synthesized double stranded oligonucleotides, is transfected into DH5αF' E. coli cells by electroporation. TSARs are expressed on the outer surface of the viral capsid extruded from the host E. coli cells and are
accessible for screening. The parent m666, m655 or m663 vectors contain the c-myc epitope (stuffer fragment). When the double stranded synthesized oligonucleotides are inserted between the Xho I and Xba I sites, the stuffer fragment is removed. The cloning efficiency of the expressed library is easily determined by filter blotting with the 9E10 antibody that recognizes the c-myc epitope.
Alternatively, when the double stranded synthesized oligonucleotides are cloned just at the Xho I or Xba I site, the c-myc epitope is retained. Then the c-myc epitope is expressed in the pIII-fusion protein expressed by the vector. An advantage of the m663 vector is that it contains an intact LacZ+ gene, which can be easily seen as a blue dot when expressed in E. coli plated on X-gal and IPTG.
TSARs can be expressed in a plasmid vector contained in bacterial host cells such as E. coli . The TSAR proteins accumulate inside the E. coli cells and a cell lysate is prepared for screening. Use of plasmid p340-lD is described as an illustrative example. A TSAR library in p340-lD as described above, expressed the co-functional fusion protein with β-galactosidase. In the parent vector (without synthetic oligonucleotide) the β-galactosidase gene is out of frame and therefore nonfunctional. When plated on LB plates with ampicillin, IPTG and Xgal, the colonies that have TSAR oligonucleotides yield blue colonies, whereas colonies harboring non-recombinant p340-lD or p340-lD recombinants with oligonucleotides carrying unsuppressed stop codons will be white. The relative number of blue and white colonies reveals the percent recombinants, and is useful in estimating the total numbers of recombinants in the library, and is also useful in screening.
Phagemid vectors containing the synthesized double stranded oligonucleotides, expressed on the outer surface of the extruded phage, are propagated either as infected bacteria or as bacteriophage with helper phage.
The expressed pDAF2-3 phagemids (See Section 6.10 and its subsections) have the added advantage that they include the c-myc gene which can serve as an "epitope tag" for the fusion pIII proteins.
Approximately 0.1-10% of the phage carrying the phagemid genome incorporate the fusion pIII molecule. The intactness of the chimeric pIII proteins is evaluated based on the expression of the c-myc
epitope. By following the expression of the c-myc epitope using the 9E10 antibody, it is possible to monitor the successful incorporation of the fusion pIII molecule into the M13 viral particle.
Also when expressing pDAF2, if the upstream c-myc peptide is detected immunologically using the 9E10 antibody, then it can be assumed that the
downstream synthesized oligonucleotide, expressed TSAR peptide is appropriately expressed.
In addition, it may be of value to electroporate several different strains of E. coli and establish different versions of the same library. Of course, the same E. coli strain would need to be used for the entire set of screening experiments. This strategy is based on the consideration that there is likely an in vivo biological selection, both positive and negative, on the viral assembly, secretion, and infectivity rate of individual M13 recombinants due to the sequence nature of the peptide-pIII fusion
proteins. Therefore, E. coli with different genotypes (i.e., chaperonin overexpressing, or secretion
enhanced) will serve as bacterial hosts, because they will yield libraries that differ in subtle,
unpredictable ways.
5.2. SCREENING OF PEPTIDE LIBRARIES
TO IDENTIFY BINDING DOMAINS ENCODED BY SYNGENES
The desired random peptide library is screened to identify and recover a syngene encoding a binding domain that binds to a ligand of choice.
As used in the present invention, a ligand is a substance for which it is desired to isolate a specific binding partner from a synthetic random peptide library. The term "ligand" is thus intended to include but not be limited to a substance,
including a molecule or portion thereof, for which a proteinaceous receptor naturally exists or can be prepared according to the method of the invention. For example, a binding domain which binds to a ligand can function as a receptor, i.e., a lock into which the ligand fits and binds; or a binding domain can function as a key which fits into and binds a ligand when the ligand is a larger protein molecule. In this invention, a ligand includes, but is not limited to, a non-ionic chemical group, an organic chemical group, an ion, a metal, a metal or non-metal inorganic ion, a glycoprotein, a protein, a polypeptide, a peptide, a nucleic acid, a carbohydrate or carbohydrate polymer, a lipid, a fatty acid, a viral particle, a membrane vesicle, a cell wall component, a synthetic organic compound, a bioorganic compound and an inorganic compound or any portion of any of the above. Ligands also include the variable region of an antibody, an enzyme/substrate binding site, an enzyme/co-factor binding site, a regulatory DNA binding protein, an RNA binding protein, a binding site of a metal binding protein, a nucleotide fold or GTP binding protein, a calcium binding protein, a membrane protein, a viral protein and an integrin. In another embodiment, the ligand is a peptide that is an intracellular targeting or processing signal (e.g., nuclear localization signals), e.g., whereby the syngene-encoded binding peptide which recognizes it will interfere with proper targeting of in vivo proteins containing such a targeting signal.
A preferred method for identifying syngenes that encode a binding domain that binds to a ligand of choice comprises screening a library of recombinant vectors that express a plurality of heterofunctional fusion proteins, said fusion proteins comprising (a) a binding domain encoded by an oligonucleotide
comprising unpredictable nucleotides in which the unpredictable nucleotides are arranged in one or more contiguous sequences, wherein the total number of unpredictable nucleotides is greater than or equal to about 60 and less than or equal to about 600, and optionally, (b) an effector domain encoded by an oligonucleotide sequence which is a protein or peptide that enhances expression or detection of the binding domain. Screening is done by contacting the plurality of heterofunctional fusion proteins with the ligand of choice under conditions conducive to ligand binding and then isolating the fusion proteins which bind to the ligand. The methods of the invention further preferably comprise determining the nucleotide
sequence encoding the binding domain of the
heterofunctional fusion protein identified to
determine the syngene sequence that encodes the binding domain and simultaneously to deduce the amino acid sequence of the binding domain. Nucleotide sequence analysis can be carried out by any method known in the art, including but not limited to the method of Maxam and Gilbert (1980, Meth. Enzymol.
65:499-560), the Sanger dideoxy method (Sanger et al., 1977, Proc. Natl, Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 74:5463), the use of T7 DNA polymerase (Tabor and Richardson, U.S.
Patent No. 4,795,699; Sequenase™, U.S. Biochemical Corp.), or Taq polymerase, or use of an automated DNA sequenator (e.g., Applied Biosystems, Foster City, CA).
Alternatively, syngenes encoding binding domains are identified by a method comprising
identifying their encoded binding domain protein
(and/or peptide) which binds to a ligand of choice, comprising: (a) generating a library of vectors expressing a plurality of heterofunctional fusion proteins comprising (i) a binding domain encoded by a double stranded oligonucleotide comprising
unpredictable nucleotides in which the unpredictable nucleotides are arranged in one or more contiguous sequences, wherein the total number of unpredictable nucleotides is greater than or equal to about 60 and less than or equal to about 600 and the contiguous sequences are flanked by invariant residues designed to encode amino acids that confer a desired structure to the binding domain of the expressed
heterofunctional fusion protein, and, optionally, (ii) an effector domain encoded by an oligonucleotide sequence encoding a protein or peptide that enhances expression or detection of the binding domain; and (b) screening the library of vectors by contacting the plurality of heterofunctional fusion proteins with the ligand of choice under conditions conducive to ligand binding and isolating the heterofunctional fusion protein which binds to the ligand. Additionally, the methods of the invention further comprise determining the nucleotide sequence encoding the binding domain of the heterofunctional fusion protein identified to deduce the amino acid sequence of the binding domain. Most important, however, the present invention
determines the nucleotide sequence encoding the binding domain of the heterofunctional fusion protein identified to identify the syngene to encode said binding domain.
Once a suitable random peptide library has been constructed (or otherwise obtained), the library is screened to identify peptides having binding affinity for a ligand of choice. Screening the libraries can be accomplished by any of a variety of methods known to those of skill in the art. See, e.g., the following references, which disclose
screening of peptide libraries: Parmley and Smith, 1989, Adv. Exp. Med. Biol. 251:215-218; Scott and Smith, 1990, Science 249:386-390; Fowlkes et al., 1992; BioTechniques 13:422-427; Oldenburg et al., 1992, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:5393-5397; Yu et al., 1994, Cell 76:933-945; Staudt et al., 1988, Science 241:577-580; Bock et al., 1992, Nature
355:564-566; Tuerk et al., 1992, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:6988-6992; Ellington et al., 1992, Nature 355:850-852; U.S. Patent No. 5,096,815, U.S. Patent No. 5,223,409, and U.S. Patent No. 5,198,346, all to Ladner et al.; and Rebar and Pabo, 1993, Science
263:671-673.
If the libraries are expressed as fusion proteins with a cell surface molecule, then screening is advantageously achieved by contacting the vectors with an immobilized target ligand and harvesting those vectors that bind to said ligand. Such useful
screening methods, designated "panning" techniques are described in Fowlkes et al., 1992, BioTechniques
13:422-427. In panning methods useful to screen the libraries, the target ligand can be immobilized on plates, beads, such as magnetic beads, sepharose, etc., or on beads used in columns. In particular embodiments, the immobilized target ligand can be "tagged", e . g. , using such as biotin, 2-fluorochrome, e.g. for FACS sorting.
In one embodiment, presented by way of example but not limitation, screening a library of phage expressing random peptides on phage and phagemid vectors can be achieved as follows using magnetic beads. Target ligands are conjugated to magnetic beads, according to the instructions of the
manufacturers. To block non-specific binding to the beads, and any unreacted groups, the beads are
incubated with excess bovine serum albumin (BSA). The beads are then washed with numerous cycles of
suspension in phosphate buffered saline (PBS; 137 mM NaCl, 2.7 mM KCl, 4.3 mM Na2HPO4-7H2O, 1.4 mM KH2PO4, pH 7.3) with 0.05% Tween ® 20 and recovered with a strong magnet along the sides of a plastic tube. The beads are then stored with refrigeration, until needed.
In the screening experiments, an aliquot of a library is mixed with a sample of resuspended beads. The tube contents are tumbled at 4°C for 1-2 hrs. The magnetic beads are then recovered with a strong magnet and the liquid is removed by aspiration. The beads are then washed by adding PBS-0.05% Tween ® 20, inverting the tube several times to resuspend the beads, and then drawing the beads to the tube wall with the magnet. The contents are then removed and washing is repeated 5-10 additional times. 50 mM glycine-HCl (pH 2.0), 100 μg/ml BSA solution are added to the washed beads to denature proteins and release bound phage. After a short incubation time, the beads are pulled to the side of the tubes with a strong magnet and the liquid contents are then transferred to clean tubes. 1 M Tris-HCl (pH 7.5) or 1 M NaH2PO4 (pH 7) is added to the tubes to neutralize the pH of the phage sample. The phage are then diluted, e.g., 10° to 10-6, and aliquots plated with E. coli DH5αF' cells to determine the number of plaque forming units of the sample. In certain cases, the platings are done in the presence of XGal and IPTG for color discrimination of plaques (i.e., 2acZ+ plaques are blue, lacZ- plaques are white). The titer of the input samples is also determined for comparison (dilutions are
generally 10-6 to 10-9).
Alternatively, as yet another non-limiting example, screening a library of phage expressing random peptides can be achieved by panning using microtiter plates. Target ligand is diluted, e.g., in 100 mM NaHCO3, pH 8.5 and a small aliquot of ligand solution is adsorbed onto wells of microtiter plates (e.g. by incubation overnight at 4°C). An aliquot of BSA solution (1 mg/ml, in 100 mM NaHCO3, pH 8.5) is added and the plate incubated at room temperature for 1 hr. The contents of the microtiter plate are flicked out and the wells washed carefully with PBS- 0.05% Tween ® 20. The plates are washed free of unbound targets repeatedly. A small aliquot of phage solution is introduced into each well and the wells are incubated at room temperature for 1-2 hrs. The contents of microtiter plates are flicked out and washed repeatedly. The plates are incubated with wash solution in each well for 20 minutes at room
temperature to allow bound phage with rapid
dissociation constants to be released. The wells are then washed five more times to remove all unbound phage.
In a preferred method for recovering the phage bound to the wells, a pH change is used. An aliquot of 50 mM glycine-HCl (pH 2.0), 100 μg/ml BSA solution is added to the washed wells to denature proteins and release bound phage. After 10 minutes at 65°C, the contents are then transferred into clean tubes, and a small aliquot of 1 M Tris-HCl (pH 7.5) or IM NaH2PO4 (pH 7) is added to neutralize the pH of the phage sample. The phage are then diluted, e .g. , 10-3 to 10-6 and aliquots plated with E. coli DH5αF' cells to determine the number of the plaque forming units of the sample. In certain cases, the platings are done in the presence of XGal and IPTG for color
discrimination of plaques (i.e., lacZ+ plaques are blue, lacZ- plaques are white). The titer of the input samples is also determined for comparison
(dilutions are generally 10-6 to 10-9). Alternatively, to recover bound phage, a large volume, approximately 100 μl, of LB+ ampicillin is added to each well and the plate is incubated at 37°C for 2 hr. The bound cells undergo cell division in the rich culture medium and the daughter cells detach from the immobilized targets. The contents of the wells are then
transferred to a culture flask that contains ~10 ml LB + ampicillin. When the cells are at log-phase, inducer is added again to the culture to generate more of the encoded proteins. These cells are then
harvested by centrifugation and rescreened.
By way of another example, the libraries expressing random peptides as a surface protein of either a vector or a host cell, e.g., phage or
bacterial cell, can be screened by passing a solution of the library over a column, of a ligand immobilized to a solid matrix, such as sepharose, silica, etc., and recovering those phage that bind to the column after extensive washing and elution.
By way of yet another example, weak binding library members can be isolated based on retarded chromatographic properties. According to one mode of this embodiment for screening, fractions are collected as they come off the column, saving the trailing fractions (i.e., those members that are retarded in mobility relative to the peak fraction are saved). These members are then concentrated and passed over the column a second time, again saving the retarded fractions. Through successive rounds of
chromatography, it is possible to isolate those that have some affinity, albeit weak, to the immobilized ligand. These library members are retarded in their mobility because of the millions of possible ligand interactions as the member passes down the column. In addition, this methodology selects those members that have modest affinity to the target, and which also have a rapid dissociation time. If desired, the oligonucleotides encoding the binding domain selected in this manner can be mutagenized, expressed and rechromatographed (or screened by another method) to discover improved binding activity.
According to another example,
homobifunctional (e.g., DSP, DST, BSOCOES, EGS, DMS) or heterobifunctional (e.g., SPDP) cross-linking agents can be used in combination with any of the above methods, to promote capture of weak binding members; these cross-linkers should be reversible, with a treatment (i.e., exposure to thiols, base, periodate, hydroxylamine) gentle enough not to disrupt members structure or infectivity, to allow recovery of the library member. The elution reagents can be removed by dialysis (i.e., dialysis bag,
Centricon/Amicon microconcentrators).
According to another alternative method, screening a library of can be achieved using a method comprising a first "enrichment" step and a second filter lift step as follows.
Random peptides from an expressed library capable of binding to a given ligand ("positives") are initially enriched by one or two cycles of panning or affinity chromatography, as described above. The goal is to enrich the positives to a frequency of about > 1/105. Following enrichment, a filter lift assay is conducted. For example, approximately 1-2 x 105 phage, enriched for binders, are added to 500 μl of log phase E. coli and plated on a large LB-agarose plate with 0.7% agarose in broth. The agarose is allowed to solidify, and a nitrocellulose filter (e.g., 0.45 μ) is placed on the agarose surface. A series of
registration marks is made with a sterile needle to allow re-alignment of the filter and plate following development as described below. Phage plaques are allowed to develop by overnight incubation at 37 °C (the presence of the filter does not inhibit this process). The filter is then removed from the plate with phage from each individual plaque adhered in si tu . The filter is then exposed to a solution of BSA or other blocking agent for 1-2 hours to prevent nonspecific binding of the ligand (or "probe").
The probe itself is labeled, for example, either by biotinylation (using commercial NHS-biotin) or direct enzyme labeling, e.g., with horse radish peroxidase (HRP) or alkaline phosphatase. Probes labeled in this manner are indefinitely stable and can be re-used several times. The blocked filter is exposed to a solution of probe for several hours to allow the probe to bind in si tu to any phage on the filter displaying a peptide with significant affinity to the probe. The filter is then washed to remove unbound probe, and then developed by exposure to enzyme substrate solution (in the case of directly labeled probe) or further exposed to a solution of enzyme-labeled avidin (in the case of biotinylated probe). In a preferred method, an HRP-labeled probe is detected by ECL western blotting methods (Amersham, Arlington Heights, ID, which involves using luminol in the presence of phenol to yield enhanced
chemiluminescence detectable by brief exposure of film by autoradiography, in which the exposed areas of film correspond to positive plaques on the original plate. Where an enzyme substrate is used, positive phage plaques are identified by localized deposition of colored enzymatic cleavage product on the filter which corresponds to plaques on the original plate. The developed filter or film, as the case may be, is simply realigned with the plate using the registration marks, and the "positive" plaques are cored from the agarose to recover the phage. Because of the high density of plaques on the original plate, it is usually impossible to isolate a single plaque from the plate on the first pass. Accordingly, phage recovered from the initial core are re-plated at low density and the process is repeated to allow isolation of
individual plaques and hence single clones of phage.
Successful screening experiments are
optimally conducted using 3 rounds of serial
screening. The recovered cells are then plated at a low density to yield isolated colonies for individual analysis. The individual colonies are selected and used to inoculate LB culture medium containing
ampicillin. After overnight culture at 37ºC, the cultures are then spun down by centrifugation.
Individual cell aliquots are then retested for binding to the target ligand attached to a solid support.
Binding to other supports, having attached thereto a non-relevant ligand, can be used as a negative
control.
One important aspect of screening the libraries is that of elution. For clarity of
explanation, the following is discussed in terms of TSAR expression by phage; however, it is readily understood that such discussion is applicable to any system where the random peptide is expressed on a surface fusion molecule. It is conceivable that the conditions that disrupt the peptide-target
interactions during recovery of the phage are specific for every given peptide sequence from a plurality of proteins expressed on phage. For example, certain interactions may be disrupted by acid pH's but not by basic pH's, and vice versa . Thus, it may be desirable to test a variety of elution conditions (including but not limited to pH 2-3, pH 12-13, excess target in competition, detergents, mild protein denaturants, urea, varying temperature, light, presence or absence of metal ions, chelators, etc.) and compare the primary structures of the TSAR proteins expressed on the phage recovered for each set of conditions to determine the appropriate elution conditions for each ligand/TSAR combination. Some of these elution conditions may be incompatible with phage infection because they are bactericidal and will need to be removed by dialysis (i.e., dialysis bag,
Centricon/Amicon microconcentrators).
The ability of different expressed proteins to be eluted under different conditions may not only be due to the denaturation of the specific peptide region involved in binding to the target but also may be due to conformational changes in the flanking regions. These flanking sequences may also be
denatured in combination with the actual binding sequence; these flanking regions may also change their secondary or tertiary structure in response to
exposure to the elution conditions (i.e., pH 2-3, pH 12-13, excess target in competition, detergents, mild protein denaturants, urea, heat, cold, light, metal ions, chelators, etc.) which in turn leads to the conformational deformation of the peptide responsible for binding to the target.
According to another alternative method in which the TSARs contain a linker region between the binding domain and the effector domain, particular TSAR libraries can be prepared and screened by: (1) engineering a vector, preferably a phage vector, so that a DNA sequence encodes a segment of Factor Xa (or Factor Xa protease cleavable peptide) and is present adjacent to the gene encoding the effector domain, e.g., the pIII coat protein gene; (2) construct and assemble the double stranded synthetic
oligonucleotides as described above and insert into the engineered vector; (3) express the plurality of vectors in a suitable host to form a library of vectors; (4) screen for binding to an immobilized ligand; (5) wash away excess phage; and (6) treat the entire library with Factor Xa protease. The particle will be uncoupled from the peptide-ligand complex and can then be used to infect bacteria to regenerate the particle with its full-length pIII molecule for additional rounds of screening. This alternative embodiment advantageously allows the use of
universally effective elution conditions and thus allows identification of phage expressing TSARs that otherwise might not be recovered using other known methods for elution. To illustrate, using this embodiment, exceptionally tight binding TSARs could be recovered.
In a particular embodiment of the present invention, TSAR libraries are screened with
oligonucleotides to identify syngenes encoding binding domains specific for particular DNA sequences. When the library is screened against oligonucleotide targets, binding is done with high levels of salts, e.g., to maximize the hydrophobic interactions that are characteristic of specific protein/DNA
interactions and to minimize non-specific
interactions. Non-specific protein/DNA interactions are generally electrostatic and can be reduced by high salt concentrations that cause saturation of the charges on the protein and DNA.
5.2.1. SYNGENES THAT REGULATE TRANSCRIPTION
Syngene-encoded sequences that can be used to regulate transcription are identified by screening the desired random peptide library for binding to a ligand of choice, where the ligand of choice is (or comprises) a nucleic acid sequence (transcriptional regulatory site) that regulates transcription; a transcription factor that binds to a transcriptional regulatory site and thereby regulates transcription; or a protein binding partner of the transcription factor, which binds to the transcription factor and thereby inhibits the transcription factor's binding to the transcriptional regulatory site.
It is well known that all eukaryotic genes are regulated by proteins known as transcription factors. In general, for each gene, several factors are utilized to appropriately regulate the gene. A large subset of these factors bind directly to DNA sequences near the transcriptional start site of the gene. Most of the sites that bind a given
transcription factor have a great deal of similarity among themselves. The nucleotide sequences found in common among all the sites for a given factor are called that factor's "consensus sequence." For example, the consensus sequence for NF-IL6 (also known as C/EBP) is 5'T(T/G)NNGNAA(T/G)3' (SEQ ID NO: 59) (Zhang et al., 1994, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA
91:2225-2229). The consensus sequence for NF-κB is 5'GGGRNNYYCC (SEQ ID NO: 60) (Okamoto et al., 1993, J. Biol. Chem. 269:8582-8589). The consensus sequence for GATA-1, GATA-2, and GATA-3 is 5' (T/A) GATA(G/A) (Zon et al., 1991, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA
88:10642-10646).
In addition, certain transcription factors are not single proteins, but are multimers composed of the products of different genes. For instance, the AP-1 transcription site is activated by heterodimers of c-jun and c-fos. Moreover, there are several members of the c-jun family. For the NF-κB family, the transcriptional activator may be composed of either homo- or heterodimers of members of the NF-κB family, including p65 (also known as Rel A) and p50. Different NF-κB sites may be activated preferentially by different combinations of p65 and/or p50 (Muroi et al., 1993, J. Biol. Chem. 268:19534-19539; Zabel et al., 1991, J. Biol. Chem. 266:252-260; Baldwin and Sharp, 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85:723-727; Nakayama, et al., 1992, Mol. Cell. Biol 12:1736-1746; Fujita et al., 1992, Genes and Development 6:775-787). Thus, different genes may be regulated differentially by specific combinations of transcription factor homologs.
The activity of some transcription factors is regulated by proteins that bind to arid thus inhibit the factor's activity. For example, the activity of NF-κB can be inhibited by binding to the protein IF-κB (Kerr et al., 1992, Current Opin. Cell. Biol. 4:496- 501). The activity of the AP-1 transcription factor can be inhibited by binding of the factor IP-1 (Auwerx and Sassone-Corsi, 1991, Cell 64:983-993). Often, as in the case of IF-κB, the inhibitory protein is located in the cytoplasm, where its binding to the transcription factor sequesters that factor away from the nucleus, thus preventing the factor from
activating transcription. Other transcription factors that can be found in the cytoplasm, presumably in inactive form, include: the glucocorticoid receptor, the yeast transcription factor SW15, and NF-AT (a transcription factor for certain lymphokines and cytokines).
Alternative splicing may give rise to several versions of a transcription factor. Some of these versions may inhibit rather than activate transcription, and the interaction of different versions of the same factor may produce a complex pattern of regulation (Foulkes and Sassone-Corsi, 1992, Cell 68:411-414). A given gene may be regulated by one or more different transcription factors in a tissue or cell type specific manner. For instance, it has been demonstrated that at least three cis-elements (AP-1, C/EBP (also known as NF-IL6) and NF-κB-like sites) are involved in IL-8 gene activation (Okamoto et al., 1994, J. Biol. Chem. 269:8582-8589; Mukaida et al.,
1990, J. Biol. Chem. 265:21128-21133; Mahe et al.,
1991, J. Biol. Chem. 266:13759-13763; Yasumoto et al., 1992, J. Biol. Chem. 267:22506-22511). It was
concluded that the relative importance of the 3 elements varied in a cell type-specific manner. In the human fibrosarcoma cell line 8387, the C/EBP and NF-κB sites are essential, but the AP-1 site is not (Mukaida et al., 1990, J. Biol. Chem. 265:21128-21133; Mahe et al., 1991, J. Biol. Chem. 266:13759-13763). In contrast, in MKN-45 cells, derived from human gastric cancer, the AP-1 and NF-κB sites are
important, but the C/EBP site is unnecessary (Yasumoto et al., 1992, J. Biol. Chem. 267:22506-22511).
Transcription factors have been shown to be modular proteins. That is, they are composed of more or less discrete domains that perform more or less discrete functions. For example, most transcription factors possess a DNA binding domain that mediates binding to a transcriptional regulatory site. Also common are transcriptional activator signals (TASs). T Ss are domains that, when bound to a transcriptional regulatory site of a gene (by virtue of being linked to a DNA binding domain), mediate the transcriptional activation of the gene. Another common domain found in transcription factors is a domain that permits the dimerization of the factor. The dimerization is sometimes homodimerization, sometimes
heterodimerization. An example of such a dimerization domain would be a leucine zipper or a helix-loop-helix domain. NF-κB is a transcription factor that is a heterodimer consisting of p50 and p65 subunits
(Lenardo and Baltimore, 1989, Cell 58:227-229;
Baeuerle, 1991, Biochem. Biophys. Acta 1072:63-80). IF-κB (or IκB) is a cytoplasmic protein that binds to and specifically inhibits NF-κB (Baeuerle and
Baltimore, 1988, Science 242:540-546; Baeuerle &
Baltimore, 1989, Genes & Dev. 3:1689-1698). Free NF- κB migrates to the nucleus where it binds to the κB site in the enhancer/promoter of various genes, such as the T cell receptor β chain, interleukin-2 receptor a chain, myosin heavy chain class I, and cytokine genes such as those for beta-interferon, GM-colony stimulating factor (CSF), G-CSF, interleukin-2, and tumor necrosis factor-αr and -β, thereby regulating their expression (Lenardo and Baltimore, 1989, Cell 58:227-229; Baeuerle, 1991, Biochem. Biophys. Acta 1072:63-80).
Binding sites for the transcription factors NF-κB and NF-IL6 have been shown to be important in the regulation of a wide variety of genes that are involved in health and disease. For example, it has been suggested that derangements in the control of expression of the IL-8 gene may be involved in the pathogenesis of several inflammatory diseases (Okamoto et al., 1994, J. Biol. Chem. 269:8582-8589). An NF-κB binding site in the promoter of the IL-8 gene has been shown to be involved in the transcriptional control of the IL-8 gene (id. ) . The same NF-κB site has been shown to be one of the targets through which the immunosuppressant FK506 acts ( id. ) . The ability to regulate this site through the use of syngenes
encoding highly specific DNA binding domains that bind to the site would be of great use in the management of those inflammatory disease in which IL-8 is involved.
The GATA family of transcription factors are a group of zinc finger DNA binding proteins that recognize related binding sites that contain the core sequence GATA. The known members of this family are GATA-1, GATA-2, GATA-3, GATA-GTl, and GATA-GT2 (Zon et al., 1991, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 88:10642-10646; Maeda, 1994, J. Biochem. 115:6-14). GATA-1, GATA-2, and GATA-3 are expressed primarily in hematopoietic tissues such as the erythroid, megakaryocyte, T cell, and mast cell lineages. Gene knockout studies have shown that GATA-1 is required for erythroid
development in mice (Pevny et al., 1991, Nature
349:257-260). GATA-2 is found in non-hematopoietic cells such as brain, liver, and endothelial cells (Dorfman et al., 1992, J. Biol. Chem. 267:1279-1285).
GATA-GTl and GATA-GT2 are found in gastric parietal cells. They bind to a sequence motif in the 5' upstream regions of both the H+/K+-ATPase α and β subunit genes. GATA-GTl and GATA-GT2 may be involved in gastric specific transcriptional regulation of many proteins (Maeda, 1994, J. Biochem. 115:6-14).
The Ets family of transcription factors includes at least 30 different DNA binding proteins in species as evolutionarily distant as Drosophila and humans. These proteins show pronounced amino acid sequence similarities in an approximately 84 amino acid region that corresponds to their DNA binding domains. They recognize distinct but related DNA binding sites that are about ten nucleotides long and that share a common, short motif - (C/A)GGA(A/T). The specificity of binding of the individual Ets proteins is determined mainly by the other nucleotides in the binding site.
Numerous genes have been shown to possess functional Ets binding sites in their promoters
(Waslyk, 1993, Eur. J. Biochem. 211:7-18). One particularly interesting example of such a gene is the T cell antigen receptor α chain gene (TCRc.). It has been shown that mutation of this Ets binding site abolishes the transcription of a transfected TCRor gene in the Jurkat T cell line. It has also been shown that this site binds the product of the Ets-1 proto- oncogene (Ho et al., 1990, Science 250:814-818). Ets- 1 expression is developmentally regulated in parallel with the expression of the TCRor gene, leading to speculation that Ets-1 is the controlling factor in TCRcf expression (Leiden, 1993, Ann. Rev. Immunol.
11:539-570.
5.2.1.1. SYNGENES ENCODING PROTEINS
THAT BIND TO DNA SEQUENCES THAT REGULATE TRANSCRIPTION
In one embodiment, the invention involves the identification of syngene-encoded peptide
sequences that bind to nucleic acid sequences that regulate (promote or alternatively inhibit)
transcription (such nucleic acid sequences being collectively referred to as transcriptional regulatory sites). Such transcriptional regulatory sites are preferably those situated in vivo in or near the sequence of a preselected gene, the product of which is involved in health or disease. In a specific embodiment, the transcriptional regulatory site is a sequence recognized by a transcription factor.
Oligonucleotides containing those transcriptional regulatory sites are synthesized and are used to screen a random peptide library. In this way, peptides are found that specifically bind the transcriptional regulatory sites. In addition, by screening against the appropriate transcriptional regulatory sites, a synthetic binding domain can be identified that specifically regulates the transcription of one or more genes of choice, but not of all the genes whose transcription is regulated by a natural transcription factor which recognizes the same transcriptional regulatory site as does the syngene-encoded binding domain. Such a binding domain, that specifically regulates one or more but not all of a family of transcriptional regulatory sites (a family referring to those transcriptional regulatory sites regulated by an identical natural transcription factor), is
referred to herein as a highly specific DNA binding domain (HSDB). HSDBs encoded by syngenes are useful in enhancing or repressing the transcriptional
activity of only one or a selected number of a
preselected class of genes.
Since the specific nucleotide sequence for a particular example of a given transcriptional
regulatory site is often unique, or nearly so, the invention provides for the isolation of HSDBs that bind specifically to a particular transcriptional regulatory site within or near a particular gene. In a specific embodiment, a syngene product is targeted to the nucleus of a cell via a nuclear localization signal (NLS) where it binds to a specific
transcriptional regulatory site within a gene whose activity it is desired to regulate for therapeutic reasons. Such binding interferes with the binding of a natural transcription factor to that site and thus blocks the transcription of the preselected gene. The syngene product in this case would not contain a transcription activating signal (TAS).
In a similar fashion, it is possible to incorporate a TAS into the syngene product plus NLS. This will target the TAS to a transcriptional
regulatory site of a particular preselected gene within a cell and thus activate that gene selectively. The site at which the syngene product binds could be a site that is naturally involved in the activation of the transcription of the preselected gene.
Alternatively, the site could be a site that is not naturally involved in the transcriptional regulation of the gene. The invention encompasses a method for functionally identifying protein structural domains that can be combined with other functional domains to effect the production of a unique, non-naturally occurring protein that can act at specific cis-acting negative or positive transcriptional regulatory sites within eukaryotic cells. The invention is further directed to the syngenes encoding such a protein as well as to the uses of such a syngene. This invention in a particularly preferred embodiment is directed to the repression and activation of genes regulated, at least in part, by the transcriptional factors NF-κB and NF-IL6 (also known as C/EBP). In particular, this embodiment is directed to the genes for IL-6 and IL-8, whose products are cytokines that respond to different inflammatory signals and are regulated by both NF-κB and NF-IL6. In addition, regulation of the gene for the HLA class I locus, which responds to NF-κB, but not NF-IL6, is a subject of this invention.
In a preferred embodiment, the
transcriptional regulatory site in the vicinity of a preselected gene to which the encoded syngene product binds (either for the purpose of activating or
repressing transcription of the preselected gene) is an NF-κB site (see Table 6, below). In another preferred embodiment, the site to which the encoded syngene peptide binds is an NF-IL6 site.
In another method of regulating
transcription, the encoded syngene product binds to a protein that is a transcriptional regulator (i.e. that binds to DNA and regulates transcription). For example, the encoded syngene product can bind to the NF-κB protein and thereby prevent the NF-κB protein from activating transcription.
In another method of activating
transcription, the encoded syngene product need not be localized to the nucleus. In this method, the product of the syngene functions in the cytoplasm where it binds to an endogenous binding partner of a
transcriptional regulator . In one embodiment , the syngene product activates transcription of a
preselected gene by binding to a transcription factor inhibitor that is involved in the inhibition of transcription of the preselected gene. By way of example, such a transcription factor inhibitor is IF- κB.
In a preferred aspect of the invention, the syngenes encode a binding domain that is highly specific for the DNA binding site of a transcription factor. Such syngenes encode proteins containing HSDBs that are identified by screening a random peptide library for binding to a target ligand, in which the ligand is a nucleic acid that contains a binding site recognized by the transcription factor. HSDBs will show greater specificity for a given transcription factor binding site than does the natural transcription factor that binds to that site. An HSDB selectively binds a single or limited examples of a given transcription factor's binding site from a single gene or a limited number of genes, whereas the natural transcription factor will bind to sites in additional genes.
Transcription factor binding sites are known for a very large number of genes and are suitable for use as target ligands. For example, the following tables represent examples of known transcription factors and their respective binding sites that can be used in the methods of the present invention to isolate binding domains specific for those factors or sites. Sequences encoding such binding domains could be built into syngene constructs that would be useful for the modulation of the activity of genes whose transcription is dependent upon the binding of
transcription factors to those sites.
Figure imgf000076_0001
Figure imgf000077_0001
For example, Table 1 shows that a DNA binding site for the Ets-like transcription factor Fli-1 is present in the promoter of the c-myc proto- oncogene. C-myc has been shown to be involved in the development of a wide variety of cancers (Marcu et al., 1992, Ann. Rev. Biochem. 61:809-860; Cole, 1986, Ann. Rev. Genet. 20:361-384). The ability to inhibit the activity of c-myc would be expected to have utility in the treatment of those cancers in which c- myc is upregulated.
Figure imgf000078_0001
Table 2 gives the DNA sequences recognized by several ubiquitous transcription factors. Such ubiquitous transcription factor binding sites are ideal subjects for use as targets to select highly specific binding domains for incorporation into syngenes. This is because these factors regulate a wide variety of genes in many cell types. Using the methods of the present invention as disclosed in
Section 6.1 and its subsections, one can obtain syngenes that encode products that are able to
selectively bind to a particular binding site of a ubiquitous transcription factor in a particular gene. This allows for the regulation of that particular gene without disturbing the regulation of the many other genes that also contain DNA binding sites for the ubiquitous transcription factor.
Figure imgf000080_0001
Figure imgf000081_0001
Figure imgf000082_0001
Table 3 shows a number of transcription factors, the DNA sequences they bind to, and the genes they regulate during T cell development and
activation. These DNA sequences are attractive targets for use in obtaining highly specific DNA binding domains that recognize them. Because of the well known crucial role that T cells play in the immune system, syngenes that encode products that are able to regulate the activity of the genes listed in Table 3 would be expected to have a variety of uses in the treatment of disease.
Figure imgf000084_0001
Figure imgf000085_0001
Table 4 shows a number of transcription factors that could be used as targets to obtain syngenes that encode products that would be useful in regulating the T cell receptor.
Figure imgf000086_0001
Figure imgf000087_0001
Table 5 shows a large number of known Ets family transcription factor binding sites. Among the genes listed in Table 5, genes such as fos (involved in growth control) and interleukin-2 (involved in the control of the immune system) are attractive
candidates for regulation by syngene products.
Examples of NF-κB sites which are suitable for use as a ligand of choice are shown in Table 6 (see Muroi et al., 1993, J. Biol. Chem.
268:19534-19539; Lenardo and Baltimore, 1989, Cell 58:227-229).
Figure imgf000087_0002
Figure imgf000088_0001
For those genes of interest for which transcription factor binding sites are not known, as in the case, for example, of a newly discovered gene, well known methods will allow the determination of transcription factor binding sites that are involved in the regulation of the gene. Such methods include, for example, comparing the DNA sequences in the 5' region of the gene to the sequences of known
transcription factor binding sites, gel shift assays to determine if known transcription factors bind to potential transcription factor binding sites in the gene, and mutagenesis of a suspected binding site followed by assays to determine if the expression of the mutagenized gene has been affected by the
mutagenesis.
In an alternative embodiment of the invention, the molecule comprising the transcriptional regulatory site that constitutes the ligand of choice used to screen the random peptide library is a site that is not known to be bound by a protein transcription factor, but which is situated close to (e.g., within 50 nucleotides of) the initiation site of the gene, and which has the ability to regulate transcription of such gene upon binding by a syngene-encoded product. Such a syngene-encoded product would be expected to sterically hinder the ordered process of transcription factor and RNA polymerase binding to this region of the gene that is necessary for transcription to occur. 5.2.1.2. SYNGENES FOR REGULATION OF
TRANSCRIPTION FACTORS AND TRANSCRIPTION FACTOR INHIBITORS
The invention provides a method for identifying a syngene that encodes a protein that binds to a ligand of interest comprising screening a random synthetic peptide library to identify a peptide that binds to a ligand of interest, in which the ligand is (1) a DNA region that functions to regulate transcription; (2) a protein that is a transcriptional regulator that functions by binding to DNA; or (3) a protein modulator that binds to and inactivates the function of a protein transcriptional regulator. In cases such as that of NF-κB and IF-κB (Kerr et al., 1992, Current Opinion in Cell Biology 4:496-501) or of AP-1 and IP-1 (Auwerx and Sassone- Corsi, 1991, Cell 64:983-993), the existence of a transcription factor and an inhibitor of that
transcription factor affords the opportunity for regulating the transcription of genes that depend upon the transcription factor for their activity. This can be done by developing syngenes that encode binding domains that are specific for either the transcription factor or its inhibitor.
If a random peptide library is screened with a transcription factor as a ligand, binding domains (and their encoding nucleic acids) will be identified that are capable of specifically binding the
transcription factor. In that respect, such binding domains mimic transcription factor inhibitors. Such binding domains can function as inhibitors of
transcription in much the same way as the natural transcription factor inhibitors do. If such a binding domain were built into a syngene-encoded product lacking a nuclear localization signal, the syngene product encoding such a binding domain would be expected to be found predominantly in the cytoplasm where it would be able to sequester the transcription factor away from the nucleus, thus nullifying the transcription factor's activity. However, it is envisioned that such inhibition can also occur in the nucleus, e.g., if a nuclear localization signal were employed as part of the encoded syngene product.
For example, if the library were screened with the protein NF-κB, binding domains would be identified that could function, when part of a syngene-encoded product, much in the way IF-κB
functions. Likewise, when a library is screened with either c-fos or c-jun (the subunits of AP-1), binding domains would be identified that could be used to create IP-1-like peptides encoded by syngenes.
If random peptide libraries were screened with transcription factor inhibitors according to the invention, binding domains would be identified that, when expressed from a syngene, would bind to the inhibitor, thus preventing it from binding to the transcription factor. This would free the
transcription factor, allowing it to migrate into the nucleus and activate transcription. In this way, syngenes encoding binding domains specific for
transcription factor inhibitors could be used as activators of transcription. 5.2.2. SYNGENES FOR REGULATION OF APOPTOSIS
Syngenes may be used to control apoptosis. Apoptosis, the process of programmed cell death, is seen in a wide range of organisms where it is involved in the development of the nervous system, the
remodeling of limb buds, the destruction of virally infected cells, the clonal deletion of B and T cells in the immune system, and many other processes.
Programmed cell death thus appears to be a normal part of development and physiology. For reviews, see Kerr et al., 1972, Br. J. Cancer 26:239-257; Wyllie et al., 1980, Int. Rev. Cytol. 68:251-306; Raff, 1992, Nature 356:397-400; Vaux, 1993, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:786-789.
Since apoptosis is a normal and important part of many different biological processes, it is important for the health of an organism that apoptosis be properly regulated. It appears that some instances of disease can arise as a result of improper
regulation of cell death. For example, Alzheimer's and Parkinson's diseases are associated with the premature death of certain neurons (Jenner, 1989, J. Neurol. Neurosurg. Psychiatry 22-28; Kosik, 1992, Science 256:780-783); inhibition of programmed cell death may be involved in autoimmune disease
(Goldstein, et al., 1991, Immunol. Rev. 121:29-65; Watanabe et al., 1992, Nature 356:314-317; Strasser et al., 1991, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 88:8661-8665); and failure of cell death may be involved in cancer (Korsmeyer, 1992, Blood 80:879-886). Given the importance of apoptosis in health and disease, it would be of great value to have a method of regulating apoptosis.
There appears to be a family of related proteins involved in the control of apoptosis in mammalian cells. The two best-studied members of this family are bcl-2 and bax. Bcl-2 was first identified as a gene on human chromosome 18 that was involved in the t(14;18) chromosomal translocations observed in follicular B-cell lymphomas (Tsujimoto et al., 1985, Science 229:1390-1393; Bakhshi et al., 1985, Cell 41:899-906; Cleary and Sklar, 1985, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 82:7439-7449).
Together, bcl-2 and bax proteins control the process of apoptosis in response to various stimuli. It has been postulated that the ratio of bcl-2 to bax determines whether a cell will initiate the program of apoptosis in response to apoptotic stimuli or will ignore such stimuli and continue to grow, or at least survive (Oltvai et al., 1993, Cell 74:609-619). A high ratio of bcl-2 to bax leads to survival; a low ratio to death. The interaction of bcl-2 and bax is thought to depend on the formation of heterodimers of the proteins encoded by these two genes . A study in which mutations were engineered in two domains of bcl- 2 found a correlation between the mutant bcl-2
proteins' ability to heterodimerize with bax and the mutant proteins' ability to prevent apoptosis (Yin et al., 1994, Nature 369:321-323). The two domains in the human bcl-2 protein that appear to interact with bax are amino acids 136- 156 and amino acids 187-202 (ibid. ) . By using one of these two domains as a ligand to screen a random peptide library, it should be possible to isolate binding domains that are specific for the bcl-2 protein. These binding domains could be used to make syngenes that would be useful in controlling the process of apoptosis. Alternatively, it is possible to use other regions of the bcl-2 protein, or even the entire protein, to find binding domains that are specific for the bcl-2 protein. Such binding domains could also be used to make syngenes that would be useful in the control of apoptosis. Likewise, one could screen a random peptide library with the bax protein to find binding domains specific for bax.
These binding domains would also be useful in making syngenes for use in regulating apoptosis.
As an alternative way of regulating apoptosis, one could also regulate the transcription of either bcl-2 or bax by the use of syngenes directed to a transcription factor binding site that is
involved in the regulation of the transcription of those genes. The methods described herein for the use of syngenes to regulate transcription could be easily adapted to regulate the transcription of the bcl-2 gene or the bax gene.
5.2.3. OTHER TARGETS FOR SYNGENE PRODUCTS
Although a preferred embodiment of the invention is directed to syngenes whose products bind to transcriptional regulatory sites, other embodiments of the invention encompass a plethora of uses. In particular, it should be emphasized that syngene products are in no way restricted to functioning solely in the nucleus. As discussed below, syngenes are useful for regulating activities that take place in the cytoplasm, or on the cell's surface, as well.
A syngene product may have one or more of a variety of functional properties. Its product may be a signal transduction inhibitor. Such a signal transduction inhibitor would block the activity of a signal pathway such as that which leads from a cell membrane receptor through various intermediate kinases, phosphatases or other molecules to the nucleus, where transcription of particular genes is affected. An example of such a signal transduction inhibiting syngene would be a syngene the product of which binds to and blocks the function of a tyrosine kinase membrane receptor. Other types of signalling molecules may also be targets of the syngenes of the invention. Examples of such signalling molecules are cytoplasmic kinases (for example, src or raf), adenylyl cyclases, guanylyl cyclases and the like.
Many of the proteins that participate in signalling possess SH2 and/or SH3 domains. These SH2 and SH3 domains are involved in protein/protein interactions that are important for the signalling process (Anderson et al., 1990, Science 250:979-982). It may be that syngenes that encode a protein having binding domains specific for SH2 and/or SH3 domains will be especially useful for regulating the various signalling pathways of cells.
In another embodiment, the syngenes, via expression of their encoded proteins, can be used to block or down-regulate the translation of a specific mRNA. Alternatively, the syngene can be used to stabilize or destabilize a specific RNA. In each of the aforementioned cases, the syngene encodes a protein that incorporates a binding domain that has been selected for binding to a portion of the RNA sequence that is to be down-regulated, stabilized or destabilized. In another embodiment, a syngene is created whose product mimics the structure of a known hormone receptor but that has a different DNA binding site from that of the known hormone receptor. The DNA binding site of the known hormone receptor is replaced with a HSDB directed against a DNA binding site that represents a transcriptional regulatory site of a preselected gene. The effect of the use of such a syngene is that the syngene product (which mimics the hormone receptor) allows the preselected gene to be regulated by the hormone. The hormone binds to the syngene product and the syngene product-hormone complex is translocated to the nucleus of a cell where it binds to the transcriptional regulatory site of the preselected gene, thus activating or repressing the gene.
Syngenes encoding binding domains directed to cyclins or cyclin dependent kinases can be used to inhibit the progression of cells through the cell cycle. Syngene products containing binding domains directed to DNA polymerases and associated factors involved in DNA replication can be used to stop or retard DNA synthesis, thus stopping or retarding cell division.
Another potential target for syngene
products of the present invention is the cellular trafficking machinery that directs or sorts proteins, for example, into the Golgi and to their final
destinations. The proper subcellular localization of many proteins depends on short amino acid sequences present in the proteins. For example, the
tetrapeptide KDEL (SEQ ID NO: 116) targets proteins to the lumen of the endoplasmic reticulum. The
tetrapeptide YQRL (SEQ ID NO: 117), found in the membrane protein TGN38 of the trans Golgi network, has been demonstrated to be necessary and sufficient to target membrane proteins to the trans Golgi (Luzio and Banting, 1993, Trends in Biochem. Sci. 18:395-398) . Such peptide targeting sequences are appropriate ligands for use in isolating binding domains for incorporation into syngenes.
Syngenes can also be useful in regulating the interactions of cells with the extracellular matrix. Such interactions depend on binding between the components of the matrix and receptors on the surface of cells. One of the most important
components in certain types of matrices is the protein laminin. By interacting with specific receptors on the surface of cells, laminin serves as a bridge between the cells and the matrix (Martin and Timpl,
1987, Ann. Rev. Cell Biol. 5:57-85).
The interaction between laminin and its receptor has been demonstrated to be important in the migration of axons and dendrites of neurons. The axons and dendrites, guided by the specific
interaction between laminin in the extracellular matrix and laminin receptors on the cell surfaces of the neurons, migrate along extracellular matrix pathways to their destinations (Bray and Hollenbeck,
1988, Ann. Rev. Cell Biol. 4:43-61).
By screening a random peptide library for binding domains that are specific for laminin or its receptor, it is possible to isolate binding domains that can be incorporated into the peptides encoded by syngenes that are useful in modulating the process of axonal or dendrite migration as well as other
processes that depend on the interaction between laminin and its receptor.
The regulation of the intracellular movement of membranes and their contents in mammalian cells is another area where syngenes may be employed. At least seven classes of GTPases are thought to be involved in such membrane transport processes as movement of membrane vesicles from the endoplasmic reticulum (ER) through the Golgi to the plasma
membrane (or to intracellular organelles) and
endocytosis. The seven classes of GTPases are:
(1) Sar proteins
(2) Arf proteins
(3) Rab proteins
(4) Rac proteins
(5) Rho proteins
(6) heterotrimeric G proteins
(7) dynamin
All of these proteins have the ability to bind GDP or GTP. They cycle between a state in which they are bound to GDP and a state in which they are bound to GTP. Whether they are bound to GDP or GTP determines how these proteins will function with the general rule being that they are inactive when bound to GDP and active when bound to GTP.
Sar proteins are believed to be involved in membrane vesicle budding from the ER and transport of the budded vesicles to the Golgi. A postulated mechanism envisions Sar proteins in their GDP-bound form interacting with a specific receptor on the transitional elements of the ER. Transitional
elements are specialized sites for the export of newly synthesized proteins from the ER. This is followed by the binding of four other proteins (Sec 13, Sec 24, Sec 25, and a 105 kd protein) to the bound Sar to form a nascent vesicle. The nascent vesicle then buds off the ER in a process accompanied by the exchange of the bound GDP for GTP. This exchange is catalyzed by a
Sar specific guanine nucleotide exchange factor (GEF). The budded vesicle then moves to the Golgi where it fuses with the membrane of the cis Golgi network in a process that is dependent upon the hydrolysis of the bound GTP to GDP. This hydrolysis is catalyzed by a Sar specific GTPase activating protein (GAP). See Figure 2A of Nuoffer and Balch, 1994, Ann. Rev.
Biochem. 63:949-990.
Arf proteins are believed to function in a manner similar to Sar proteins. But, whereas Sar proteins are involved in vesicle budding and transport between the ER and the Golgi, Arf proteins are thought to mediate transport between compartments of the
Golgi. The mechanism of action of Arf is thought to involve binding of Arf (in its GDP-bound state) to a specific receptor on the membrane of a Golgi vesicle. This is followed by binding to Arf of coat proteins in a process that is dependent upon exchange of the bound GDP for GTP. This exchange is catalyzed by an Arf specific GEF. Movement of the vesicle between Golgi compartments then occurs, followed by docking of the vesicle at its target membrane in the Golgi. Finally, fusion of the vesicle with its target occurs in a process driven by hydrolysis of the bound GTP. This hydrolysis is catalyzed by an Arf specific GAP. See Figure 2B of Nuoffer and Balch, 1994, Ann. Rev.
Biochem. 63:949-990.
Sar proteins, Arf proteins, and their associated GEFs and GAPs are suitable targets for the action of syngenes. A random peptide library could be screened for binding domains that are specific for these proteins. Such binding domains could be
incorporated into the peptides encoded by syngenes that would be useful for regulating membrane traffic from the ER to the Golgi.
In contrast to Sar and Arf, dynamin does not seem to be involved in transport of membrane vesicles from the ER to the Golgi. Instead, dynamin seems to participate in the receptor mediated endocytotic pathway involving clathrin-coated vesicles. Mutants of dynamin that are unable to bind or hydrolyze GTP block receptor mediated endocytosis in mammalian cells (van der Bliek et al., 1993, J. Cell Biol. 122:553- 563; Herskovits et al., 1993, J. Cell Biol. 122: 565- 578). It has been proposed that dynamin may be involved in the rapid endocytosis of synaptic vesicles after exocytosis in nerve terminals (Robinson, et al., 1993, Nature 365:163-166). Syngenes containing binding domains specific for dynamin could be used to regulate the process of endocytosis.
Rab proteins are a large class of proteins (more than 30 members have been discovered in
mammalian cells alone) that are involved in membrane trafficking. It has been possible to implicate specific members of the Rab class in specific aspects of membrane movement. For example, much evidence indicates that Rab 1 is involved in the early phases of the secretory pathway such as vesicle budding from the ER and vesicle movement from the ER to the cis Golgi (Peter et al., 1993, J. Cell Biol. 122:1155- 1168; Plutner et al., 1991, J. Cell Biol. 115:31-43; Tisdale et al., 1992, J. Cell Biol. 119:749-761;
Plutner, et al., 1990, EMBO J. 10:785-792). Mutated Rab 2 proteins have been shown to be trans dominant inhibitors of membrane transport from the ER to the Golgi (Tisdale et al., 1992, J. Cell Biol. 119:749- 761) . Rab 6 is found in a complex with a 62 kd protein in the membranes of the trans Golgi network. Antibodies to Rab 6 (or to the 62 kd protein)
inhibited the budding of vesicles from the trans Golgi to the plasma membrane, suggesting that Rab 6 may be involved in this process (Jones et al., 1993, J. Cell Biol. 122:775-788). As Section 6.1 and its
subsections show, by using the methods of the present invention, one can isolate binding domains that can distinguish between closely related ligands. One can then incorporate those binding domains into syngenes. In this way, it should be possible to make syngenes containing binding domains that are specific for a single member of the Rab family. These syngenes can then be used to modulate those aspects of membrane trafficking in which that member participates without affecting other aspects.
Evidence supports the involvement of
heterotrimeric G proteins in some aspects of membrane trafficking. For example, agonists and antagonists of Gα (one of the subunits of heterotrimeric G proteins) have been shown to affect export from the ER
(Schwaninger et al., 1992, J. Cell Biol. 119:1077- 1096). In PC12 and MDCK cells, Gαi inhibits membrane budding from the trans Golgi while Gαs promotes budding (Leyte et al., 1992, Trends Cell Biol. 2:91-94;
Pimplikar and Simons, 1993, Nature 362:456-458; Barr, et al., 1991, FEBS Lett. 294:239-243). Syngenes containing binding domains specific for the above- mentioned heterotrimeric G proteins would be useful in regulating these aspects of membrane movement.
5.3. IDENTIFICATION OF SYNTHETIC
SEQUENCES WHICH MEDIATE BINDING
When a peptide from a random peptide library has been identified as a binder for a particular target ligand of interest according to the methods of the invention, it may be useful to determine what region (s) of the expressed peptide sequence is (are) responsible for binding to the target ligand. Such analysis can be conducted at two different levels, i.e., the nucleotide sequence and amino acid sequence levels.
By molecular biological techniques it is possible to verify and further analyze a ligand binding peptide at the level of the oligonucleotides. First, the inserted oligonucleotides can be cleaved using appropriate restriction enzymes and religated into the original expression vector and the expression product of such vector screened for ligand binding to identify the oligonucleotides that encode the binding region of the peptide. Second, the oligonucleotides can be transferred into another vector, e.g., from phage to phagemid or to p340-lD or to pLamB plasmid. The newly expressed fusion proteins should acquire the same binding activity if the domain is necessary and sufficient for binding to the ligand. This last approach also assesses whether or not flanking amino acid residues encoded by the original vector (i.e., fusion partner) influence peptide binding in any fashion. Third, the oligonucleotides can be
synthesized, based on the nucleotide sequence
determined for the syngene in the library that encodes the binding peptide, amplified by cloning or PCR amplification using internal and flanking primers cleaved into two pieces and cloned as two half-syngene fragments. In the foregoing manner, the inserted oligonucleotides are subdivided into two equal halves. If the peptide domain important for binding is small, then one recombinant clone would demonstrate binding and the other would not. If neither have binding, then either both are important or the essential portion of the domain spans the middle (which can be tested by expressing just the central region).
Alternatively, by synthesizing peptides corresponding to the deduced sequence of the binding peptide, the binding domains can be analyzed. First, the entire peptide should be synthesized and assessed for binding to the target ligand to verify that the peptide is necessary and sufficient for binding.
Second, short peptide fragments, for example,
overlapping 10-mers, can be synthesized, based on the amino acid sequence of the random peptide binding domain, and tested to identify those binding the ligand.
In addition, in certain instances, linear motifs may become apparent after comparing the primary structures of different binding peptides from the library having binding affinity for a target ligand. The contribution of these motifs to binding can be verified with synthesized peptides in competition experiments (i.e., determine the concentration of peptide capable of inhibiting 50% of the binding of the phage to its target; IC50). Conversely, the motif or any region suspected to be important for binding can be removed from or mutated within the DNA encoding the random peptide insert and the altered displayed peptide can be retested for binding.
Furthermore, once the binding domain of a random peptide has been identified, differently displayed binding domains can be created by isolating and fusing the binding domain of one random peptide to a new effector domain. The biologically or chemically active effector domain of the peptide can thus be varied. Alternatively, the binding characteristics of an individual peptide can be modified by varying the binding domain sequence to produce a related family of peptides with differing properties for a specific ligand.
Moreover, in a method of directed evolution, the identified random peptides can be improved by additional rounds of random mutagenesis, selection, and amplification of the nucleotide sequences encoding the binding domains. Mutagenesis can be accomplished by creating and cloning a new set of oligonucleotides that differ slightly from the parent sequence, e.g., by 1-10%. Selection and amplification are achieved as described above. By way of example, to verify that the isolated peptides have improved binding
characteristics, mutants and the parent phage,
differing in their lacZ expression, can be processed together during the screening experiments. Alteration of the original blue-white color ratios during the course of the screening experiment will serve as a visual means to assess the successful selection of enhanced binders. This process can go through
numerous cycles.
5.4. STRUCTURE OF SYNGENES
The syngenes of the present invention are synthetic genes, that is, genes that are not derived from a naturally occurring genome. In one embodiment, syngenes are made up of, at least in part,
combinations of genes encoding functional domains, such combinations not occurring in nature. Syngenes may be composed of totally synthetic gene sequences or combinations of natural and totally synthetic gene sequences. Syngenes encode a syngene product which is a protein having at least one functional domain. The functional domain is a binding domain with affinity for a ligand. In a preferred aspect, this binding domain is characterized by l)its strength of binding under specific conditions, 2) the stability of its binding under specific conditions, and 3) its
selective specificity for the chosen ligand. In addition the syngene may encode additional functional domains, for example an amino acid sequence that directs cellular trafficking of the syngene product to the desired compartment of the cell; e.g., the
tetrapeptide KDEL (SEQ ID NO: 116), KKXX (SEQ ID NO: 118) or KXKXX (SEQ ID NO: 119) where X is any amino acid), to target peptides to the lumen of the
endoplasmic reticulum; or, e.g., the tetrapeptide YQRL (SEQ ID NO: 117) to target membrane peptides or secreted peptides to the trans Golgi network (see Luzio and Banting, 1993, TIBS 18:395-398); or a mitochondrial targeting pro-sequence (Singh et al., 1990, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 169:391-396). A third functional domain may be one that enhances activity of the syngene product, for example a
transcriptional activation sequence. The syngenes thus optionally encode
additional sequences besides the encoded binding peptide. Such additional sequences can be markers, linkers, transcriptional activation signals,
intracellular localization signals, in vivo targeting sequences, processing signals, post-translational modification signals, and the like. The syngene preferably includes regulatory sequences that control the expression of the coding region of the syngene, nucleic acid coding sequences encoding the binding peptide, and optional sequences.
In a preferred embodiment, the syngenes of the invention are created by inserting nucleotides encoding synthetic binding domains discovered by screening libraries as described herein into the context of additional protein coding sequences. This can be done by replacing the DNA binding domain of a known protein or by assembling a totally synthetic gene. In addition to other protein coding sequences, the syngene will generally contain other non-protein coding sequences. These non-protein coding sequences will generally be involved in the control of the expression of the syngene. At a minimum, the syngene preferably contains sequences for initiating
transcription and translation, as well as
transcriptional processing signals such as a poly A addition signal. The syngene preferably also contains a translation termination signal. Signals for
splicing of the RNA transcript encoded by the syngene may also be desirable. The addition of nucleotide sequences in the syngene other than those encoding the binding domain can provide for in vivo or
intracellular targeting of the syngene or its encoded product or transcriptional and/or post-translational processing events. Thus, in a specific embodiment, the syngene comprises a promoter operably linked to the coding sequences, followed by (3') transcriptional termination and poly A addition signals. Splice donor and acceptor sequences and sequences affording
stability to the construct can also be added.
According to one embodiment of the invention, the encoded syngene product can contain an additional region, i.e., an amino acid sequence that functions as a linker domain between one or more of the other domains of the syngene. The presence or absence of the linker domain is optional, as is the type of linker that may be used.
The syngene is preferably incorporated into a vector, for replication, and/or expression of the syngene. Any vector known in the art can be used. In addition to comprising the syngene, the vector
comprises appropriate origin (s) of replication, and, preferably, a selectable marker allowing selection of cells expressing the syngene product.
In a specific embodiment, syngene products are hybrid proteins. The amino terminus will
generally consist of a methionine residue followed by a spacer sequence of 1-15 amino acids, followed by one or more binding domains (i.e., the sequences
identified by screening the peptide library against the ligand of choice). The middle domain of the hybrid protein will often consist of a marker that aids in pre-clinical characterization, e.g. monitoring expression of the syngene in vi tro, as in, for
example, tissue culture cells. This is likely to be a readily detectable epitope or other label, e.g., β- galactosidase, luciferase or chloramphenicol acetyl transferase genes. This marker generally will be deleted when the syngene is used clinically. A cellular trafficking domain (e.g., KDEL (SEQ ID NO: 116) or YQRL (SEQ ID NO: 117) may next appear; a nuclear localization signal (NLS) at the carboxy terminus is also preferably part of the hybrid protein when it is desired that the syngene product be targeted to the nucleus. Additional functional domains, e.g., transcriptional activation sequences, or spacers can also be included. Of course, it will be readily apparent to one skilled in the art that the order in which the binding domains, the marker, the trafficking domain, and additional functional domains appear in the syngene may not be critical. The order disclosed above is merely illustrative of one
particular possible order. It will also be apparent that, except for the ligand binding domain, the presence of any other domains in a syngene product is optional. An exemplary mRNA expressed by a syngene is shown in Figure 2. The amino terminal sequence is preferably in the range of 3-10 amino acids. The binding domain mediates binding to the ligand of choice. The "middle domain" can be a cellular
trafficking signal such as KDEL (SEQ ID NO: 116) or YQRL (SEQ ID NO: 117), or is a marker (label) domain. The additional functional domains (optional) can be transcriptional activation sequences, NLSs, or
linkers.
If the syngene product is designed to activate the transcription of a gene, then the syngene will, in addition to the domains discussed above (or instead of the marker domain), contain a
transcriptional activation domain. Examples of such domains are: a homopolymeric stretch of glutamine residues, an acidic activation domain (sometimes known as a "negative noodle"), a proline-rich domain, or a serine-threonine-rich domain. It has been
demonstrated that when such activation domains are directed to the DNA target, they lead to
transcriptional activation of that target (Gerber et al., 1994, Science 263:808-811; Mitchell and Tjian, 1989, Science 245:371-378; Sadowski et al., 1988, Nature 335:563-564; Ptashne and Gann, 1990, Nature 346:329-331). A nuclear localization signal, such as that of the nucleoplasmin gene, may be added. The
nucleoplasmin nuclear localization signal has been shown to function in a variety of contexts, where it leads to the nuclear localization of proteins in which it appears. Nuclear localization signals that can be used in the present invention are not limited to those specifically disclosed herein; they include any that are known in the art. In a particular embodiment, the amino acid coding sequence of a syngene product begins with an amino-terminal spacer sequence, for example, MGASGAS (SEQ ID NO: 120), followed by a nuclear localization sequence which may be KRPAATKKAGQAKKKKR (SEQ ID NO: 121) (the nucleoplasmin NLS, see Kang et al., 1994, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91:340-344) followed by a second spacer sequence, for example, GASGAS (SEQ ID NO: 122), followed by the binding domain. In another embodiment, the amino acid
sequences of a syngene product begins with an amino- terminal spacer sequence, followed by the binding domain, followed by a second spacer sequence, followed by the carboxy-terminal nuclear localization signal MISESLRKAIGKR (SEQ ID NO: 123) (Shieh et al., 1993, Plant-Physiol. 101:353-61). In another embodiment, the NLS of the p50 subunit of NF-κB, VQRLRQLM (SEQ ID NO: 124) is used (Henkel et al., 1992, Cell 68:1121- 1133). Other nuclear localization signals which can be used as part of a syngene product include but are not limited to those found in various steroid hormone receptors, the SV40 large T antigen, or the consensus sequence therefor, as set forth in Table 7 below.
Figure imgf000108_0001
According to specific embodiments of the invention, the syngene can encode multiple copies of one or more binding domains or additionally contain multiple non-binding domains.
Additionally, the syngene can be modified at the base moiety, sugar moiety, or phosphate backbone, to stabilize the syngene, promote in vivo transport or localization, etc. Such modifications to bases, sugar moieties, and phosphate backbones are made in such a way that the modifications do not interfere with the transcription of the syngene, and thus do not
interfere with the expression of the syngene product. In a preferred aspect, such modifications are in a noncoding region or at a 5' or 3' terminus of the syngene. For example, the syngene may include other appended groups such as peptides, or agents
facilitating transport across the cell membrane (see, e. g. , Letsinger et al., 1989, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 86:6553-6556; Lemaitre et al., 1987, Proc.
Natl. Acad. Sci. 84:648-652; PCT Publication No.
WO 88/09810, published December 15, 1988) or blood- brain barrier (see, e. g. , PCT Publication No.
WO 89/10134, published April 25, 1988), hybridization- triggered cleavage agents (see, e.g., Krol et al., 1988, BioTechniques 6:958-976) or intercalating agents (see, e.g., Zon, 1988, Pharm. Res. 5:539-549).
The syngene may comprise at least one modified base moiety which is selected from the group including but not limited to 5-fluorouracil,
5-bromouracil, 5-chlorouracil, 5-iodouracil,
hypoxanthine, xantine, 4-acetylcytosine,
5- (carboxyhydroxylmethyl) uracil,
5-carboxymethylaminomethyl-2-thiouridine,
5-carboxymethylaminomethyluracil, dihydrouracil, beta-D-galactosylqueosine, inosine,
N6-isopentenyladenine, 1-methylguanine,
1-methylinosine, 2, 2-dimethylguanine, 2-methyladenine, 2-methylguanine, 3-methylcytosine, 5-methylcytosine, N6-adenine, 7-methylguanine,
5-methylaminomethyluracil, 5-methoxyaminomethyl- 2-thiouracil, beta-D-mannosylqueosine,
5'-methoxycarboxymethyluracil, 5-methoxyuracil,
2-methylthio-N6-isopentenyladenine, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid (v), wybutoxosine, pseudouracil, queosine,
2-thiocytosine, 5-methyl-2-thiouracil, 2-thiouracil, 4-thiouracil, 5-methyluracil, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid methylester, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid (v), 5-methyl- 2-thiouracil, 3- (3-amino-3-N-2-carboxypropyl) uracil, (acp3)w, and 2,6-diaminopurine.
In another embodiment, the syngene comprises at least one modified sugar moiety selected from the group including but not limited to arabinose,
2-fluoroarabinose, xylulose, and hexose.
In yet another embodiment, the syngene comprises at least one modified phosphate backbone selected from the group consisting of a
phosphorothioate, a phosphorodithioate, a
phosphoramidothioate, a phosphoramidate, a
phosphordiamidate, a methylphosphonate, an alkyl phosphotriester, and a formacetal or analog thereof.
In yet another embodiment, a portion of the syngene (preferably noncoding) consists of oi-anomeric nucleotides. An α-anomeric oligonucleotide forms specific double-stranded hybrids with complementary RNA in which, contrary to the usual 0-units, the strands run parallel to each other (Gautier et al., 1987, Nucl. Acids Res. 15:6625-6641).
Syngenes of the invention may be synthesized by standard methods known in the art, e.g. by use of an automated DNA synthesizer (such as are commercially available from Biosearch, Applied Biosystems, etc.). As examples, phosphorothioate oligonucleotides may be synthesized by the method of Stein et al. (1988, Nucl. Acids Res. 16:3209), methylphosphonate
oligonucleotides can be prepared by use of controlled pore glass polymer supports (Sarin et al., 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 85:7448-7451), etc.
Alternatively, the syngenes are made by recombinant DNA techniques commonly known in the art, e.g. by replicating a vector comprising the syngene in a suitable host cell. In a specific embodiment, the syngene comprises a 2'-0-methylribonucleotide (Inoue et al., 1987, Nucl. Acids Res. 15:6131-6148), or a chimeric RNA-DNA analogue (Inoue et al., 1987, FEBS Lett.
215:327-330).
5.5. EXPRESSION OF SYNGENES
It will be apparent to one skilled in the art that many satisfactory gene arrangements can be made such that the binding domains of the syngenes of the present invention can be expressed in the desired cell type in vi tro or in vivo (see generally, Ausubel et al. (eds.), 1993, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., N.Y.; Kriegler, 1990, Gene Transfer and Expression, A Laboratory
Manual, Stockton Press, N.Y.). In a specific
embodiment, the syngene is constructed as part of an expression vector that can be introduced in vivo such that it is taken up by a cell, within which cell the vector or a portion thereof is transcribed, leading to the production of the encoded syngene product. Such a vector can remain episomal or become chromosomally integrated, as long as it can be transcribed to produce the syngene product. Such vectors can be constructed by recombinant DNA technology methods standard in the art. Vectors can be plasmid, viral, or others known in the art, used for replication and expression in mammalian cells. Expression of the sequence encoding the syngene product can be by any promoter known in the art to act in mammalian, preferably human, cells. Such promoters can be inducible or constitutive. Such promoters include but are not limited to: the SV40 early promoter region (Bernoist and Chambon, 1981, Nature 290:304-310), the promoter contained in the 3' long terminal repeat of Rous sarcoma virus (Yamamoto et al., 1980, Cell
22:787-797), the herpes or HIV thymidine kinase promoter (Wagner et al., 1981, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 78:1441-1445), the regulatory sequences of the metallothionein gene (Brinster et al., 1982, Nature 296:39-42), cytomegalovirus (CMV) promoter, actin promoter, phosphoglycerate kinase promoter, etc. For example, promoters that function in a wide variety of cell types can be used to obtain expression in a wide variety of cell types where the syngene is introduced. This may be done by using a viral promoter such as a human cytomegalovirus early gene promoter or the adenovirus major late promoter to drive the expression of the syngene. Such viral promoters are active in a wide variety of mammalian cell types. Alternatively, it is possible to use a construct whereby the syngene is transcribed off of a constitutive mammalian cell promoter. Examples of such constitutive promoters are actin promoters and the PGK (phosphoglycerol kinase) promoter. Since the latter promoter is functional for high level transcription in all living mammalian cells it is an especially preferred choice.
In another embodiment the syngene is
constructed such that it can be expressed specifically or substantially specifically in a specific tissue or specific cell type. Numerous tissue and cell specific promoters and control regions have been characterized and it will be apparent to one skilled in the art how to select the appropriate one for expression in the desired cell type. For example, the following tissue specific control regions may be used: elastase I gene control region which is active in pancreatic acinar cells (Swift et al., 1984, Cell 38:639-646; Ornitz et al., 1986, Cold Spring Harbor Symp. Quant. Biol.
50:399-409; MacDonald, 1987, Hepatology 7:425-515); insulin gene control region which is active in
pancreatic beta cells (Hanahan, 1985, Nature 315:115- 122), immunoglobulin gene control region which is active in lymphoid cells (Grosschedl et al., 1984, Cell 38:647-658; Adames et al., 1985, Nature 318:533- 538; Alexander et al., 1987, Mol. Cell. Biol. 7:1436- 1444), mouse mammary tumor virus control region which is active in testicular, breast, lymphoid and mast cells (Leder et al., 1986, Cell 45:485-495), albumin gene control region which is active in liver (Pinkert et al., 1987, Genes and Devel. 1:268-276), alpha- fetoprotein gene control region which is active in liver (Krumlauf et al., 1985, Mol. Cell. Biol. 5:1639- 1648; Hammer et al., 1987, Science 235:53-58; alpha 1- antitrypsin gene control region which is active in the liver (Kelsey et al., 1987, Genes and Devel. 1:161- 171), beta-globin gene control region which is active in myeloid cells (Mogram et al., 1985, Nature 315:338- 340; Kollias et al., 1986, Cell 46:89-94; myelin basic protein gene control region which is active in
oligodendrocyte cells in the brain (Readhead et al., 1987, Cell 48:703-712); myosin light chain-2 gene control region which is active in skeletal muscle (Sani, 1985, Nature 314:283-286), and gonadotropic releasing hormone gene control region which is active in the hypothalamus (Mason et al., 1986, Science
234:1372-1378).
It will be apparent to one skilled in the art that numerous diverse vectors can be used for the delivery and subsequent expression of syngenes within mammalian cells. Simple shuttle vectors may be used such that a plasmid is grown in E. coli and purified DNA transferred into mammalian cells by the use of electroporation, calcium phosphate precipitates, DEAE dextran or with the assistance of liposomes. Such an exemplary shuttle vector is shown in Figure 3.
Furthermore many excellent viral based vectors can be used depending upon the therapeutic application. For instance herpes simplex virus may be used to deliver genes to the brain (Leib and Olivo, 1993, Bioessays 15:547-54), retroviruses (Salmons and Gunzburg, 1993, Human Gene Therapy 4:129-142) and adeno-aβsociated virus (Walsh et al., 1993, Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 204:289-300), which have the advantage of becoming integrated into the cellular DNA, may be used to deliver syngenes via transduction into hematopoietic, pluripotent stem cells and other somatic cells.
One of skill in the art would recognize that the underlying DNA sequences of the protein coding regions of syngenes may be varied so as to take advantage of known codon usage frequencies in
different organisms. The degeneracy of the genetic code allows for a plurality of DNA sequences to be constructed that all code for the same peptide or protein in a syngene. In some cases, for example, it may be desirable to introduce changes in the DNA sequence of the syngene encoding the binding domain in order to increase the expression of that binding domain in the cell in which the syngene is to be used. To do this, one would consult any well known table of codon frequency usage, such as that found in Ausubel et al. (eds.), 1993, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., N.Y., at Appendix 1 A.1.6. Using the information found there, one would use any well known method in the art to change the codons of the binding domain of the syngene that happen to be little used in the organism in which the syngene is to be expressed into codons that are more common in that organism. 5.6. ASSAY FOR THE ABILITY OF A
SYNGENE PRODUCT TO ACTIVATE OR INHIBIT TRANSCRIPTION
Syngenes that encode binding domains that bind to a DNA transcriptional regulatory region, but that do not contain a transcriptional activation signal, can be tested for their ability to inhibit the transcription of a gene by the following assay, presented by way of example but not limitation. The assay is carried out by using three sets of plasmids in an established cell line. The cell line expresses a transcription factor that has a DNA binding site that is the same as the DNA binding site of the syngene product that is to be assayed. The three plasmids have the following characteristics:
Plasmid 1: This plasmid contains the syngene to be tested cloned into a vector that will direct the expression of the syngene in the cell line;
Plasmid 2: This plasmid contains a reporter gene. The promoter of the reporter gene contains the DNA sequence which forms the binding site for the transcription factor expressed by the cells and for the binding domain encoded by the syngene. Normally, this DNA sequence will be essentially the same
sequence that was used to screen the library in the process of obtaining the binding domain encoded by the syngene. The reporter gene codes for the expression of any detectable marker such as, for example,
chloramphenicol acetyl transferase (CAT), β- galactosidase, horse radish peroxidase, etc., under the control of the promoter.
Plasmid 3: This is a control plasmid to monitor the efficiency of transfection. It directs the expression of a second reporter gene expressing a product that can be easily assayed. The activity of the promoter that drives the expression of this product is not dependent upon binding of a
transcription factor to the binding site of the syngene encoded binding domain that is being assayed. Preferably, the promoter is constitutive in the cell being used. Alternatively, it is an inducible
promoter, and the assays described below are carried out in the presence of its inducer. The reporter gene in plasmid 3 is different from that in plasmid 2. Two procedures are done, consisting of a test procedure and a control procedure. In the test procedure, the three plasmids are simultaneously co- introduced into each cell. Introduction can be by any of the well known methods in the art. Such methods include electroporation, calcium phosphate mediated transfection, and liposome mediated transfection.
Preferably, introduction is by electroporation. In the control procedure, plasmids 2 and 3 are co- introduced, without plasmid 1 (which contains the syngene).
After culture for a time sufficient to allow expression of the products encoded by the plasmids, the amounts of expressed reporter gene products from plasmids 2 and 3 are measured. If the syngene product is able to compete with the transcription factor for binding to the DNA binding sequence in the promoter of the first reporter gene on plasmid 2, then the level of expression of the first reporter gene product will be low. This is because binding of the syngene product to the DNA binding sequence in the promoter of the first reporter gene will prevent binding of the transcription factor to that sequence. Therefore, the transcription factor will not be able to activate the transcription of the first reporter gene. If the syngene product is not able to compete with the transcription factor, then the level of expression of the first reporter gene product will be high. This will be the case in the control procedure, where plasmid 1, which contains the syngene, is not used.
The level of expression of the first reporter gene product (from plasmid 2) is compared to the level of expression of the second reporter gene product (from plasmid 3) to determine the ratio of expression of the two products. This ratio is determined for both the test procedure with, and the control procedure without, plasmid 1 containing the syngene. When the ratio from the test procedure is less that the ratio from the control procedure, this indicates that the syngene product is competing with the transcription factor for binding to the DNA binding sequence in the promoter of the first reporter gene. When the ratio from the test procedure is equal to the ratio from the control procedure, this
indicates that the syngene product is unable to compete with the transcription factor.
By way of example, to determine if a syngene product can inhibit the transcription of a gene the transcription of which depends upon binding of the transcription factor NF-κB to its DNA binding site, a human cell line that expresses NF-κB (p65) is used (e.g., Jurkat, a T cell line; Okamoto et al., 1994, J. Biol. Chem. 269:8582-8587). The first plasmid
contains the syngene which is driven by the adenovirus major late promoter or by some other promoter that is active in the cells being used. The second plasmid contains the first reporter gene which consists of the H2κb promoter (Baldwin and Sharp, 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85:723-727) directing the expression of the CAT gene. The H2κb promoter is dependent upon NF- κB binding for its activity. The control plasmid consists of the luciferase gene (the second reporter gene) driven by a promoter that does not depend upon NF-κB for its expression.
The three plasmids are introduced into the cells via electroporation. When the syngene that is being assayed expresses a binding domain that is specific for the NF-κB binding site of the H2κb gene but does not also contain a transcriptional activation site, then the ratio of CAT activity to luciferase activity will be low when compared to the same ratio obtained when no syngene, or a control syngene that does not encode a binding site that is specific for the NF-κB binding site, is used. This is because the syngene that encodes a binding domain that specifically binds the NF-κB binding site will bind the NF-κB site in the reporter plasmid containing the CAT gene. This will prevent binding of the cell's endogenous NF-κB transcription factor to that site, thus preventing NF-κB from activating the promoter of the reporter gene.
To determine whether a syngene-encoded protein product can activate the transcription of a gene, the same three plasmids can be used as are described above in the test and control procedures. The cell line used in the assay for activation
differs, however. To test for activation, a cell line must be used that does not express the transcription factor whose binding site is the same as that of the syngene product. Because the cell line does not express the transcription factor, the first reporter gene on the second plasmid will not be transcribed in the absence of a syngene product. If the syngene product is capable of binding to the DNA binding sequence in the promoter of the first reporter gene and is also capable of activating transcription, the reporter gene on the second plasmid will be expressed. In this assay, the syngene to be tested will
preferably encode a transcriptional activation signal in addition to a binding domain.
Once again, the ratio of first reporter gene product over second reporter gene products is compared for the test and control procedures (with and without the syngene). In this case, however, the presence in the test procedure of a syngene that encodes a product that is capable of binding to the promoter of, and activating the transcription of, the first reporter gene will result in a larger value for the ratio in the case of the test procedure as compared to the control procedure. The ratio for the control
procedure is smaller, reflecting the inactivity of the promoter of the first reporter gene in the absence of the transcription factor and the syngene product.
As a specific example, to determine whether a syngene can activate the transcription of a gene the transcription of which depends upon the binding of the transcription factor NF-κB to its DNA binding site, a cell line is used that substantially does not express NF-κB. HeLa cells (Scheinman et al., 1993, Mol. Cell. Biol. 13:6089-6101) express only low levels of
endogenous NF-κB and thus can be used. Alternatively, F9 embryonal carcinoma cells can be used. The same three plasmids as above are co-transfected into this cell line. If the syngene product contains a binding domain specific for the NF-κB site as well as a transcriptional activation domain, the ratio of CAT activity to luciferase activity will be high when compared to the same ratio obtained when no syngene, or a control syngene product that lacks a binding domain specific for the NF-κB site, is used. When no syngene, or a control syngene, is used, CAT activity will be very low because the cell, lacking NF-κB activity, will transcribe the H2κb promoter (which drives expression of the CAT gene) at a very low rate. Thus, there will be very little CAT activity unless the syngene to be assayed binds to the NF-κB site on the H2κb promoter and activates expression of the CAT gene.
If a cell line that does not express a transcription factor of interest is not readily available, it may be made by methods known in the art. For example, the gene for the transcription factor of interest may be inactivated by promoting homologous recombination of that gene with a non-functional copy of itself (Roller and Smithies, 1989, Proc. Natl.
Acad. Sci. USA 86:8932-8935; Zijlstra et al., 1989, Nature 342:435-438). A preferred vector for expression of a syngene for characterization of its biological
activity is that described by Pei et al., 1991, J.
Biol. Chem. 266:9598-9604. This vector consists of an adenovirus major late promoter driving a gene cassette with the adenovirus tripartite leader sequence and a hemoglobin splice donor and acceptor followed by the desired coding sequences followed by the
polyadenylation site and 3' non-coding sequences from the SV40 virus early transcriptional unit. In
addition, this vector has the pBR322 replicon and an antibiotic resistance marker for growth in E. coli .
Although the above discussion was couched in terms of NF-κB binding sites, it will be readily understood by one of skill in the art that the same general method of testing the ability of a syngene to activate or inhibit transcription can be extended to test the activity of syngene products that bind to various other transcription factor binding sites, or that bind to a ligand of choice and thereby activate or inhibit an activity that is detectable in the assay.
5.7. DIFFERENTIAL REGULATION OF CLOSELY RELATED TRANSCRIPTIONAL REGULATORY SITES
It is well known that the DNA sequences that define the binding sites of many transcription factors differ somewhat from gene to gene. Thus, the NF-κB binding site in the HLA class I genes differs from the NF-κB site in the IL-6 gene or the IL-8 gene
(respectively termed IL-6κB and IL-8κB). See Section 6.1.1. While, for some transcription factors, slightly different sites are recognized by slightly different versions of the transcription factors, in some cases the same transcription factor recognizes the somewhat different versions of its binding site. In those cases where the same transcription factor recognizes different binding sites, the use of the syngenes of the present invention affords the opportunity for achieving a level of regulation of the different sites that surpasses that which could be achieved by the use of the natural transcription factor. This is because it is possible to isolate highly specific DNA binding domains from random synthetic peptide libraries according to the present invention that bind specifically to one member of the related binding sites of a given transcription factor but that do not bind to the other sites. This is done by screening a random synthetic peptide library with a first oligonucleotide ligand that represents the DNA binding site that it is desired to specifically regulate. After isolating a group of binding domains that bind to this first oligonucleotide, one then makes use of other oligonucleotides that are closely related, but slightly different from the first
oligonucleotide. By selecting against binding domains that will bind these other oligonucleotides (by use of the methods described in Section 6.1 and its
subsections), one obtains a highly specific DNA binding domain, i.e. a binding domain that
specifically binds only to the first oligonucleotide, and not to the others. Using this approach, for example, it is possible to regulate the activity of the IL-6 gene (by use of a syngene expressing an HSDB specific to the NF-κB site of the IL-6 gene) without affecting the activity of the IL-8 gene.
5.8. USES OF SYNGENES
The invention also provides methods for use of the syngenes, e.g., in diagnosis and therapy of various disorders.
The present invention vastly expands the number of genes that are available for use in gene therapy. The present invention provides methods for finding synthetic nucleic acids encoding proteins with diagnostic or therapeutic value, or value in in vi tro assays. The present invention further provides methods for delivery of such peptides or proteins in vivo by expression in vivo from the administered syngene.
The present invention provides methods for using synthetic peptides or proteins, and the genes encoding them, to fulfill roles that naturally
occurring proteins have not necessarily been evolved for. One need only identify a target whose activity it would be desirable to modulate. Given such a target, a synthetic peptide in a random peptide library that binds the target and can thus modulate the target's activity can be readily identified by the present invention. The present invention also
provides for the identification of a nucleic acid (syngene) that encodes the peptide. Such a syngene can be used, e.g., in gene therapy. As an example, the present invention provides methods for identifying syngenes that inhibit or enhance the transcriptional activity of a wide variety of naturally occurring genes, preferably with a specificity not found in natural systems. In a specific embodiment, syngenes can be used to effect differential regulation of closely related transcriptional regulatory sites as described in Section 5.7.
In addition to affecting transcription, among the other nuclear processes that syngenes may be useful in modulating are: post-transcriptional
processing of RNA, DNA repair, and DNA replication. Syngene products may bind to actin and thus be of use in regulating mitotic spindle formation and cell division.
Syngenes are also useful for modulating processes that occur outside of the nucleus. For example, in the cytoplasm, the encoded protein of a syngene, produced by intracellular expression of the syngene, may be used to affect the activity of
inhibitors of transcription factors such as IF-κB. They may also be used to modulate signal transduction pathways, metabolic pathways, RNA translation, and intracellular trafficking. In the cell membrane, syngenes may be used to modulate the activity of membrane receptors, ion channels, or exocytotic and endocytotic pathways.
In tissue, syngenes, via expression of their encoded proteins, may be used to regulate cell/cell signalling and transcytosis. Cell/cell junctions and the extracellular matrix are appropriate targets for syngenes. Syngenes may be used to regulate cell adhesion or cell/cell recognition. In the general circulation, syngenes may be used to regulate the activity of receptor ligands.
Syngenes can be used in any appropriate method of gene therapy, as would be recognized by those in the art upon considering this disclosure. The resulting action of a syngene in the gene therapy patient can, for example, lead to the activation or inhibition of a preselected gene in the patient, thus leading to improvement of the diseased condition afflicting the patient. Methods of gene therapy are detailed in Section 5.8.1.
Alternatively, the syngenes may be introduced into appropriate host cells and thereby used for the recombinant production of their encoded peptides. The peptides thus produced can be used, e.g., in in vi tro assays to detect and/or quantitate the ligand of choice to which they bind, for
therapeutic purposes, diagnostic purposes, or to regulate transcription ( e . g. , where the ligand of choice modulates transcription). In another aspect, the invention relates to the peptide products of syngenes and their therapeutic and diagnostic uses. The syngene-encoded peptides can be used therapeutically and diagnostically, to
regulate transcription, signal transduction, etc. as described herein for syngenes. The syngene products can be used in in vi tro binding assays, to detect and/or measure amounts of their binding partners
(e.g., the ligand of choice). The syngene products can be used in vivo, e.g., labeled with an appropriate marker, to image their binding partners.
5.8.1. GENE THERAPY
In its broadest sense, gene therapy refers to therapy performed by the administration of a nucleic acid to a subject. The nucleic acid, either directly or indirectly via its encoded protein, mediates a therapeutic effect in the subject.
The syngenes of the present invention can be used in any of the methods for gene therapy available in the art. The descriptions below are meant to be illustrative of such methods. It will be readily understood by those of skill in the art that the methods illustrated represent only a sample of all available methods of gene therapy.
For general reviews of the methods of gene therapy, see Goldspiel et al., 1993, Clinical Pharmacy 12:488-505; Wu and Wu, 1991, Biotherapy 3:87-95;
Tolstoshev, 1993, Ann. Rev. Pharmacol. Toxicol.
32:573-596; Mulligan, 1993, Science 260:926-932; and Morgan and Anderson, 1993, Ann. Rev. Biochem. 62:191- 217; May, 1993, TIBTECH 11 (5):155-215). Methods commonly known in the art of recombinant DNA
technology which can be used are described in Ausubel et al. (eds.), 1993, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, NY; and Kriegler, 1990, Gene Transfer and Expression, A Laboratory Manual, Stockton Press, NY.
Delivery of the syngene into a patient may be either direct, in which case the patient is
directly exposed to the syngene or syngene-carrying vector, or indirect, in which case, cells are first transformed with the syngene in vitro, then
transplanted into the patient. These two approaches are known, respectively, as in vivo or ex vivo gene therapy.
In a specific embodiment, the syngene is directly administered in vivo for therapeutic effect, whereby it is expressed to produce the syngene
product. This can be accomplished by any of numerous methods known in the art, e.g., by constructing it as part of an appropriate nucleic acid expression vector and administering it so that it becomes intracellular, e. g. , by infection using a defective or attenuated retroviral or other viral vector (see U.S. Patent No. 4,980,286), or by direct injection of naked DNA, or: by use of microparticle bombardment (e.g., a gene gun; Biolistic, Dupont) , or coating with lipids or cell- surface receptors or transfecting agents,
encapsulation in liposomes, microparticles, or
microcapsules, or by administering it in linkage to a peptide which is known to enter the nucleus, by administering it in linkage to a ligand subject to receptor-mediated endocytosis (see e.g., Wu and Wu, 1987, J. Biol. Chem. 262:4429-4432) (which can be used to target cell types specifically expressing the receptors), etc. In another embodiment, a syngeneligand complex can be formed in which the ligand comprises a fusogenic viral peptide to disrupt
endosomes, allowing the syngene to avoid lysosomal degradation. In yet another embodiment, the syngene can be targeted in vivo for cell specific uptake and expression, by targeting a specific receptor (see, e.g., PCT Publications WO 92/06180 dated April 16, 1992 (Wu et al.); WO 92/22635 dated December 23, 1992 (Wilson et al.); WO92/20316 dated November 26, 1992 (Findeis et al.); W093/14188 dated July 22, 1993
(Clarke et al.), WO 93/20221 dated October 14, 1993 (Young) ). Alternatively, the syngene can be
introduced intracellularly and incorporated within host cell DNA for expression, by homologous
recombination (Roller and Smithies, 1989, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:8932-8935; Zijlstra et al., 1989, Nature 342:435-438).
One common method of practicing gene therapy is by making use of retroviral vectors (see Miller et al., 1993, Meth. Enzymol. 217:581-599). A retroviral vector is a retrovirus that has been modified to incorporate a preselected gene in order to effect the expression of that gene. It has been found that many of the naturally occurring DNA sequences of
retroviruses are dispensable in retroviral vectors. Only a small subset of the naturally occurring DNA sequences of retroviruses is necessary. In general, a retroviral vector must contain all of the cis-acting sequences necessary for the packaging and integration of the viral genome. These cis-acting sequences are: a) a long terminal repeat (LTR) , or portions thereof, at each end of the vector;
b) primer binding sites for negative and positive strand DNA synthesis; and
c) a packaging signal, necessary for the
incorporation of genomic RNA into virions.
The gene to be used in gene therapy is cloned into the vector, which facilitates delivery of the gene into a patient.
More detail about retroviral vectors can be found in Boesen et al., 1994, Biotherapy 6:291-302, which describes the use of a retroviral vector to deliver the mdrl gene to hematopoietic stem cells in order to make the stem cells more resistant to
chemotherapy. Other references illustrating the use of retroviral vectors in gene therapy are: Clowes et al., 1994, J. Clin. Invest. 93:644-651; Kiem et al., 1994, Blood 83:1467-1473; Salmons and Gunzberg, 1993, Human Gene Therapy 4:129-141; and Grossman and Wilson, 1993, Curr. Opin. in Genetics and Devel. 3:110-114.
Adenoviruses are also of use in gene
therapy. Adenoviruses are especially attractive vehicles for delivering genes to respiratory
epithelia. Adenoviruses naturally infect respiratory epithelia where they cause a mild disease. Other targets for adenovirus-based delivery systems are liver, the central nervous system, endothelial cells, and muscle. Adenoviruses have the advantage of being capable of infecting non-dividing cells. Kozarsky and Wilson, 1993, Current Opinion in Genetics and
Development 3:499-503 present a review of adenovirus- based gene therapy. Bout et al., 1994, Human Gene Therapy 5:3-10 demonstrated the use of adenovirus vectors to transfer genes to the respiratory epithelia of rhesus monkeys. Other instances of the use of adenoviruses in gene therapy can be found in Rosenfeld et al., 1991, Science 252:431-434; Rosenfeld et al., 1992, Cell 68:143-155; and Mastrangeli et al., 1993, J. Clin. Invest. 91:225-234.
It has been proposed that adeno-associated virus (AAV) be used in gene therapy (Walsh et al., 1993, Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 204:289-300).
Another approach to gene therapy involves transferring a gene to cells in tissue culture by such methods as electroporation, lipofection, calcium phosphate mediated transfection, or viral infection. Usually, the method of transfer includes the transfer of a selectable marker to the cells. The cells are then placed under selection to isolate those cells that have taken up and are expressing the transferred gene. Those cells are then delivered to a patient.
In this embodiment, the syngene is introduced into a cell prior to administration in vivo of the resulting recombinant cell. Such introduction can be carried out by any method known in the art, including but not limited to transfection,
electroporation, microinjection, infection with a viral or bacteriophage vector containing the syngene sequences, cell fusion, chromosome-mediated gene transfer, microcell-mediated gene transfer,
spheroplast fusion, etc. Numerous techniques are known in the art for the introduction of foreign genes into cells (see e.g., Loeffler and Behr, 1993, Meth. Enzymol. 217:599-618; Cohen et al., 1993, Meth.
Enzymol. 217:618-644; Cline, 1985, Pharmac. Ther.
29:69-92) and may be used in accordance with the present invention, provided that the necessary
developmental and physiological functions of the recipient cells are not disrupted. The technique should provide for the stable transfer of the syngene to the cell, so that the syngene is expressible by the cell and preferably heritable and expressible by its cell progeny.
The resulting recombinant cells can be delivered to a patient by various methods known in the art. In a preferred embodiment, epithelial cells are injected, e.g., subcutaneously. In another
embodiment, recombinant skin cells may be applied as a skin graft onto the patient. Recombinant blood cells (e.g., hematopoietic stem or progenitor cells) are preferably administered intravenously. The amount of cells envisioned for use depends on the desired effect, patient state, etc., and can be determined by one skilled in the art.
Cells into which a syngene can be introduced for purposes of gene therapy encompass any desired, available cell type, and include but are not limited to epithelial cells, endothelial cells, keratinocytes, fibroblasts, muscle cells, hepatocytes; blood cells such as T lymphocytes, B lymphocytes, monocytes, macrophages, neutrophils, eosinophils, megakaryocytes, granulocytes; various stem or progenitor cells, in particular hematopoietic stem or progenitor cells, e.g., as obtained from bone marrow, umbilical cord blood, peripheral blood, fetal liver, etc.
In a preferred embodiment, the cell used for gene therapy is autologous to the patient.
In an embodiment in which recombinant cells are used in gene therapy, a syngene is introduced into the cells such that it is expressible by the cells or their progeny, and the recombinant cells are then administered in vivo for therapeutic effect; stem and progenitor cells are preferred for use. Any stem and/or progenitor cells which can be isolated and maintained in vitro can potentially be used in
accordance with this embodiment of the present
invention. Such stem cells include but are not limited to hematopoietic stem cells (HSC) , stem cells of epithelial tissues such as the skin and the lining of the gut, embryonic heart muscle cells, liver stem cells (PCT Publication WO 94/08598, dated April 28, 1994), and neural stem cells (Stemple and Anderson, 1992, Cell 71:973-985).
Epithelial stem cells (ESCs) or
keratinocytes can be obtained from tissues such as the skin and the lining of the gut by known procedures (Rheinwald, 1980, Meth. Cell Bio. 21A:229). In stratified epithelial tissue such as the skin, renewal occurs by mitosis of stem cells within the germinal layer, the layer closest to the basal lamina. Stem cells within the lining of the gut provide for a rapid renewal rate of this tissue. ESCs or keratinocytes obtained from the skin or lining of the gut of a patient or donor can be grown in tissue culture
(Rheinwald, 1980, Meth. Cell Bio. 21A:229; Pittelkow and Scott, 1986, Mayo Clinic Proc. 61:771). If the ESCs are provided by a donor, a method for suppression of host versus graft reactivity (e.g., irradiation, drug or antibody administration to promote moderate immunosuppression) can also be used.
With respect to hematopoietic stem cells (HSC), any technique which provides for the isolation, propagation, and maintenance in vi tro of HSC can be used in this embodiment of the invention. Techniques by which this may be accomplished include (a) the isolation and establishment of HSC cultures from bone marrow cells isolated from the future host, or a donor, or (b) the use of previously established long- term HSC cultures, which may be allogeneic or
xenogeneic. Non-autologous HSC are used preferably in conjunction with a method of suppressing
transplantation immune reactions of the future
host/patient. In a particular embodiment of the present invention, human bone marrow cells can be obtained from the posterior iliac crest by needle aspiration (see, e.g., Kodo et al., 1984, J. Clin. Invest. 73:1377-1384). In a preferred embodiment of the present invention, the HSCs can be made highly enriched or in substantially pure form. This
enrichment can be accomplished before, during, or after long-term culturing, and can be done by any techniques known in the art. Long-term cultures of bone marrow cells can be established and maintained by using, for example, modified Dexter cell culture techniques (Dexter et al., 1977, J. Cell Physiol.
91:335) or Witlock-Witte culture techniques (Witlock and Witte, 1982, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA
79:3608-3612).
In a specific embodiment, the syngene to be introduced for purposes of gene therapy comprises an inducible promoter operably linked to the coding region, such that expression of the syngene is
controllable by controlling the presence or absence of the appropriate inducer of transcription.
5.9. PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS The invention provides methods of treatment by administration to a subject of an effective amount of a pharmaceutical (therapeutic) composition
comprising a syngene. Such a syngene envisioned for therapeutic use is referred to hereinafter as a
"Therapeutic" or "Therapeutic of the invention." As used hereinbelow, "Therapeutic" or "Therapeutic of the invention" shall also be used to refer to molecules comprising the encoded peptide products of syngenes, e.g., where a molecule comprising the peptide binding domain encoded by a syngene is used therapeutically. In a preferred aspect, the Therapeutic is
substantially purified. The subject is preferably an animal, including but not limited to animals such as cows, pigs, horses, chickens, cats, dogs, etc., and is preferably a mammal, and most preferably human.
Formulations and methods of administration that can be employed when the Therapeutic comprises a syngene are described in Section 5.8.1; additional appropriate formulations and routes of administration can be selected from among those described
hereinbelow.
Various delivery systems are known and can be used to administer a Therapeutic of the invention, e.g., encapsulation in liposomes, microparticles, microcapsules, recombinant cells containing the
Therapeutic, receptor-mediated endocytosis (see, e.g., Wu and Wu, 1987, J. Biol. Chem. 262:4429-4432), construction of a Therapeutic syngene as part of a retroviral or other vector, etc. Methods of
introduction include but are not limited to intradermal, intramuscular, intraperitoneal,
intravenous, subcutaneous, intranasal, epidural, and oral routes. The compounds may be administered by any convenient route, for example by infusion or bolus injection, by absorption through epithelial or
mucocutaneous linings (e.g., oral mucosa, rectal and intestinal mucosa, etc.) and may be administered together with other biologically active agents.
Administration can be systemic or local. In addition, it may be desirable to introduce the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention into the central nervous system by any suitable route, including
intraventricular and intrathecal injection;
intraventricular injection may be facilitated by an intraventricular catheter, for example, attached to a reservoir, such as an Ommaya reservoir. In a specific embodiment, it may be desirable to utilize liposomes targeted via antibodies to specific identifiable cell surface antigens.
In a preferred aspect, the Therapeutic comprises a syngene that is part of an expression vector that expresses the syngene in a suitable host. In particular, such a syngene has a promoter operably linked to the syngene coding region, said promoter being inducible or constitutive. In another
particular embodiment, the syngene is a nucleic acid molecule in which the syngene coding sequences and any other desired sequences are flanked by regions that promote homologous recombination at a desired site in the genome, thus providing for intrachromosomal expression of the syngene (Roller and Smithies, 1989, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:8932-8935; Zijlstra et al., 1989, Nature 342:435-438).
In a specific embodiment, it may be desirable to administer the Therapeutics of the invention locally to the area in need of treatment; this may be achieved by, for example, and not by way of limitation, local infusion during surgery, topical application, e.g., in conjunction with a
Figure imgf000133_0001
, dressing after surgery, by injection, by means of a catheter, by means of a suppository, or by means of an implant, said implant being of a porous, non-porous, or gelatinous material, including membranes, such as sialastic membranes, or fibers.
The present invention provides
pharmaceutical compositions. Such compositions comprise a therapeutically effective amount of a
Therapeutic, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient. Such a carrier includes but is not limited to saline, buffered saline, dextrose, water, glycerol, ethanol, and combinations thereof. The carrier and composition can be sterile. The
formulation should suit the mode of administration.
The composition, if desired, can also contain minor amounts of wetting or emulsifying agents, or pH buffering agents. The composition can be a liquid solution, suspension, emulsion, tablet, pill, capsule, sustained release formulation, or powder. The composition can be formulated as a suppository, with traditional binders and carriers such as triglycerides. Oral formulation can include standard carriers such as pharmaceutical grades of mannitol, lactose, starch, magnesium stearate, sodium saccharine, cellulose, magnesium carbonate, etc.
In a preferred embodiment, the composition is formulated in accordance with routine procedures as a pharmaceutical composition adapted for intravenous administration to human beings. Typically,
compositions for intravenous administration are solutions in sterile isotonic aqueous buffer. Where necessary, the composition may also include a
solubilizing agent and a local anesthetic such as lignocaine to ease pain at the site of the injection. Generally, the ingredients are supplied either separately or mixed together in unit dosage form, for example, as a dry lyophilized powder or water free concentrate in a hermetically sealed container such as an ampoule or sachette indicating the quantity of active agent. Where the composition is to be
administered by infusion, it can be dispensed with an infusion bottle containing sterile pharmaceutical grade water or saline. Where the composition is administered by injection, an ampoule of sterile water for injection or saline can be provided so that the ingredients may be mixed prior to administration.
The Therapeutics of the invention can be formulated as neutral or salt forms. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include those formed with free amino groups such as those derived from hydrochloric, phosphoric, acetic, oxalic, tartaric acids, etc., and those formed with free carboxyl groups such as those derived from sodium, potassium, ammonium, calcium, ferric hydroxides, isopropylamine, triethylamine, 2- ethylamino ethanol, histidine, procaine, etc.
The amount of the Therapeutic of the
invention which will be effective in the treatment of a particular disorder or condition will depend on the nature of the disorder or condition, and can be determined by standard clinical techniques. In addition, in vi tro assays may optionally be employed to help identify optimal dosage ranges. The precise dose to be employed in the formulation will also depend on the route of administration, and the
seriousness of the disease or disorder, and should be decided according to the judgment of the practitioner and each patient' s circumstances.
The invention also provides a pharmaceutical pack or kit comprising one or more containers filled with one or more of the ingredients of the
pharmaceutical compositions of the invention.
Optionally associated with such container (s) can be a notice in the form prescribed by a governmental agency regulating the manufacture, use or sale of
pharmaceuticals or biological products, which notice reflects approval by the agency of manufacture, use or sale for human administration .
6. EXAMPLES
For the examples incorporated herein, a TSAR library is utilized; however, to those skilled in the art, it will be apparent that other random peptide display libraries may be used. An example of a TSAR library is the TSAR-9 library disclosed in Kay et al., 1993, Gene 128:59-65. TSAR-9 constructs display a peptide of about 38 amino acids in length having 36 totally random positions.
6.1. ISOLATION OF HSDBs FOR NF-κB
AND NF-IL6 BINDING SITES
6.1.1. OLIGONUCLEOTIDE TARGETS The synthetic oligonucleotide targets
(ligands) for isolating HSDBs that encode peptide sequences that bind to specific cis-elements for several genes of interest are described in the
following paragraphs.
For the NF-κB site of HLA class I genes the sequence is 5'gggtGGGGATTCCCCatct (SEQ ID NO: 135) (called H2κB-U) and 5' agatGGGGAATCCCCaccc (SEQ ID NO: 136) (called H2κb-L) (the suffix U stands for upper strand and a suffix L stands for lower strand). The double stranded oligonucleotide formed by the
hybridization of H2κB-U and H2κB-L is called the H2κB oligonucleotide. The upper case sequence is the known NF-κB binding site (see Baldwin and Sharp, 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci, USA 85:723-727). This particular sequence is homologous to the NF-κB regulatory domain of the murine homologue of the human HLA class I gene. The murine sequence is from the H-2k (d) gene and is in the databases as GenBank accession X01815. The upper case NF-κB site is completely conserved in human HLA class I genes such as HLA-B27 (GenBank M12967) and HLA-J (GenBank M80470) and HLA-A2 (GenBank K02883).
IL-6 is an attractive target for regulation by syngenes since it has been shown to be involved in immune responses and the acute phase protein responses (Kishimoto, 1989, Blood 74:1-10; Clark, 1989, Ann.
N.Y. Acad. Sci. 557:438-443; Castell et al., 1989,
Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sci. 557:87-101). For the NF-κB site in the IL-6 gene, the following oligonucleotides are used: 5' atgtGGGATTTTCCcatg (SEQ ID NO: 137) (called IL6κB-U) and 5' catgGGAAAATCCCacat (SEQ ID NO: 138) (called IL6κB-L). The double stranded oligonucleotide formed by the hybridization of IL6κB-U and IL6κB-L is called the IL6κB oligonucleotide. This site has been defined as the NF-κB regulatory sequence in the IL-6 gene by Taiji et al., 1993, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:10193-10197.
For the NF-κB site in the IL-8 gene, the following oligonucleotides are used:
5'atcgTGGAATTTCCtctg (SEQ ID NO: 139) (called IL8κB-U) and 5' cagaGGAAATTCCAcgat (SEQ ID NO: 140) (called IL8κB-L). The double stranded oligonucleotide formed by the hybridization of IL8κB-U and IL8κB-L is called the IL8κB oligonucleotide. This site has been defined as the NF-κB regulatory sequence in the IL-8 gene by Kunsch and Rosen, 1993, Mol. Cell. Biol. 13:6137-6146.
For the NF-IL6 site found in the IL6 gene, the following oligonucleotides are synthesized:
5' acgtcATTGCACAAtctt (SEQ ID NO: 141) (called NFIL6-U) and 5' aagaTTGTGCAATgacgt (SEQ ID NO: 142) (called NFIL6-L). The double stranded oligonucleotide formed by the hybridization of NFIL6-U and NFIL6-L is called the NFIL6 oligonucleotide. Those nucleotides in upper case correspond to the consensus sequence for an NF- IL6 site and have been shown to constitute a
functional NF-IL6 regulatory cis-element (Zhang et al, 1994, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91:2225-2229).
For the experiments outlined below where it is desirable to immobilize the oligonucleotides to streptavidin coated plastic surfaces, all the upper strand oligonucleotides listed above are synthesized with a biotinylated thymidine nearest to the 3 ' thymidine position, but not at the 3' end. This biotin moiety is separated from the thymidine base by a 20 carbon spacer arm. Therefore, when the
respective upper and lower strand oligonucleotide pairs are annealed together, there is one biotin tag on each pair. By kinasing the 5' end of each
synthetic oligonucleotide with T4 polynucleotide kinase as described in Ausubel et al. (eds.), 1993, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, NY, then annealing the
respective pairs of oligonucleotides in 10 mM Tris, lmM EDTA, pH 7.5 (TE buffer) with 50 mM NaCl at 30°C and then carrying out a ligation reaction (section 3.14.2 in Current Protocols in Molecular Biology) , one obtains DNA molecules with one or more transcription factor binding sites per molecule. Unless otherwise stated, all abbreviations and buffers are as described in the Appendix in Current Protocols in Molecular Biology. Thus, for the isolation of TSAR phage that bind to DNA, one can prepare either a monovalent target, solely by annealing the appropriate pairs of oligonucleotides or a multivalent target by the ligation of kinased monovalent target molecules. The ligated fragments of DNA can be analyzed by gel electrophoresis with visualization of ethidium bromide stained DNA using short wave UV light to determine the average size of a ligated fragment and thus, the average number of cis-elements per fragment. For the experiments carried out below, it is optimal to have either one site per molecule (unligated fragments) or 10 sites per molecule. Other numbers of sites are less desirable. Fragments of the appropriate size can be recovered by gel electrophoresis or velocity sedimentation centrifugation techniques.
6.1.2. SCREENING
Phage from a TSAR library that bind to specific DNA sequences are isolated by a process of screening called panning. In a preferred method,
"Universal Covalent" multiwell plates obtained from Costar (Cambridge, MA) , or similar multiwell plates, are utilized. The specific DNA target is immobilized directly to the wells in a procedure supplied by the manufacturer. Costar' s Universal Covalent surface is intended to covalently immobilize biomolecules via an abstractable hydrogen using UV illumination resulting in a carbon-carbon bond. Although the linkage is non-specific and does not allow for site-directed orientation of a biomolecule, this surface is very useful for the immobilization of double stranded DNA. A 100 μl DNA sample (10 μg/ml in 50 mM Na Acetate buffer) is added to each of the appropriate wells and incubated at room temperature for 1 hr. The solution is removed and the DNA covalently immobilized to the surface by exposing the plate to UV light for the time determined to be optimal in the UV Intensity
Verification section of the instructions provided by Costar. Subsequently, each well is blocked with BSA as described below. The advantage to this method is that one obtains fewer TSAR binding phage targeted to a substance such as streptavidin which, in an
alternative method, is used to attach the biotinylated DNA to the multi-well plate surface. However, a disadvantage is that the DNA is bound directly to the plate, providing some degree of steric interference with the binding of the desired TSAR phage to the DNA target . This is less of a problem when using target DNA immobilized using streptavidin due to the 20 carbon space linker between the biotin and the DNA.
Another method by which panning can be carried out is as follows. Aliquots of phage are first placed into ELISA plate wells coated only with streptavidin. This removes those phage capable of binding to streptavidin. Then the aliquots are transferred to wells coated with target DNA
immobilized via a biotin linked to streptavidin bound to the surface of an ELISA plate well. Preferably, Reacti-Bind brand streptavidin coated strip plates, cat. # 15124 are used. These are obtainable from Pierce, 3747 North Meridian Road, Rockford, IL.
Less preferably, one may coat Costar brand
E.I.A./R.I.A. multi-well plates (cat. #3590). All wells are coated with streptavidin using 1 μg/ml in 100 mM Na Bicarbonate, pH 8.4 buffer. 50 μl are added to each well and incubated at 4ºC overnight or 22°C for 4 hrs. The streptavidin solution is pipetted away, and the remaining binding surfaces are blocked with 300 μl/well of a solution containing 5 mg/ml BSA in 100 mM Na Bicarbonate, pH 8.4 buffer for 1 hr at 37°C or overnight at 4°C.
Initially, the wells on a coated 96-well multi-well plate are labelled in pairs. Two wells are used for each specific DNA target, one well for each target is labelled "A" and the other is labeled "B". The wells are washed with a Wash Buffer composed of IX phosphate buffered saline (PBS), 0.1% Tween ® 20 and 0.1% bovine serum albumin (BSA). The washing is repeated three times.
The appropriate oligonucleotide fragments (specific target DNA) are added to wells labelled "B" using 50 μl of a DNA solution (20 μg/ml) in lx PBS buffer. The streptavidin is allowed to capture the DNA for 2 hrs at room temperature. The DNA solutions are withdrawn with a pipette and discarded. All non-specifically bound DNA is washed away using wash buffer described above.
To begin the actual panning, 1011 particles of phage from a TSAR-9 or TSAR-12 or other suitable library in 100 μl in IX PBS with 0.1% BSA are added to each well labelled "A" and allowed to incubated for 2 hrs at room temperature. To begin the specific adsorption of phage that bind DNA, the adsorbed phage are transferred from wells labelled "A" to wells labelled "B". These are allowed to bind for 4 hrs at room temperature. The unbound phage are carefully pipetted away and each well is washed 4 times with 300 μl wash buffer. Care is taken not to cross
contaminate the wells.
Elution of DNA binding phage is done by the addition of 60 μl 50 mM glycine-HCl pH 2.0 buffer for 10 minutes at 65°C. The eluted phage are transferred to a 60 μl solution of 200 mM sodium phosphate, pH 7.4 to neutralize. One round of panning is now complete.
At this point it is preferred to amplify the phage isolated from DNA coated wells. This population of phage is not a pure population of phage that bind specific DNA target sequences, but rather a population that is substantially enriched for phage that bind to the target sequences. In the present example, four sublibraries are being isolated, one that binds to a NFIL6 site and three that have specificity toward different NF-κB sites. See Section 6.1.1 for a description of the oligonucleotide target ligands for these sublibraries. These sub-libraries are composed of "DNA binding phage" or DB phage.
Each sublibrary of DB phage is amplified, titered and stored, e.g., as described in Kay et al., 1993, Gene 128:59-65. To obtain phage that have the highest affinity for each of the DNA binding targets, three more rounds of panning are carried out in substantially the same fashion as described above. However, since the population of DNA binding phage have been significantly enriched there are many copies of each unique phage in each 1011 aliquot of the amplified sublibrary. Three rounds of additional panning toward each target is carried out without additional amplification of the phage in between adsorption and elution. After the final elution and neutralization, the phage are used to infect E. coli strain DH5αrF' and plated out to obtain substantially pure plaques.
About 24 individual plaques panned against each target sequence are picked and used to grow up a stock of 2 ml of phage. The TSAR insert in each phage is sequenced by the usual methods, e.g., Sanger dideoxy sequencing. Generally one obtains several identical or very similar phage in each group of 24 from one panning experiment. The translation of the DNA sequence (syngene) encoding the TSAR domain within the phage is the peptide sequence responsible for the binding of a given phage to the DNA target sequence. One isolate for each unique peptide encoding sequence is utilized for further characterization of its DNA binding properties.
6.1.3. CHARACTERIZATION OF BINDING PHAGE
The selectivity of a given phage for a target sequence can be determined by any of several means. One method involves the carrying out of a "phage" ELISA utilizing an ELISA kit from Pharmacia
(Product #27-9402-01) composed in part of horseradish peroxidase conjugated sheep anti-M13 antibody. The phage ELISA is carried out as follows:
1. The phage to be tested is grown in appropriate cells for 6 hrs to overnight in 2XYT at 37°C; 2. The cells are spun down and the
supernatant is collected. This supernatant can be stored at 4°C for several days;
3. The wells of microtiter plates are coated with the oligonucleotides the phage is to be tested against. Coating can be done as in the panning methods described above;
4. About 100 μl of blocking solution (1 mg/ml BSA in 100 mM NaHCO3, pH 8.3) is added and the wells are incubated for 1 hr;
5. The liquid is flicked out and the wells are washed in PBS with 0.1 % Tween® 20;
6. 50 μl of phage supernatant is added to the wells;
7. The wells are incubated at room
temperature for 2 hrs;
8. The wells are washed multiple times with PBS with 0.1 % Tween® 20. One wash should be for about 10 minutes;
9. 50 μl of Pharmacia's horseradish peroxidase conjugated sheep anti-M13 IgG (diluted 1:3000 in PBS with 0.1 % Tween® 20 and 1 mg/ml BSA) is added and incubated for 1 hr at room temperature;
10. The wells are washed multiple times with PBS with 0.1 % Tween® 20;
11. 100 μl of ABTS® (2, 2' -Azino-di- [3- ethylbenzthiazdine sulfonate (6)] (0.2 mg/ml) is added;
12. Color develops in 10 to 30 minutes and absorbance at 405 nm is read in a microtiter plate reader.
Thus, by following the instructions provided by the manufacturer and utilizing ABTS® as substrate for the peroxidase, one can detect the amount of phage bound to a well in a multi-well plate in a
quantitative manner. The binding selectivity for a given DNA target sequence of any unique TSAR phage can be rapidly determined by bringing aliquots (108 phage particles) of a particular phage into contact with specific target DNAs immobilized in wells of a
multi-well plate. By using each of the 4 pairs of DNA targets described above in Section 6.1.1,
appropriately immobilized, one can rapidly determine which phage binds specifically to which DNA sequence. A phage that binds to only one target sequence is a highly specific DNA binding phage (HSDB phage). A phage that binds to more than one target sequence is a cross-specific DNA binding phage.
Further characterization of a given peptide displaying phage's ability to bind to a particular target sequence can be determined by carrying out so-called competition experiments routinely used by those skilled in immunoassays. In these assays an aliquot of phage is first brought into contact with diverse pairs of non-biotinylated oligonucleotides under conditions and for a time sufficient to allow any binding to occur. Subsequently each aliquot is added to a well of a multi-well plate coated with a specific DNA target sequence. If the unlabeled competitor DNA is unable to bind to the TSAR domain of the phage, then the phage may bind to the specific DNA target sequence immobilized in the well. The phage bound in the well can be detected and measured by any convenient technique, e.g., use of the horseradish peroxidase conjugated sheep anti-M13 IgG and ABTS® of the phage ELISA described above. If the unlabeled DNA fragment is able to bind to the TSAR domain in the phage, then that phage will be unable to bind to the target DNA immobilized in the well. By varying the concentration of unlabeled DNA in solution one can estimate the relative affinity of a given phage TSAR domain for a specific DNA target as well as make a determination about the actual specificity of a TSAR domain for a specific DNA site. It will be apparent to one skilled in the art that other means of analyzing the HSDB phage exist. It should be noted that the use of the binding competition experiments outlined earlier is very good for doing this as one can get good estimates of binding coefficients as well as dissociation constants of the HSDBs for targets and/or unrelated DNA
sequences. 6.1.4. PHAGE CONTAINING BINDING DOMAINS SPECIFIC
FOR NF-κB AND NF-IL6 BINDING SITES
HSDB phage that recognized the
oligonucleotide formed by the sequences H2κb-U and
H2κB-L (H2κB oligonucleotide, see Section 6.1.1 above) were isolated from an R26 peptide display library.
(See Section 6.9.4 and Figure 9 regarding the R26 library).
The R26 library was screened and panned as described above using "Universal Covalent" multiwell plates with the H2κB oligonucleotide. Four phage clones were isolated that exhibited specific binding to the H2κB oligonucleotide. To examine further the specificity of binding of these clones, they were tested in a phage ELISA (as described above) against the H2κB oligonucleotide and three other
oligonucleotides. The other oligonucleotides that were tested against these four phage were: (1) the oligonucleotide formed by IL6κB-U and IL6κB-L (IL6κB oligonucleotide); (2) the oligonucleotide formed by IL8κB-U and IL8κB-L (IL8κB oligonucleotide); (3) the oligonucleotide formed by NFIL6-U and NFIL6-L (NFIL6 oligonucleotide, see Section 6.1.1).
Figure 4 shows the results of these ELISAs. Clones 1, 2, and 6 all showed strong binding to the H2κB oligonucleotide as compared to their binding to background (the BSA coated plates) . Clone 5 showed less strong, but still about 2.5-fold greater, binding to the H2κB oligonucleotide than to background. This binding on the part of clones 1, 2, 5, and 6 can be contrasted with the binding of m663 and a randomly selected phage from the R26 library, both of which bound the BSA coated plates about as well as they bound the plates coated with the H2kB oligonucleotide.
The exquisite specificity of binding of HSDBs is also evident in Figure 4. Clones 1, 2, 5, and 6 all bound the H2κB oligonucleotide far better than they bound any of the other three
oligonucleotides. This is seen by the much higher ratios of binding to the oligonucleotide coated plates versus binding to the BSA coated plates when the oligonucleotide was the H2κB oligonucleotide rather than any of the other three oligonucleotides.
The oligonucleotide sequences of the random inserts of clones 1, 2, 5, and 6 were determined.
This allowed for the determination of the
corresponding amino acid sequences for the peptides encoded by these inserts. The following were the results obtained:
Clone 1 - SWCTYSGYCRVSSAGTAQRTSVDRDGM (SEQ ID NO: 143)
Clone 2 - RTGNEQPPGSFGRAAGCFHPGCKYMKLN (SEQ
ID NO: 144)
Clone 5 - SDKYFHDIRKYHPAAATSYKTRPDMPST (SEQ ID NO: 145)
Clone 6 - RTGNEQPPGSFGRAAGCFHPGCKYMKLN (SEQ ID NO: 144)
Note that the sequences of clones 2 and 6 are identical. In the discussion that follows, clone 1 is called H2κB-l and clone 2 is called H2κB-2.
HSDB phage that recognized the
oligonucleotide formed by the sequences NFIL6-U and NFIL6-L (NFIL6 oligonucleotide, see Section 6.1.1 above) were isolated from the DC43 peptide display library. (See Section 6.9.6 and Figure 13 regarding the DC43 library).
The DC43 library was screened and panned as described above using "Universal Covalent" multiwell plates with the NFIL6 oligonucleotide. A phage clone (NFIL6-1) was isolated that exhibited specific binding to the NFIL6 oligonucleotide.
The oligonucleotide sequence of the random insert of NFIL6-1 was determined. This allowed for the determination of the corresponding amino acid sequence for the peptide encoded by this insert. The following was the result obtained: NFIL6-1 - REWGVPGAHNRIRDHCNGPRCHAIRTNASHTQHI
SRPPD (SEQ ID NO: 146)
The selectivity of binding of the phage H2κB-l, H2κB-2, and NFIL6-1 toward the three
oligonucleotides H2κB, IL6κB, and NFIL6 was tested by phage ELISA. Phage ELISA were performed as- in Section 6.1.3. Each phage was assayed for its ability to bind to each oligonucleotide following immobilization of that oligonucleotide in the well of a microtiter plate. This binding was compared to the binding of the phage to wells that had been coated with BSA
(bovine serum albumin). As a negative control, the binding of the parental phage m663 to each of the oligonucleotides was also assayed. The results are shown in Figure 14.
Figure 14 shows that libraries of random peptides can be successfully screened to identify and isolate binding domains that specifically bind to specific DNA sequences. Phage NFIL6-1 binds well to the NFIL6 oligonucleotide with some binding to the other two oligonucleotides. Phage H2κB-2 binds only to the target H2κB oligonucleotide. Phage H2κB-1 shows much greater binding to the H2κB oligonucleotide than to the other oligonucleotides.
The target specificity of H2κB-2 was
investigated further by testing its ability to bind to DNA sequences that are variants of the H2κB
oligonucleotide. New DNA oligonucleotides were synthesized; the sequences of these oligonucleotides deviated from the sequence of the H2κB oligonucleotide by only one or two (and in one instance, three) bases.
Oligonucleotides for the upper and lower strands were synthesized. For each pair of upper and lower strands, 20 μg of upper and lower
oligonucleotides were combined in 100 μl of TE buffer supplemented with 200 mM NaCl. Annealing and filling- in was carried out at 65°C for 5 minutes, 42°C for 5 minutes, and 37°C for 15 minutes. The resulting double stranded DNA fragments were diluted in PBS, pH 5.0. 50 μl of the appropriate DNA fragments were added to Costar Universal Covalent microtiter plates as in Section 6.1.2 and incubated overnight at 4°C. Phage ELISA assays were carried out three times for each target DNA using the H2κB-2 phage. The results are shown in Table 8. For each variant DNA target, the binding of H2κB-2 to that target was compared to the binding of H2κB-2 to the H2κB oligonucleotide (wild type (WT) ) and expressed as percent binding compared to the wild type oligonucleotide (% WT).
Figure imgf000148_0001
Inspection of the data of Table 8 reveals that a core group of "critical" residues (those whose mutation results in decreased binding) contributes significantly to the H2κB-2 phage's ability to bind DNA. For example, the. G at position 7, when mutated to T (with no other changes), results in diminished binding (32% of wild type). It is clear, however, that the context of the critical residues is also very important. When the G to T mutation at position 7 is coupled to a G to T mutation at position 8 (see mutant M-4), binding is further decreased to 17% of wild type. Yet when the G to T mutation at position 8 occurs alone, binding is increased to 132% of wild type (see mutant M-4b). A "consensus" DNA fragment which has all the apparent critical residues, but is flanked with a random array of nucleotides, is
virtually unable to bind the H2κB-2 phage clone.
6.1.5. PRODUCTION AND ANALYSIS OF MUTAGENIZED BINDING
PHAGE
For the present invention, the relative specificity of an HSDB for a specific DNA site is more important than the actual affinity of the domain for the DNA site. In gene therapy, the effect of low affinity can be compensated for by increased levels of gene expression within the target cell. However, it is very important that the specificity be high in order to bring about the desired activation or
inhibition of the correct gene and not others.
If, after analysis of the DNA binding phages isolated by the protocol outlined above, it is
desirable to have HSDBs with greater selectivity, then the amino acid sequence encoded by the TSAR domain of the phage having the best properties can be
mutagenized by conventional means known to those skilled in the art. In particular, saturation
mutagenesis is carried out using synthetic
oligonucleotides synthesized from "doped" nucleotide reservoirs. The doping is carried out such that the original peptide sequence is represented only once in 106 unique clones of the mutagenized oligonucleotide. The assembled oligonucleotides are cloned into the parental TSAR vector. Preferably the vector is m663 (Fowlkes et al., 1992, BioTechniques 13:422-427).
m663 is able to make blue plaques when grown in E.
coli stain JM101 or DH5α.F'. A library of greater than 106 is preferred; however a library of 105 is
sufficient to isolate TSAR phage displaying peptide domains with increased selectivity for binding to the target DNA sequence.
Once a DNA binding TSAR mutant library has been constructed and amplified, it can be panned with immobilized target DNA sequences in a manner analogous to that described for the isolation of the initial DNA binding phage. It is preferable, but not necessary, to selectively pan out those phage capable of binding to sequences related to the target DNA sequence.
Preferably, the related sequence is that of another site subject to regulation by the same transcription factor as the site desired to be regulated by the syngene product. Therefore, it is preferable to use four wells for this set of panning and phage
isolations. Well "A" is coated only with
streptavidin; well "B" is coated with a DNA binding target that is totally unrelated to the relevant DNA target; well "C" is coated with a DNA binding target that is related to the relevant DNA target; and well "D" is coated with the relevant DNA target. For the actual panning, an aliquot of the mutant TSAR DNA binding phage (50 μl, 1011 phage/ml) is added first to well "A", incubated for 2 hrs, then transferred to well "B", incubated for 2 hrs, then transferred to well "C" for 2 hrs and finally, transferred to well "D" for 2 hrs. Well "D" is washed 4 times with wash buffer and then eluted as described above. The neutralized phage are used to infect E. coli and stocks of the more specific DNA target binding phage are prepared. From these stocks one repeats another 3 rounds of panning without intervening phage
amplification steps. The phage obtained by this process are called "highly specific DNA binding phage" or HSDB phage.
Another means for blocking the binding of phage capable of binding to sequences related, but not identical, to the target DNA sequence is to add soluble DNA oligonucleotide fragments (to a final concentration of 0.1 μg/ml) to aliquots of the mutant library before panning. The added DNA oligonucleotide fragments bear the sequences related (but not
identical) to the target sequence.
To characterize HSDB phage relative to parental and other DB phage isolated from a TSAR-9 library, one takes advantage of the fact that the TSAR-9 library phage have no lacZ activity, whereas the mutant libraries used to clone the HSDB phage are from a vector that expresses lacZ activity in the appropriate E. coli cell lines. To determine if a mutant binds to the target DNA with more specificity than its parent DB phage, equal amounts of the two phage to be compared are mixed together and then applied to a well containing a target DNA sequence. In addition, an equal amount of the two phages are applied to a well containing another DNA sequence.
After the appropriate washing and elution, the phage recovered are plaqued onto the appropriate E. coli in the presence of X-gal. Ratios of blue to white phage are calculated. Since the mutant phage can convert X-gal to a blue product, one can readily determine which mutant phage have improved DNA binding
specificity relative to DB phage isolated from the TSAR-9 library. The mutants that bind less well to the irrelevant DNA target are selected for
characterization for potential as therapeutic syngene targeting domains.
To determine critical residues for the binding of H2κB-2 phage to its DNA target and to determine if .the affinity or specificity of binding of this phage could be enhanced, a scheme was developed to sample a large number of phage variants based on the peptide encoded by H2κB-2.
Oligonucleotides o8909 and o8545 were synthesized and purified by reverse phase HPLC (see Figure 15). Double stranded DNA fragments were made by annealing 10 μg of each oligonucleotide in 200 μl of IX Sequenase™ buffer (United States Biochemical Corp., Cleveland, OH) with 10 mM DTT and 150 μM of each dNTP. The fill-in reaction was initiated with 3 μl of Sequenase™, Version 2.0 (United States
Biochemical Corp., Cleveland, OH) and carried out at 37°C for 30 minutes. The filled-in, double stranded fragments were phenol/chloroform extracted and ethanol precipitated. The dried pellet was resuspended in 80 μl of TE and digested with Xba I and Xho I (New
England Biolabs, Beverly, MA) according to the
supplier's recommendations. The appropriate sized DNA fragments were purified by polyacrylamide gel
electrophoresis (PAGE). The fragments were cloned into m663 in the usual manner. A library of about 1.5 x 108 phage variants was obtained. This library is called the ME#1 library (See Figure 15). The ME#1 library was panned using the original H2κB
oligonucleotide target as well as with the IL6κB,
IL8κB, and NFIL6 oligonucleotides. A large number of phage were identified that bound specifically to the H2κB oligonucleotide; no phage were identified that bound to any of the other targets.
Twenty-two clones from the ME#1 library that bound the H2«cB oligonucleotide (binders) were selected for further analysis. Also, twenty-six clones were identified that did not have significant ability to bind the H2κB oligonucleotide (non-binders). In addition, random plaques from the ME#1 library were tested by phage ELISA for the ability to bind the H2κB oligonucleotide; about one third demonstrated some binding ability.
The amino acid sequences of the inserts of the binders and non-binders from the ME#1 library were determined. The sequences were analyzed to determine the frequencies at which each amino acid appeared at each position for the binders and for the non-binders. The results are shown in Table 9.
Figure imgf000153_0001
Figure imgf000154_0001
In Table 9, "Residue" indicates the residues in that position in the insert of the original H2κB-2 clone from the amino terminal to the carboxy terminal position; "p" indicates the percentage of clones expected to have the original residue occurring at a given position based on the scheme utilized for synthesizing the oligonucleotides for the ME#1
library; "Actual" indicates the frequency that a specific residue was observed to occur in a specific position.
Table 9 shows that there was no apparent bias in the sequences for both the binders and non- binders in the first 16 residues. However, at
position 17, 100% of the binders have the original cysteine, but only 31% of the non-binders do. For both groups, this is more than the expected frequency of 17%. It appears that this cysteine is critical for the binders, but that it is also selected for in the library as a whole.
There are significant differences between the two groups for residues 18 through 28. While the original residue is clearly favored in the binding class for residues 18-24 and 26, this is not the case for positions 25, 27, and 28. In position 25, the original methionine was observed at less than the expected frequency in both the binders and non-binders and isoleucine was observed at higher than expected frequency in both classes.
Residues 27 and 28 are very informative. For the binders, histidine was observed at position 27 in 73% of the clones, but was never observed at that position in the non-binders. At position 28, lysine was observed in 73% of the binders but in only 12% of the non-binders. Furthermore, the original asparagine was expected at a frequency of 51%, but occurred in only 18% of the binders.
Thus, while the H2κB-2 clone clearly binds well to the H2κB oligonucleotide target, it does not carry the optimal amino acid sequence to do so (see below and Figures 16A and 16B for a further discussion of this point). Most important, it was learned that substituting a histidine for the lysine at position 26 and a lysine for the asparagine at position 28 leads to avid binding of the clones to the target DNA.
Phage stocks were prepared for the binders from the ME#1 library as well as for the original H2κB-2 clone and the stocks were titered by serial dilution. Subsequently, the appropriate dilutions of each phage were analyzed by phage ELISA for binding to the H2κB oligonucleotide. The results are shown in Figures 16A and 16B. Binding is expressed as signal strength (O.D.). Phage having higher relative avidity for the target (as compared to H2κB-2) continue to produce a detectable signal at low concentrations of phage and thus the curves for those phage are shifted to the left as compared to the curve for H2κB-2.
It is readily evident from Figures 16A and 16B that most binders from the ME#1 library have a greater avidity for the target H2κB oligonucleotide than does the original H2κB-2 clone. Of the 22 binders analyzed, 5 are less avid binders than H2κB-2 and many have comparable binding avidity; however, over one third show avidity of more than two orders of magnitude greater than that of H2κB-2. Table 10 shows the amino acid sequences of the binders tested and summarizes their binding avidity.
Figure imgf000156_0001
These results demonstrate that the above strategy for evolving a peptide sequence isolated from a random peptide library towards one with greater binding avidity for its target was highly successful.
A group of the binders from the ME#1 library was tested by phage ELISA for the ability to bind to the same variant H2κB oligonucleotide targets as were described in Table 8. H2κB-2 was similarly tested. In order to compare the binding of these clones, the O.D. for binding to the original H2κB oligonucleotide target (WT) was normalized to 100%, Table 11 shows the results.
Figure imgf000157_0001
All of the binders that had previously been shown to have increased avidity for the H2κB
oligonucleotide (as compared to H2κB-2) maintained the same relative target specificity as H2κB-2. However, some binders with less avidity for the H2κB
oligonucleotide had increased avidity for certain of the variant H2κB oligonucleotide targets.
Since the critical residues identified in the first round of molecular evolution were at the carboxy terminal end of the expressed peptide insert, it was not possible to rule out some contribution from residues in the phage pIII protein to the DNA binding activity. A scheme was developed to construct
additional molecular evolution libraries for panning with the H2κB oligonucleotide. This was done to ensure that the critical DNA binding residues would be able to function in the context of other gene
sequences, e.g., nuclear localization sequences, transcriptional activation sequences, for constructing a functional syngene directed to the regulation of the activity of a gene with H2κB sequences.
Two libraries were constructed. Molecular evolution library #2a (the ME#2a library) contained the critical residues as a fixed core flanked by 10 random residues on each side. Molecular evolution library #2b (the ME#2b library) was constructed in a similar manner, but with a smaller group of core residues. Specifically, the ME#2b library lacks the initial arginine, serine, glycine, and arginine found within the core of the ME#2a library. In addition, the core of the ME#2b library was flanked with 12 random residues on each side. Figures 17A and 17B summarize the construction of the ME#2a and ME#2b libraries.
The ME#2a and ME#2b libraries were panned using the H2κB oligonucleotide as ligand. A number of clones were isolated as binders from the ME#2a and ME#2b libraries. Phage stocks were prepared for the binders from the ME#2a and ME#2b libraries as well as for the original H2κB-2 clone and the stocks were titered by serial dilution. Subsequently, the
appropriate dilutions of each phage were analyzed by phage ELISA for binding to the H2κB oligonucleotide. The results are shown in Figure 18. Binding is expressed as signal strength (O.D.). Phage having higher relative avidity for the target (as compared to H2κB-2) continue to produce a detectable signal at low concentrations of phage and thus the curves for those phage are shifted to the left as compared to the curve for H2κB-2.
While many clones from the ME#2a and ME#2b libraries did not have enhanced binding activity as compared to H2κB-2, it is apparent that a significant number have an apparent avidity two to three orders of magnitude greater than that of H2κB-2. However, none of the clones from the ME#2a or ME#2b libraries had an avidity as great as that of clone 959496-10 from the ME#1 library.
Table 12 shows the amino acid sequences of the inserts of the binders from the ME#2a and ME#2b libraries as well as the inserts of clone 959496-10 and H2κB-2.
Figure imgf000159_0001
It can be seen from Table 12 that certain residues are highly favored in the sequences flanking the critical core residues. This is particularly apparent in the clones from the ME#2b library which lacked the initial arginine, serine, glycine, and arginine residues found in the core of the ME#2a library. In all clones from the ME#2b library that bound well to the target DNA there are charged
residues in the four residues upstream of the core.
6.2. ISOLATION OF HSDBs FOR GATA
TRANSCRIPTION FACTOR BINDING SITES
The methods described in Section 6.1 and its subsections above for the isolation of HSDBs for NF-κB and NF-IL6 binding sices can be easily modified to isolate HSDBs for GATA transcription factor binding sites.
The major modification consists in the use of DNA target sequences from GATA transcription factor binding sites rather than DNA target sequences from
NF-κB or NF-IL6 binding sites. For example, for the GATA-2 site in the human preproendothelin-1 gene, the target DNA sequence is 5' ctggccTTATCTccggct (SEQ ID NO: 180) for the upper strand and 5 ' agccggAGATAAggccag (SEQ ID NO: 181) for the lower strand (Dorfman et al., 1992, J. Biol. Chem. 267:1279-1285).
The human gastric (H+ + K+) ATPase gene is responsible for maintaining the large (about 5 units) pH difference between the cytoplasm and gastric lumen in the stomach. It has been proposed that regulation of the human gastric (H+ + K+) ATPase gene would be useful in the treatment of gastric ulcers (Maeda,
1994, J. Biochem. 115:6-14). It would be useful to have syngenes that encode HSDBs that could be used to modulate the activity of the human gastric (H+ + K+) ATPase gene. Such HSDBs can be obtained by screening random peptide libraries with the an oligonucleotide formed from an upper strand of 5 'gacatGGGGGGATCTGGgca (SEQ ID NO: 182) and a lower strand of
5'tgcCCAGATCCCCCCatgtc (SEQ ID NO: 183). This
oligonucleotide represents a sequence similar to that of bindings site for the GATA-GT family of
transcription factors (Maeda et al., 1990, J. Biol. Chem. 265:9027-9032). For the GATA-3 site in the human T cell receptor δ gene enhancer, the target DNA sequence is 5' gacactTGATAAcagaaa (SEQ ID NO: 184) for the upper strand and 5' tttctgTTATCAagtgtc (SEQ ID NO: 185) for the lower strand (Ko et al., 1991, Mol. Cell. Biol. 11:2778-2784).
As for NF-κB and NF-IL6 transcription factor binding site HSDBs, the DNA target sequences for the isolation of GATA transcription factor binding site HSDBs can be monovalent or multivalent. Panning, amplification, and analysis of the isolated phage are done as for NF-κB or NF-IL6. Mutagenesis to produce HSDBs of greater selectivity can also be done as for NF-κB or NF-IL6.
6.3. ISOLATION OF HSDBs FOR AP-1
TRANSCRIPTION FACTOR BINDING SITES
The transcription factor AP-1, which
consists of a heterodimer of the products of the c-fos and c-jun proto-oncogenes, is involved in the
transcriptional regulation of a number of genes. For example, an AP-1 binding site is a component of the TPA (12-O-tetradeconyl-phorbol-13-acetate) -responsive enhancer element that is involved in conferring serumresponsive transcriptional activity to many genes
(Bohmann et al., 1987, Science 238:1386-1392; Angel et al., 1988, Nature 332:166-171). It would be of great value to have syngenes that encoded products that could specifically bind to AP-1 sites, since this would allow for the regulation of many genes that are involved in the growth response of cells.
The methods described in Section 6.1 and its subsections above for the isolation of HSDBs for NF-κB and NF-IL6 binding sites can be easily modified to isolate HSDBs for AP-1 transcription factor binding sites. The major modification consists in the use of DNA target sequences from AP-1 transcription factor binding sites rather than DNA target sequences from NF-i-B or NF-IL6 binding sites. In general, the target oligonucleotides will have the following sequences: 5'xxxxxTGA(G/C)T(C/A)Axxxxx (SEQ ID NO: 186) for the upper strand and 5 'xxxxxT(G/T)AC/G)TCAxxxxx (SEQ ID NO: 187) for the lower strand. See Gambari and
Nastruzzi, 1994, Biochemical Pharmacology 4:599-610. Where two nucleotides are shown in parenthesis, the choice of which nucleotide to use will depend upon which specific AP-1 binding site it is desired to isolate an HSDB for. Similarly, the choice of which nucleotide to use in the positions marked by an x will depend upon the nucleotide at those positions in the specific AP-1 binding site it is desired to isolate an HSDB for.
As for NF-κB and NF-IL6 transcription factor binding site HSDBs, the DNA target sequences for the isolation of AP-1 transcription factor binding site HSDBs can be monovalent or multivalent. Panning, amplification, and analysis of the isolated phage are done as shown above for NF-κB or NF-IL6. Mutagenesis to produce HSDBs of greater selectivity can also be done as for NF-κB or NF-IL6.
6.4. ISOLATION OF HSDBs FOR ATF
TRANSCRIPTION FACTOR BINDING SITES
The methods described in Section 6.1 and its subsections above for the isolation of HSDBs for NF-κB and NF-IL6 binding sites can be easily modified to isolate HSDBs for ATF transcription factor binding sites.
The major modification consists in the use of DNA target sequences from ATF transcription factor binding sites rather than DNA target sequences from NF-κB or
NF-IL6 binding sites. In general, the target oligonucleotides will have the following sequences: 5'xxxxxTGACG(C/T) (C/A) (G/A)xxxxx (SEQ ID NO: 188) for the upper strand and 5'xxxxxT(G/T)AC/G)TCAxxxxx (SEQ ID NO: 189) for the lower strand. See Gambari and Nastruzzi, 1994, Biochemical Pharmacology 4:599-610. Where two nucleotides are shown in parenthesis, the choice of which nucleotide to use will depend upon which specific ATF binding site it is desired to isolate an HSDB for. Similarly, the choice of which nucleotide to use in the positions marked by an x will depend upon the nucleotide at those positions in the specific ATF binding site it is desired to isolate an HSDB for.
As for NF-κB and NF-IL6 transcription factor binding site HSDBs, the DNA target sequences for the isolation of ATF transcription factor binding site HSDBs can be monovalent or multivalent. Panning, amplification, and analysis of the isolated phage are done as shown above for NF-κB or NF-IL6. Mutagenesis to produce HSDBs of greater selectivity can also be done as for NF-κB or NF-IL6.
6.5. ISOLATION OF HSDBs FOR ETS
TRANSCRIPTION FACTOR BINDING SITES
The methods described in Section 6.1 and its subsections above for the isolation of HSDBs for NF-κB and NF-IL6 binding sites can be easily modified to isolate HSDBs for binding sites for members of the Ets family of transcription factors.
The major modification consists in the use of DNA target sequences from specific Ets transcription factor binding sites rather than DNA target sequences from NF-κB or NF-IL6 binding sites. In general, the target oligonucleotides will have sequences determined by the specific nucleotide sequence of the specific Ets transcription factor binding site that it is desired to regulate. For example, if it is desired to isolate an HSDB specific for the stromelysin gene, the target oligonucleotide will have an upper strand of
5 'GCAGGAAGCA (SEQ ID NO: 190) and the lower strand will be 5'TGCTTCCTGC (SEQ ID NO: 191). This
oligonucleotide corresponds to an Ets binding site in the stromelysin promoter (Waslyk et al., 1993, Eur. J. Biochem. 211:7-18).
If it is desired to isolate an HSDB specific for the T cell receptor or gene, the target
oligonucleotide will have an upper strand of
5'AGAGGATGTG (SEQ ID NO: 192) and the lower strand will be 5'CACATCCTCT(SEQ ID NO: 193). This
oligonucleotide corresponds to an Ets binding site in the T cell receptor or gene promoter (Waslyk et al., 1993, Eur. J. Biochem. 211:7-18).
If it is desired to isolate an HSDB specific for the c-fos gene, the target oligonucleotide will have an upper strand of 5'ACAGGATGTC (SEQ ID NO: 194) and the lower strand will be 5'GACATCCTGT (SEQ ID NO: 195). This oligonucleotide corresponds to an Ets binding site in the serum response element of the cfos gene promoter (Waslyk et al., 1993, Eur. J.
Biochem. 211:7-18).
As for NF-κB and NF-IL6 transcription factor binding site HSDBs, the DNA target sequences for the isolation of Ets transcription factor binding site HSDBs can be monovalent or multivalent. Panning, amplification, and analysis of the isolated phage are done as shown above for NF-κB or NF-IL6. Mutagenesis to produce HSDBs of greater selectivity can also be done as for NF-κB or NF-IL6. 6.6. ISOLATION OF BINDING DOMAINS
SPECIFIC FOR LUMENAL PROTEINS OF THE ENDOPLASTIC RETICULUM
To isolate binding domains specific for lumenal proteins of the endoplasmic reticulum, use is made of the conserved tetrapeptide KDEL (SEQ ID NO: 116), which is found at the carboxy terminus of such proteins. Libraries such as, for example, the TSAR libraries described herein, are screened with a synthetic peptide ligand of the following sequence: KDELXXXXXX (SEQ ID NO: 196), where the identity of the positions marked with an X are determined by the specific amino acids at those positions in the
specific lumenal proteins for which it is desired to isolate a binding domain.
The synthetic peptides can be synthesized by any of several well known methods in the art.
Panning, amplification, and analysis of the isolated phage are done in a manner that is broadly similar to the manner in Sections 6.1.2 and 6.1.3, with the difference that the ligand used is a peptide rather than an oligonucleotide. Methods of screening are disclosed in Sections 5.2 and 6.1.2. Alternatively, any well known method of screening a peptide library using a peptide as a ligand may be used.
6.7. ISOLATION OF BINDING DOMAINS
SPECIFIC FOR INTEGRAL MEMBRANE PROTEINS OF THE TRANS GOLGI NETWORK
To isolate binding domains specific for integral membrane proteins of the trans Golgi network, use is made of the tetrapeptide YQRL (SEQ ID NO: 117), which has been found to be necessary and sufficient to for the targeting of membrane proteins to the trans
Golgi network (Bos et al., 1993, EMBO J. 12:2219-2228; Humphrey et al., 1993, J. Cell Biol. 120:1123-1135).
Libraries such as, for example, the TSAR libraries described herein, are screened with a synthetic peptide ligand of the following sequence: XXXYQRLXXX (SEQ ID NO: 197), where the identity of the positions marked with an X are determined by the specific amino acids at those positions in the specific proteins for which it is desired to isolate a binding domain.
The synthetic peptides can be synthesized by any of several well known methods in the art.
Panning, amplification, and analysis of the isolated phage are done in a manner that is broadly similar to the manner in Sections 6.1.2 and 6.1.3, with the difference that the ligand used is a peptide rather than an oligonucleotide. Methods of screening are disclosed in Sections 5.2 and 6.1.2. Alternatively, any well known method of screening a peptide library using a peptide as a ligand may be used.
6.8. BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY OF SYNGENE-ENCODED PRODUCTS THAT BIND TO THE NF-IL6 AND NF-xB SITES
In order to demonstrate the biological activity and utility of the HSDB-containing syngenes, one can exploit the observation of Stein and Baldwin, 1993, Mol. Cell. Bio. 13:7191-7198 that there is a functional and physical association of the NF-κB family members with NF-IL6 (also known as C/EBP/3) family members. The interaction of NF-κB with NF-IL6 is such that, when both transcription factors are expressed, promoters with only NF-κB binding sites are inhibited but promoters with both NF-κB and NF-IL6 binding sites are synergiεtically stimulated. NF-κB and NF-IL6 are activated by important inflammatory cytokines such as interleukin-1 and IL-6. Therefore, the interactions between NF-κB and NF-IL6 are likely to be involved in T-cell activation and the
acute-phase response. Several genes having promoters that have closely spaced NF-κB and NF-IL6 binding sites have been cloned. Examples are the IL-6 and the IL-8 genes.
Genes such as IL-6 and IL-8 that have both NF-IL6 and NF-κB sites are transcriptionally activated by the induction and expression of those transcription factors together. In addition, genes such as the MHC class I genes (for example H-2Kb) that have only an NF-κB site (and no NF-IL6 site) are transcriptionally antagonized by the expression of NF-IL6 and NF-κB together. They are, however, transcriptionally activated by the induction and expression of NF-κB alone. These observations allow one to readily determine the action of the syngenes that bind to the NF-IL6 and NF-κB sites when the appropriate syngenes are expressed in tissue culture cells along with appropriate reporter gene constructs.
The basic assay involves the introduction of reporter constructs, syngene constructs and plasmids expressing one or more transcriptional factors.
Reporter constructs: 1) Three copies of the
H2KB binding site fused upstream of a minimal fos promoter linked to the chloramphenicol
acetyltransferase (CAT) gene (called pMHC-CAT herein, see Scheinman et al., 1993, Mol. Cell. Biol. 13:6089- 6101)); 2) Plasmid pNFIL-6-CAT, which has a single copy of an oligonucleotide with a NFIL-6 site derived from the c-fos serum response element (5'- agcttgATTAGGACATcg3' (SEQ ID NO: 198) (binding site printed in upper case) in a Hindlll-BamHI-cut pTATA- CAT (referred to as C/EBPbeta-TATA-chloramphenicol acetyltransferase reporter plasmid by Stein et al., 1993, Mol. Cell. Biol. 13:3964-3974); 3) Plasmid pIL- 8-CAT, a IL-8 wild-type reporter constuct generated by cloning a single copy of an oligonucleotide
encompassing the bp -97 to -69 region of the human IL- 8 gene (5'-agcttcatCAGTTGCAAATCGTGGAATTTCCTctg-3' (SEQ ID NO: 199) (binding sites for NF-IL6 and NFκB are in boldface type) into Hindlll-BamHI-cut TATA-CAT.
All transcription factor expression constructs used are described in Stein et al. (1993, Mol. Cell. Biol. 13:3964-3974). They are : pCMV4T-p65, which contains the cDNAs encoding human NF-κB p65; and plasmid pCMV4T-rC/EBPbeta, which contains a cDNA encoding the rat C/EBPbeta (also known as NF-IL6).
Transfection of cells and analysis of CAT activity are done as follows. All cell lines are cultured in Iscove's Dulbecco modified Eagle medium supplemented with 7.5% fetal calf serum and
antibiotics. Mouse F9 embryonal carcinoma cells are transiently transfected by the calcium phospate method (Graham et al., 1973, Virology 52:456-467) (also see
Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, section 9.1.1, Supplement 14, 1990) . Monkey COS cells are
transiently transfected with plasmid DNA by the DEAE- dextran method (Kawai et al., 1984, Mol. Cell. Biol. 4:1172-1174) (see also Current Protocols, section 9.2.1, Supplement 14, 1987). Chlorampenicol- acetyltransferase (CAT) enzymatic activity was assayed as previously described using the Phase-Extraction Assay (see Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Supplement 14, section 9.6.6), less preferably a chromatographic assay for CAT may be used (see Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Supplement 14, section 9.6.3).
The following Tables 13 and 14 outline the different combinations of experiments that are used to verify the biological effect of each of the types of syngenes that are the subject of this specific
embodiment of the invention. When examining these tablaε, it should be kept in mind that p65 is NF-κB and C/EBP is an NF-IL6.
Figure imgf000169_0001
Figure imgf000170_0001
It will be readily apparent from the results indicated in Tables 13 and 14 that the syngenes that bind to NF-IL6 and NF-κB sites are expected to selectively block the effect of the transcription factors NF-IL6 and NF-κB. In the case of the MHC-I gene reporter construct, only the HSDB directed toward the NF-κB site of the MHC gene regulates the MHC promoter element since that promoter has no NF-IL6 site and only one NF-κB site, specifically the one called NF-κB-MHC. The MHC gene promoter in this reporter is only activated by p65, the gene product of the NF-κB family gene known as Rel A. The MHC gene promoter has no NF-IL6 site and thus is not responsive to the co-expression of the NF-IL6 protein. Syngenes constructed with HSDB domains directed against the NF-κB-MHC site can antagonize the activity of p65; but syngenes constructed with HSDB domains directed against other NF-κB sites have little or no effect on the transcription of the MHC reporter. This demonstrates one of the advantages of the use of syngenes. Syngenes have the capacity to discriminate between closely related binding sites of the same transcription factor.
Furthermore, it is apparent from the expected results in Tables 13 and 14, that those genes that have both NF-κB sites and NF-IL6 sites are partially
responsive to the respective transcription factors and that the combination of p65 and NF-IL6 leads to
synergistic activation of the, IL-6 and IL-8 reporter gene constructs. It is also important to note that both of these reporter constructs are expected to respond poorly to the NF-IL6 protein when the syngene that expresses the HSDB directed against the NF-κB site is co-expressed. The synergism between the C/EBP/S and p65 protein is partially blocked by the HSDB-NF-IL-6 gene product or the HSDB-NFκB-IL6 gene product. However, the HSDB-NFκB-IL8 or HSDB-NFκB-MHC gene products should have little or no effect on the expression of the IL-6 reporter gene expression.
Thus, it is clear that the HSDB syngene
products are expected to specifically and predictably suppress the expression of those gene promoters
containing sites homologous to those of the respective target DNA fragments. 6.9. EXAMPLE: PREPARATION OF TSAR LIBRARIES
TSAR libraries have been prepared as set forth below.
6.9.1. PREPARATION OF THE TSAR-9 LIBRARY 6.9.1.1. SYNTHESIS AND ASSEMBLY OF OLIGONUCLEOTIDES
Figure 5 shows the nucleotides and the assembly scheme used in construction of the TSAR-9 library. As can be seen, the TSAR-9 library contains peptides with the amino acid sequence S (R/S)X18PGX18SR (SEQ ID NO: 200), in which X is an unpredictable amino acid. The
oligonucleotides were synthesized with an applied
Biosystems 380a synthesizer (Foster City, CA) , and the full-length oligonucleotides were purified by HPLC.
Five micrograms of each of the pairs of oligonucleotides were mixed together in buffer (50 mM KCl, 10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.3, 0.001 % gelatin, 1.5 mM MgCl2) with 2 mM dNTP's, and 20 units of Taq DNA
polymerase. The assembly reaction mixtures were
incubated at 72°C for 30 seconds and then 30°C for 30 seconds; this cycle was repeated 60 times. It should be noted that the assembly reaction is not PCR, since a denaturation step was not used. Fill-in reactions were carried out in a thermal cycling device (Ericomp,
LaJolla, CA) with the following protocol: 30 seconds at 72°C, 30 seconds at 30°C, repeated for 60 cycles. The lower temperature allows for annealing of the six base complementary region between the two sets of the
oligonucleotide pairs. The reaction products were phenol/chloroform extracted and ethanol precipitated.
Greater than 90% of the nucleotides were found to have been converted to double stranded synthetic
oligonucleotides.
After resuspension in 300 μl of buffer containing 10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.5, 1 mM EDTA (TE buffer), the ends of the oligonucleotide fragments were cleaved with Xba I and Xho I (New England BioLabs, Beverly, MA) according to the supplier's recommendations. The
fragments were purified by 4% agarose gel
electrophoresis. The band of correct size was removed and electroeluted, concentrated by ethanol precipitation and resuspended in 100 μl TE buffer. Approximately 5% of the assembled oligonucleotides can be expected to have internal Xho I or Xba I sites; however, only the fulllength molecules were used in the ligation step of the assembly scheme. The concentration of the synthetic oligonucleotide fragments was estimated by comparing the intensity on an ethidium bromide stained gel run along with appropriate quantitated markers. All DNA
manipulations not described in detail were performed according to Sambrook, Fritsch and Maniatis, 1989,
Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, 2d. ed. Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press.
To demonstrate that the assembled enzyme digested oligonucleotides could be ligated, the
synthesized DNA fragments were examined for their ability to self-ligate. The digested fragments were incubated overnight at 18°C in ligation buffer with T4 DNA ligase. When the ligation products were examined by agarose gel electrophoresis, a concatamer of bands was visible upon ethidium bromide staining. As many as five different unit length concatamer bands (i.e., dimer, trimer, tetramer, pentamer, hexamer) were evident, suggesting that the synthesized DNA fragments were efficient substrates for ligation.
6.9.1.2. CONSTRUCTION OF VECTORS The construction of the M13 derived phage vectors useful for expressing a TSAR library has been recently described (Fowlkes et al., 1992, BioTechniques, 13:422-427). To express the TSAR-9 library, an M13 derived vector, m663, was constructed as described in Fowlkes et al. (id) . Figure 6 illustrates the m663 vector containing the pIII gene having a c-myc-epitope, i.e., as a stuffer fragment, introduced at the mature N- terminal end, flanked by Xho I and Xba I restriction sites (see also, Figure 1 of. Fowlkes et al., (id. ) ) .
6.9.2. EXPRESSION OF THE TSAR-9 LIBRARY The synthesized oligonucleotides were then ligated to Xho I and Xba I double-digested m663 RF DNA containing the pIII gene (Fowlkes, supra) by incubation with ligase overnight at 12°C. More particularly, 50 ng of vector DNA and 5 ng of the digested synthesized DNA were mixed together in 50 μl ligation buffer (50 mM Tris, pH 8.0, 10 mM MgCl2, 20 mM DTT, 0.1 mM ATP) with T4 DNA ligase. After overnight ligation at 12°C, the DNA was concentrated by ethanol precipitation and washed with 70% ethanol. The ligated DNA was then introduced into E.
coli (DH5α.F'; GIBCO BRL, Gaithersburg, MD) by
electroporation.
A small aliquot of the electroporated cells was plated and the number of plaques counted to determine that 108 recombinants were generated. The library of E. coli cells containing recombinant vectors was plated at a high density (-400,000 per 150 mM petri plate) for a single amplification of the recombinant phage. After 8 hr, the recombinant bacteriophage were recovered by washing each plate for 18 hr with SMG buffer (100 mM NaCl, 10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.5, 10 mM MgCl2, 0.05% gelatin) and after the addition of glycerol to 50% were frozen at -80°C. The TSAR-9 library thus formed had a working titer of ~2 x 1011 pfu/ml.
6.9.3. PREPARATION OF TSAR-12 LIBRARY Figure 7 shows the formula for the synthetic oligonucleotides and the assembly scheme used in the construction of the TSAR-12 library. As can be seen, the TSAR-12 library contains peptides with the amino acid sequence S (S/T)X10ΦGδX10TR (SEQ ID NO: 201), in which X is an unpredictable amino acid, Φ is S, R, G, C, or W, and δ is V, A, D, E, or G. As shown in Figure 7, the TSAR-12 library was prepared in substantially the same manner as the TSAR-9 library described in Section 6.9.1 and its subsections above with the following exceptions: (1) each of the variant non-predioted oligonucleotide
sequences, i.e., NNB, was 30 nucleotides in length, rather than 54 nucleotides; (2) the restriction sites included at the 5' termini of the variant, non-predicted sequences were Sal I and Spe I, rather than Xho I and Xba I; and (3) the invariant sequence at the 3' termini to aid annealing of the two strands was GCGGTG rather than CCAGGT (5' to 3').
After synthesis, including numerous rounds of annealing and chain extension in the presence of dNTP's and Taq DNA polymerase, and purification as described above in Section 6.9.1.1, the synthetic double stranded oligonucleotide fragments were digested with Sal I and Spe I restriction enzymes and ligated with T4 DNA ligase to the nucleotide sequence encoding the M13 pIII gene contained in the m663 vector to yield a library of
TSAR-12 expression vectors as described in Section 6.9.3. The ligated DNA was then introduced into E. coli (DH5αF'; GIBCO BRL, Gaithersburg, MD) by electroporation. The library of E. coli cells were plated at high density (~400,000 per 150 mm petri plate) for amplification of the recombinant phage. After about 8 hr, the recombinant bacteriophage were recovered by washing for 18 hr with SMG buffer (100 mM NaCl, 10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.5, 10 mM MgCl2, 0.05% gelatin) and after the addition of glycerol to 50% were frozen at -80°C.
The TSAR-12 library thus formed had a working titer of ~ 2 x 101 1pfu/ml.
The inserted synthetic oligonucleotides for each of the TSAR libraries, described in Section 6.9 above, had a potential coding complexity of 2036 (~1047) and since ~1014 molecules were used in each transformation experiment, each member of these TSAR libraries should be unique. After plate amplification the library solution or stock has 104 copies of each member/ml.
6.9.4. PREPARATION OF THE TSAR-13 AND
TSAR-14 SEMIRIGID LIBRARIES
The following example illustrates yet another embodiment of a TSAR library expressing peptides that can form semirigid structures. The coding scheme which encodes the variant residues in the oligonucleotides of this embodiment differs from that of the linear libraries described hereinabove. 6.9.4.1. SYNTHESIS AND ASSEMBLY OF
OLIGONUCLEOTIDES
Figure 8 shows the nucleotides used in the
TSAR-13 and TSAR-14 libraries and the assembly scheme used in construction of the TSAR-13 library. The same oligonucleotide design was used for both TSAR-13 and
TSAR-14 libraries. TSAR-13 was expressed in phagemid; TSAR-14 was expressed in phage. The oligonucleotides were designed to contain invariant nucleotides flanking contiguous sequences of unpredicted nucleotides. In this example, the single stranded nucleotide sequences when converted to double stranded oligonucleotides encode:
(a) 5' to 3' Restriction site- cysteine, glycine - (NNK)8 - Gly-Cys-Gly- (NNK)8 - Complementary site Gly-Cys-Gly; and (b) 3' to 5' Complementary site Gly-Cys-Gly - (NNM) 8 - Gly-Cys-Gly-Pro-Pro-Gly - Restriction site. Thus the library is designed to have semirigid binding domains each containing four cysteine residues that will form disulfide bonds in an oxidizing environment and adopt cloverleaf configurations. The additional proline residues were included to form a kink between the TSAR binding domain and the pIII or effector domain. In the design of the single stranded nucleotides, all 4 possible codons for glycine were utilized to help insure that the two single stranded nucleotides would anneal at the intended complementary glycine, cysteine, glycine
encoding nucleotide sequence.
The oligonucleotides were synthesized with an Applied Biosystems 380a synthesizer (Foster City, CA) and the full length oligonucleotides were purified by gel electrophoresis.
To anneal the. pairs of oligonucleotides, 200 pmol of each of the pair of oligonucleotides were mixed together in Sequenase™ buffer (40 mM Tris pH 7.5, 20 mM MgCl2, 50 mM NaCl) with 0.1 ug/ml BSA, 10 mM DTT in a total volume of 200 ul. The mixture was incubated at 42°C for 5 minutes, then at 37°C for 15 minutes. Fill-in reactions were carried out by adding all four dNTPs to a concentration of 0.2 mM each and 20 units of Sequenase ™, [(Version 2.0 (U.S. Biochemical, Cleveland, Ohio)] and incubating for 37°C for 15 minutes. Residual polymerase activity was heat inactivated by a 2 hour incubation at 65°C. After cooling, the ends of the oligonucleotide fragments were cleaved, by adding restriction buffer (10 mM Tris pH 7.5, 50 mM NaCl, 10 nM MgCl2), an additional 0.1 μg/ml BSA and an additional 2 mM DTT along with 300 units each of Xba I, Xho I. Three control reactions were run simultaneously. In the first control aliquot, i.e., a 10 μl aliquot of the fill in reaction, the first restriction enzyme (Xba I) was added to the same final concentration (units/μl). To the second control aliquot, the other restriction enzyme (Xho I) was added. No restriction enzyme was added to the third control
aliquot. All samples were incubated for 2 hours at the temperature recommended by the restriction enzyme
manufacturer. The cleaved oligonucleotides were
extracted with an equal volume 1:1 phenol/chloroform, and ethanol precipitated. Fragments were purified on a 15% non-denaturing preparatory polyacrylamide gel in IX TBE. The band of the correct size (as determined by comparison with control samples) was removed, isolated, ethanol precipitated and resuspended in TE buffer.
The recovered oligonucleotides can be inserted into an appropriate phage vector as described above, or into an appropriate phagemid vector, as described in Section 6.10. 6.9.5. PREPARATION OF THE R26 LIBRARY
The R26 expression library was constructed essentially as described for the TSAR-9 library in Section 6.9 and its subsections, except for the
modifications depicted in Figure 9. The oligonucleotide assembly process depicted in Figure 9 results in
expression of peptides with the following amino acid sequence:
S (S/R) X12π AδX12SR, where π = S , P , T or A; and δ = V, A, D, E OR G (SEQ ID NO : 202 )
6.9.6. PREPARATION OF THE DC43 LIBRARY
The DC43 expression library was constructed essentially as described for the TSAR-9 library in
Section 6.9.1 and its subsections, except for the
modifications depicted in Figure 13. The oligonucleotide assembly process depicted in Figure 13 results in
expression of peptides with the following amino acid sequence:
HSS (S/R) X20GCGX20SRIEGRARPSR (SEQ ID NO : 203 )
6.10. CONSTRUCTION OF VECTOR PDAFl
The vector pDAFl is constructed as follows: To create the phagemid vector pDAFl, a segment of the M13 gene III was transferred into the Bluescript II SK+ vector (GenBank #52328). This vector replicates autonomously in bacteria, has an ampicillin drug
resistance marker, and the fl origin of replication which allows the vector under certain conditions to be
replicated and packaged into M13 particles. These M13 viral particles would carry both wild-type pIII molecules encoded by helper phage and recombinant pIII molecules encoded by the phagemid. These phagemids express only one to two copies of the recombinant pIII molecule and have been termed monovalent display systems (See Garrard et al., 1991, Biotechnol. 9:1373-1377). Rather than express the entire gene III, this vector has a truncated form of gene III [See generally, Lowman et al., 1991 (Biochemistry 30:10832-10838) which demonstrated that human growth hormone was more accessible to monoclonal antibodies when it was displayed at the NH2-terminus of a truncated form of pIII protein than at the NH2-terminus of the full-length form]. In the phagemid vector
constructed here, the TSAR oligonucleotides are expressed at the mature terminus of a truncated pIII molecule, which corresponds to amino acids 198 to 406 of the mature pIII molecules.
The preferred vector is pDAF, which encodes amino acids 198-406 of the pIII protein, a short
polylinker within the pIII gene and the linker gly-gly- gly-ser between the polylinker and the pIII molecule.
This plasmid expresses pIII from the promoter and
utilizes the PelB leader sequence for direction of pIII's compartmentalization to the bacterial membrane for proper M13 viral assembly.
A pair of oligonucleotides were designed
CGTTACGAATTCTTAAGACTCCTTATTACGCA (SEQ ID NO: 204) and CGTTAGGATCCCCATTCGTTTCTGAATATCAA (SEQ ID NO: 205) to amplify a portion (aa 198-406) of the pIII gene from M13mp8 DNA via PCR. Since these oligonucleotides carried Bam HI and Eco RI sites near the 5' termini, the PCR product was then digested with Bam HI and Eco RI, ligated with pBluescript II SK+ DNA digested with the same enzymes, and introduced into E. coli by transformation. After the recombinant was identified, an additional double-stranded DNA segment was cloned into it, encoding the PelB signal leader with an upstream ribosome binding site. This segment was prepared by PCR from E. coli DNA using the oligonucleotides
GCGACGCGACGAGCTCGACTGCAAATTCTATTTCAA (SEQ ID NO: 206) and CTAATGTCTAGAAAGCTTCTCGAGCCCTGCAGCTGCACCTGGGCCATCGACTGG
(SEQ ID NO: 207). The termini of the PCR product
introduced a short polylinker of Pst I, Xho I, Hind III, and Xba I sites into the vector. The Xho I and Xba I sites were positioned so that assembled TSAR oligonucleotides could be cloned and expressed in the same reading frame as in the phage vectors described above. The third and final segment of DNA introduced into the vector, encoded the linker sequence GGGGS (SEQ ID NO: 56) between the polylinker and gene III. This linker matches a repeated sequence motif of the pIII molecule and was included in the chimeric gene to create a swivel point separating the expressed peptide and the pIII protein molecule. This vector has been named pDAFl. Figure 10A schematically illustrates the pDAFl phagemid vector.
6.10.1. CONSTRUCTION OF VECTORS PDAF2 AND PDAF3
The vectors pDAF2 and pDAF3 are prepared from pDAFl but differ from the parent vector in that each contains the c-myc encoding sequence at the NH2 and COOH terminal sides, respectively, of the polylinker of Pst I, Xho I, Hind III and Xba I restriction sites. Figure 10B and C schematically illustrate the phagemid vectors pDAF2 and pDAF3. The pDAF2 and pDAF3 vectors are constructed as shown schematically in Figure 10D.
6.10.2. CONSTRUCTION OF THE PHAGEMID VECTORS
The construction of the phagemid vector pDAFl is described in Section 6.10. This vector was modified to include the full length pIII gene by inserting the amino-terminus of the pIII gene from m666. Both pDAF3 and m666 were cut with AlwN I, and Xba I, and a 0.7 kb fragment was transferred from m666 to pDAF3 to generate the vector pFLP3.
6.11. EXPRESSION OF THE TSAR-13 PHAGEMID LIBRARY
The synthesized oligonucleotides were ligated to Xba I, Xho I double-digested pFLP3 DNA, electroporated into XLl blue E. coli . An aliquot was plated and the titer was determined to be 8 x 107 total colonies. The entire library was plated on ampicillin plates. To express the TSAR-13 library, 7 x 1010 cells were added to 30 ml of 2xYT media and incubated for 30 min at 37°C, after which 4 x 1011 pfu of M13K07 helper phage were added. Aliquots were induced by adding 0.004% IPTG, 2% glucose or nothing and incubated for 1 hr. Then 150 ml of 2xYT media plus 70 μg/ml of kanamycin were added and the cells were further incubated for 4 hr at 37°C.
Phagemid particles were PEG precipitated, collected by centrifugation and resuspended in 4 ml of media. The titer of each was 2 x 1012 pfu/ml. The total number of recombinants was 8 x 107.
The inserted synthetic oligonucleotides for the TSAR-13 library had a potential coding complexity of 2024 (1.68 x 1031) and since 1012 molecules were used in each transformation experiment, each member of the library should be unique.
6.12. CONSTRUCTION OF PHAGE VECTORS
To express the TSAR-14 library, a member of the TSAR-9 library, as described in Section 6.9.1 and its subsections, above, was modified by cutting -out the polylinker using Eco RI and Hind III and inserting pUClβ polylinker (previously modified by deleting the Xba I site) to produce blue plaques.
6.12.1. EXPRESSION OF THE TSAR-14 PHAGE LIBRARY
The synthesized oligonucleotides were then ligated to Xba I, Xho I double digested m666 containing the pIII gene as described for the TSAR-9 library. The ligated DNA was then introduced into E. coli cells by electroporation.
6.13. PREPARATION OF THE R8C LIBRARY
A randon peptide expression library, termed R8C was prepared as depicted in Figure 11. The
oligonucleotide assembly process depicted in Figure 11 predominantly yields an expressed peptide with a random 8-mer sequence, comprising the following amino acid sequence expressed at the amino terminus of pIII:
SSC(X)8CGSR (SEQ ID NO: 208). However, a percentage of the library contains a double insert resulting in
expression of a peptide with a random 16-mer sequence (see Figure 12), comprising the following amino acid sequence expressed at the amino terminus of pIII:
SSC(X)8CGSRST(X)8TTR... (SEQ ID NO: 209). 6.14. IDENTIFICATION OF LIGAND BINDING TSARS
In several series of experiments, the TSAR-9, TSAR-12, TSAR-13, TSAR-14, R8C, and R26 libraries
described above were screened for expressed
proteins/peptides having binding specificity for a variety of different ligands of choice.
6.14.1. METHODS FOR SCREENING
The following methods were employed to screen the libraries, except as otherwise noted.
The ligand of choice was conjugated to magnetic beads, obtained from one of two sources: Amine
Terminated particulate supports, #8-4100B (Advanced
Magnetics, Cambridge, MA) and Dynabeads M-450,
tosylactivated (Dynal, Great Neck, NY) , according to the instructions of the manufacturer. To block any unreacted groups and non-specific binding to the beads, the beads were incubated with excess bovine serum albumin (BSA). The beads were then washed with numerous cycles of suspension in PBS-0.05% Tween® 20, and recovered with a strong magnet. The beads were then stored at 4°C until needed.
In the -screening experiments, 1 ml of library was mixed with 100 μl of resuspended beads (1-5 mg/ml). The tube contents were tumbled at 4°C for 1-2 hrs. The magnetic beads were then recovered with a strong magnet and the liquid was removed by aspiration. The beads were then washed by adding 1 ml of PBS-0.05% Tween ®20, inverting the tube several times to resuspend the beads, drawing the beads to the tube wall with the magnet and removing the liquid contents. The beads were washed repeatedly 5-10 additional times. Fifty μl of 50 mM glycine-HCl (pH 2.2), 100 mg/ml BSA solution were added to the washed beads to denature proteins and release bound phage. After 5-10 minutes, the beads were pulled to the side of the tubes with a strong magnet and the liquid contents then transferred to clean tubes. To the tubes, 100 μl 1 M Tris-HCl (pH 7.5) or 1 M NaH2PO4 (pH 7) was added to neutralize the pH of the phage sample. The phage were then serially diluted from 10-3 to 10-6 and aliquots plated with E. coli DH5αF' cells to determine the number of plaque forming units of the sample. In certain cases, the platings were done in the presence of XGal and IPTG for color discrimination of plaques (i.e., lacZ+ plaques are blue, lacZ- plaques are white). The titer of the input samples was also determined for comparison (dilutions were generally 10-6 to 10-9).
Successful screening experiments have generally involved 3 rounds of serial screening conducted in the following manner. First, the library was screened and the recovered phage rescreened immediately. Second, the phage that were recovered after the second round were plate amplified, according to Maniatis. The phage were eluted into SMG buffer (100 mM NaCl, 10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.5, 10 mM MgCl2, 0.05% gelatin), by overlaying the plates with ~5 ml of SMG buffer and incubating the plates at 4°C overnight. Third, a small aliquot was then taken from the plate and rescreened. The recovered phage were then plated at a low density to yield isolated plaques for individual analysis.
The individual plaques were picked with a toothpick and used to inoculate cultures of E. coli F cells in 2xYT. After overnight culture at 37°C, the cultures were then spun-down by centrifugation. The liquid supernatant was then transferred to a clean tube and served as the phage stock. Generally, it has a titer of 1012 pfu/ml which is stable at 4°C. Individual phage aliquots were then retested for their binding to the ligand coated beads and their lack of binding to other control beads (i.e., BSA coated beads, or beads
conjugated with other ligand).
The present invention is not to be limited in scope by the specific embodiments described herein.
Indeed, various modifications of the invention in
addition to those described herein will become apparent to those skilled in the art from the foregoing
description and accompanying figures. Such modifications are intended to fall within the scope of the appended claims.
Various publications are cited herein, the disclosures of which are incorporated by reference in their entireties.

Claims

WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:
1. A pharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a nucleic acid encoding a protein, said protein comprising a binding domain which binds to a ligand of choice, in which the nucleotide sequence encoding said binding domain is a sequence identified by a method comprising screening a library of recombinant vectors, said vectors
comprising unpredictable nucleotides arranged in one or more contiguous
sequences; and
(b) a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
2. The composition of claim l where the total number of unpredictable nucleotides is greater than or equal to about 15 and less than or equal to about 600.
3. A pharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a nucleic acid encoding a protein, said protein comprising a binding domain which binds to a ligand of choice, in which the nucleotide sequence encoding said binding domain is a sequence identified by a method comprising screening a library of recombinant vectors, said vectors encoding a plurality of heterofunctional fusion polypeptides, said fusion polypeptides comprising:
(i) a binding region encoded by a first oligonucleotide comprising unpredictable nucleotides in which the unpredictable
nucleotides are arranged in one or more contiguous sequences; and (ii) an effector domain encoded by a second oligonucleotide, said effector domain being a peptide that enhances expression or detection of the binding region; and
(b) a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
4. A pharmaceutical composition comprising: (a) a nucleic acid encoding a protein, said protein comprising a binding domain which binds to a ligand of choice, in which the nucleotide sequence encoding said binding domain is a sequence identified by a method comprising screening a library of recombinant vectors, said vectors encoding a plurality of heterofunctional fusion polypeptides, said fusion polypeptides comprising:
(i) a binding region encoded by a first oligonucleotide comprising unpredictable nucleotides in which the unpredictable
nucleotides are arranged in one or more contiguous sequences and the contiguous sequences are flanked by invariant
residues designed to encode amino acids that confer a desired structure to the binding region; and
(ii) an effector domain encoded by a second oligonucleotide, said effector domain being a peptide that enhances expression or detection of the binding region; and (b) a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
5. A pharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a nucleic acid encoding a protein, said protein comprising a binding domain which binds to a ligand of choice, in which the amino acid sequence of said binding domain is identified by a method comprising screening a chemically synthesized peptide library, in which the
peptides of said library comprise one or more contiguous sequences of unpredictable amino acids, wherein the total number of unpredictable amino acids is greater than or equal to 5 and less than or equal to 25; and
(b) a pharmaceutically acceptable
carrier.
6. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 1 in which the coding strand of the unpredictable
nucleotides comprises the formula (NNB)n+m where
N is A, C, G or T;
B is G, T or C; and
n and m are integers, such that
20 ≤ n + m ≤ 200.
7. The composition of claim 1 in which said nucleic acid is at least part of an expression vector which expresses said nucleic acid in a suitable host cell.
8. The composition of claim 1 in which said nucleic acid comprises terminal sequences at each end which promote homologous recombination with genomic sequences.
9. The composition of claim 1 in which said protein further comprises a nuclear localization signal.
10. The composition of claim 1 in which said protein further comprises a transcriptional activation signal.
11. The composition of claim 1, in which said ligand is selected from the group consisting of a nonionic chemical group, an ion, a metal, a protein or portion thereof, a peptide or portion thereof, a nucleic acid or portion thereof, a carbohydrate, a lipid, a viral particle or portion thereof, a membrane vesicle or portion thereof, a cell wall component, a synthetic organic compound, a bioorganic compound and an inorganic compound.
12. The composition of claim 1, in which said ligand is a ligand which binds to a naturally occurring receptor selected from the group consisting of the variable region of an antibody, an enzyme/substrate binding site, an enzyme/co-factor binding site, a
regulatory DNA binding protein, an RNA binding protein, a binding site of a metal binding protein, a nucleotide fold or GTP binding protein, a calcium binding protein, a membrane protein, a viral protein and an integrin.
13. The composition of claim 1 in which said ligand is selected from the group consisting of a molecule comprising a transcriptional regulatory site on DNA; a transcriptional regulator that binds to a
transcriptional regulatory site on DNA; and a first protein that binds to a second protein, said second protein being a transcriptional regulator that binds to a transcriptional regulatory site on DNA.
14. The composition of claim 13 in which the ligand comprises a transcriptional regulatory site on
DNA.
15. The composition of claim 14 in which the ligand comprises a sequence selected from the group consisting of: the sequence 5'GGGTGGGGATTCCCCATCT3 ' (SEQ ID NO: 135), the sequence 5 'ATGTGGGATTTTCCCATG3 ' (SEQ ID NO: 137), the sequence 5'ATCGTGGAATTTCCTCTG3 ' (SEQ ID NO: 139), and the sequence 5'ACGTCATTGCACAATCTT3 ' (SEQ ID NO: 141).
16. The composition of claim 14 in which the transcriptional regulatory site on DNA is an NF-κB nucleic acid binding site.
17. The composition of claim 16 in which said binding domain binds to an H2κB nucleic acid binding site, but does not substantially bind to an IL-6κB or to an IL-8κB nucleic acid binding site.
18. The composition of claim 16 in which said binding domain binds to an IL-6κB, IL-8κB, and H2κB nucleic acid binding site.
19. The composition of claim 14 in which the transcriptional regulatory site on DNA is selected from the group consisting of a GATA transcription factor nucleic acid binding site, an AP-1 nucleic acid binding site, and an ATF nucleic acid binding site.
20. The composition of claim 13 in which said ligand is NF-κB.
21. The composition of claim 13 in which said ligand is IF-κB.
22. A pharmaceutical composition comprising: (a) a protein comprising a binding domain
which binds to a ligand of choice, in which the amino acid sequence encoding said binding domain is an amino acid sequence identified by a method comprising screening a library of recombinant
vectors, said vectors comprising a
nucleotide sequence encoding unpredictable amino acids arranged in one or more contiguous sequences, wherein the total number of unpredictable amino acids is greater than or equal to 20 and less than or equal to about 200, in which said ligand is selected from the group
consisting of an NF-κB nucleic acid binding site, NF-κB, and IF-κB; and
(b) a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
23. A nucleic acid encoding a protein, said protein comprising a binding domain which binds to a ligand of choice, in which the nucleotide sequence encoding said binding domain is a sequence identified by a method comprising screening a library of recombinant vectors, said vectors comprising unpredictable
nucleotides arranged in one or more contiguous sequences, wherein the total number of unpredictable nucleotides is greater than or equal to 15 and less than or equal to about 600 and in which said protein further comprises a sequence providing for in vivo or intracellular targeting of said protein.
24. The nucleic acid of claim 23 in which said protein further comprises a transcriptional activation sequence.
25. The nucleic acid of claim 23 in which said nucleotide sequence is flanked by sequences which promote homologous recombination with genomic sequences.
26. The nucleic acid of claim 2? in which the coding strand of the unpredictable nucleotides comprises the formula (NNB)n + m where
N is A, C, G or T;
B is G, T or C; and
n and m are integers, such that
20 ≤ n + m ≤ 200.
27. The nucleic acid of claim 23 in which said sequence providing for targeting is a nuclear
localization sequence.
28. The nucleic acid of claim 23 in which said ligand is selected from the group consisting of a
molecule comprising a transcriptional regulatory site on DNA; a transcriptional regulator that binds to a
transcriptional regulatory site on DNA; and a first protein that binds to a second protein, said second protein being a transcriptional regulator that binds to a transcriptional regulatory site on DNA.
29. The nucleic acid of claim 28 in which the ligand comprises a transcriptional regulatory site on DNA.
30. The nucleic acid of claim 29 in which the ligand comprises a sequence selected from the group consisting of: the sequence 5' GGGTGGGGATTCCCCATCT3 ' (SEQ ID NO: 135), the sequence 5 'ATGTGGGATTTTCCCATG3 ' (SEQ ID NO: 137), the sequence 5'ATCGTGGAATTTCCTCTG3 ' (SEQ ID NO: 139), and the sequence 5 'ACGTCATTGCACAATCTT3 ' (SEQ ID NO: 141).
31. The nucleic acid of claim 29 in which the transcriptional regulatory site on DNA is an NF-κB nucleic acid binding site.
32. The nucleic acid of claim 31 in which said binding domain binds to an H2κB nucleic acid binding site, but does not substantially bind to an IL-6κB or to an IL-8κB nucleic acid binding site.
33. The nucleic acid of claim 31 in which said binding domain binds to an IL-6κB, IL-8κB, and H2κB nucleic acid binding site.
34. The nucleic acid of claim 29 in which the transcriptional regulatory site on DNA is selected from the group consisting of a GATA transcription factor nucleic acid binding site, an AP-1 nucleic acid binding site, and an ATF nucleic acid binding site.
35. The nucleic acid of claim 23 in which said ligand is NF-κB.
36. The nucleic acid of claim 23 in which said ligand is IF-κB.
37. A method of modifying transcription of one or more genes of interest comprising delivering to a cell which is capable of expressing one or more genes of interest a composition comprising a nucleic acid encoding a protein, said protein comprising a binding domain which binds to a ligand of choice, in which the nucleotide sequence encoding said binding domain is a sequence identified by a method comprising screening a library of recombinant vectors, said vectors comprising unpredictable nucleotides arranged in one or more
contiguous sequences, wherein the total number of
unpredictable nucleotides is greater than or equal to 15 and less than or equal to about 600; in which said ligand is selected from the group consisting of a molecule comprising a transcriptional regulatory site on DNA, a DNA binding protein that is a transcriptional regulator, and a protein that binds to said DNA binding protein.
38. The method of claim 37 which is carried out in vitro.
39. The method of claim 37 which is carried out in vivo, in which said delivering is carried out by administering said composition to a subject.
40. The method of claim 37 in which said ligand comprises a transcriptional regulatory site on DNA.
41. The method of claim 40 in which the ligand comprises a sequence selected from the group consisting of: the sequence 5' GGGTGGGGATTCCCCATCT3 ' (SEQ ID NO:
135), the sequence 5 'ATGTGGGATTTTCCCATG3 ' (SEQ ID NO:
137), the sequence 5'ATCGTGGAATTTCCTCTG3 ' (SEQ ID NO:
139), and the sequence 5'ACGTCATTGCACAATCTT3 ' (SEQ ID NO: 141).
42. The method of claim 40 in which the transcriptional regulatory site on DNA is an NF-κB nucleic acid binding site.
43. The method of claim 42 in which said binding domain binds to an H2κB nucleic acid binding site, but does not substantially bind to an IL-6κB or to an IL-8κB nucleic acid binding site.
44. The method of claim 42 in which said binding domain binds to an IL-6κB, IL-8κB, and H2κB nucleic acid binding site.
45. The method of claim 40 in which the transcriptional regulatory site on DNA is selected from the group consisting of a GATA transcription factor nucleic acid binding site, an AP-1 nucleic acid binding site, and an ATF nucleic acid binding site.
46. The method of claim 37 in which said ligand is a protein that is a transcriptional regulator that binds to a transcriptional regulatory site on DNA.
47. The method of claim 37 in which said ligand is a first protein that binds to a second protein, said second protein being a transcriptional regulator that binds to a transcriptional regulatory site on DNA.
48. The method of claim 37 in which said protein, when expressed in a suitable cell, inhibits transcription of one or more genes of interest.
49. The method of claim 37 in which said protein, when expressed in a suitable cell, increases transcription of one or more genes of interest.
50. The method of claim 46 in which said transcriptional regulator is NF-κB.
51. The method of claim 47 in which said ligand is IF-κB .
52. The method of claim 37 in which said protein further comprises a nuclear localization signal.
53. The method of claim 37 in which said protein further comprises a transcriptional activation signal.
54. A method of modifying transcription of one or more genes of interest comprising delivering to a cell which is capable of expressing one or more genes of interest a composition comprising a nucleic acid encoding a protein, said protein comprising a binding domain which binds to a ligand of choice, in which the amino acid sequence of said binding domain is identified by a method comprising screening a chemically synthesized peptide library, in which the peptides of said library comprise one or more contiguous sequences of unpredictable amino acids, wherein the total number of unpredictable amino acids is greater than or equal to 5 and less than or equal to 25; in which said ligand is selected from the group consisting of a molecule comprising a
transcriptional regulatory site on DNA, a DNA binding protein that is a transcriptional regulator, or a protein that binds to said DNA binding protein.
55. A therapeutic method comprising administering to a subject a therapeutically effective amount of any one of the pharmaceutical compositions of claims 1-22.
56. A method for identifying a nucleic acid that encodes a peptide which binds to a ligand of choice, comprising screening a library of recombinant vectors which express a plurality of proteins comprising a binding domain encoded by an oligonucleotide, said oligonucleotide comprising unpredictable nucleotides, in which the unpredictable nucleotides are arranged in one or more contiguous sequences, wherein the total number of unpredictable nucleotides is greater than or equal to about 15 and less than or equal to about 600; in which said screening is done by a method comprising (a)
contacting the plurality of proteins with said ligand of choice under conditions conducive to ligand binding, in which the ligand of choice is selected from the group consisting of a molecule comprising a transcriptional regulatory site on DNA, a DNA binding protein that is a transcriptional regulator, and a protein that binds to said DNA binding protein.
57. The method of claim 56 in which said ligand comprises a transcriptional regulatory site on DNA.
58. The method of claim 57 in which the ligand comprises a sequence selected from the group consisting of: the sequence 5'GGGTGGGGATTCCCCATCT3 ' (SEQ ID NO:
135), the sequence 5'ATGTGGGATTTTCCCATG3 ' (SEQ ID NO: 137), the sequence 5'ATCGTGGAATTTCCTCTG3 ' (SEQ ID NO: 139), and the sequence 5'ACGTCATTGCACAATCTT3 ' (SEQ ID NO: 141).
59. The method of claim 57 in which the transcriptional regulatory site on DNA is an NF-κB nucleic acid binding site.
60. The method of claim 59 in which said binding domain binds to an H2κB nucleic acid binding site, but does not substantially bind to an IL-6κB or to an IL-8κB nucleic acid binding site.
61. The method of claim 59 in which said binding domain binds to an IL-6κB, IL-8κB, and H2κB nucleic acid binding site.
62. The method of claim 57 in which the transcriptional regulatory site on DNA is selected from the group consisting of a GATA transcription factor nucleic acid binding site, an AP-1 nucleic acid binding site, and an ATF nucleic acid binding site.
63. The method of claim 56 in which said ligand is a DNA binding protein that is a transcriptional regulator.
64. The method of claim 56 in which said ligand is a protein that binds to said DNA binding protein.
65. A method for identifying a peptide which binds to a ligand of choice, comprising screening a chemically synthesized peptide library, in which the peptides of said library comprise one or more contiguous sequences of unpredictable amino acids, wherein the total number of unpredictable amino acids is greater than or equal to 5 and less than or equal to 25; in which said screening is done by a method comprising (i) contacting the plurality of peptides with said ligand of choice under conditions conducive to ligand binding, in which the ligand of choice is selected from the group
consisting of a molecule comprising a transcriptional regulatory site on DNA, a DNA binding protein that is a transcriptional regulator, and a protein that binds to said DNA binding protein, and (ii) recovering a peptide which binds the ligand of choice.
66. The method according to claim 56 in which the coding strand of the unpredictable nucleotides comprises the formula (NNB)n+m where
N is A, C, G or T;
B is G, T or C; and
n and m are integers, such that
20 ≤ n + m≤ 200.
67. The composition of claim 1 or 2 which further comprises a promoter operably linked to the nucleic acid.
68. A protein which binds to an NF-κB nucleic acid binding site, encoded by a nucleic acid identified by the method of claim 56.
69. A method of modifying the activity of one or more genes of interest comprising delivering to a cell which is capable of expressing one or more genes of interest a composition comprising a nucleic acid encoding a protein, said protein comprising a binding domain which binds to (a) said one or more genes of interest, or (b) a protein product encoded by said one or more genes of interest, in which the nucleotide sequence encoding said binding domain is a sequence identified by a method comprising screening a random peptide library.
70. A molecule comprising a peptide having an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of:
Figure imgf000198_0001
Figure imgf000199_0001
or a binding portion thereof.
71. A pharmaceutical composition comprising the molecule of claim 70 and a suitable pharmaceutical carrier.
72. A method of modifying the activity of one or more genes of interest comprising delivering to a cell which is capable of expressing one or more genes of interest a composition comprising a nucleic acid encoding a protein, said protein comprising a binding domain which binds to (i) said one or more genes of interest, or (ii) a protein product encoded by said one or more genes of interest, in which the nucleotide sequence encoding said binding domain is a sequence identified by a method comprising:
(a) screening a random peptide library to identify a preliminary binding domain;
(b) subjecting the preliminary binding domain to a process of directed evolution to identify said binding domain.
73. The method of claim 74 where said binding domain specifically binds an H2κB site.
PCT/US1995/010523 1994-08-18 1995-08-17 Peptide librairies as a source of syngenes WO1996006188A1 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP95929609A EP0777748A1 (en) 1994-08-18 1995-08-17 Peptide librairies as a source of syngenes
AU33308/95A AU3330895A (en) 1994-08-18 1995-08-17 Peptide librairies as a source of syngenes
JP8508213A JPH10504718A (en) 1994-08-18 1995-08-17 Peptide libraries as syngene sources

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US29290294A 1994-08-18 1994-08-18
US51519095A 1995-08-15 1995-08-15
US515,190 1995-08-15
US292,902 1995-08-15

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO1996006188A1 true WO1996006188A1 (en) 1996-02-29

Family

ID=26967630

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US1995/010523 WO1996006188A1 (en) 1994-08-18 1995-08-17 Peptide librairies as a source of syngenes

Country Status (5)

Country Link
EP (1) EP0777748A1 (en)
JP (1) JPH10504718A (en)
AU (1) AU3330895A (en)
CA (1) CA2197864A1 (en)
WO (1) WO1996006188A1 (en)

Cited By (15)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6171820B1 (en) 1995-12-07 2001-01-09 Diversa Corporation Saturation mutagenesis in directed evolution
US6238884B1 (en) 1995-12-07 2001-05-29 Diversa Corporation End selection in directed evolution
WO2001018036A3 (en) * 1999-09-03 2001-06-14 Beth Israel Hospital Methods and reagents for regulating gene expression
US6352842B1 (en) 1995-12-07 2002-03-05 Diversa Corporation Exonucease-mediated gene assembly in directed evolution
US6358709B1 (en) 1995-12-07 2002-03-19 Diversa Corporation End selection in directed evolution
US6361974B1 (en) 1995-12-07 2002-03-26 Diversa Corporation Exonuclease-mediated nucleic acid reassembly in directed evolution
US6537776B1 (en) 1999-06-14 2003-03-25 Diversa Corporation Synthetic ligation reassembly in directed evolution
US6562594B1 (en) 1999-09-29 2003-05-13 Diversa Corporation Saturation mutagenesis in directed evolution
US6713281B2 (en) 1995-12-07 2004-03-30 Diversa Corporation Directed evolution of thermophilic enzymes
US6713279B1 (en) 1995-12-07 2004-03-30 Diversa Corporation Non-stochastic generation of genetic vaccines and enzymes
US6740506B2 (en) 1995-12-07 2004-05-25 Diversa Corporation End selection in directed evolution
US6939689B2 (en) 1995-12-07 2005-09-06 Diversa Corporation Exonuclease-mediated nucleic acid reassembly in directed evolution
US7018793B1 (en) 1995-12-07 2006-03-28 Diversa Corporation Combinatorial screening of mixed populations of organisms
US8853367B1 (en) * 2004-09-15 2014-10-07 The Uab Research Foundation Compositions and methods for modulating rank activities
CN112194706A (en) * 2020-09-30 2021-01-08 广州派真生物技术有限公司 Adeno-associated virus mutant and application thereof

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5338665A (en) * 1991-10-16 1994-08-16 Affymax Technologies N.V. Peptide library and screening method

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5338665A (en) * 1991-10-16 1994-08-16 Affymax Technologies N.V. Peptide library and screening method

Non-Patent Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
BIOCHEMICAL JOURNAL, Volume 301, issued 1994, PINILLA et al., "Investigation of Antibody-Antigen Interactions Using a Soluble, Non-Support-Bound Synthetic Decapeptide Library Composed of Four Trillion (4X 1012) Sequences", pages 847-853. *
BIOCHIMICA ET BIOPHYSICA ACTA, Volume 1072, issued 1991, BAUERLE et al., "The Inducible Transcription Activator NF-kappaB: Regulation by Distinct Protein Subunits", pages 63-80. *
EMBO JOURNAL, Volume 8, Number 12, issued 1989, RISSE et al., "Asymmetrical Recognition of the Palindromic AP1 Binding Site (TRE) by Fos Protein Complexes", pages 3825-3832. *
GENE, Volume 128, Number 1, issued 1993, DeGRAAF et al., "Biochemical Diversity in a Phage Display Library of Random Decapeptides", pages 13-17. *
MOLECULAR AND CELLULAR BIOLOGY, Volume 13, Number 7, issued July 1993, KO et al., "DNA-Binding Specificities of the GATA Transcription Factor Family", pages 4011-4022. *
NATURE, Volume 354, issued 07 November 1991, HOUGHTEN et al., "Generation and Use of Synthetic Peptide Libraries for Basic Research and Drug Discovery", pages 84-86. *
NATURE, Volume 358, issued 23 July 1992, KIM et al., "Retinoblastoma Gene Product Activates Expression of the Human TGF-beta2 Gene Through Transcription Factor ATF-2", pages 331-334. *
ONCOGENE, Volume 9, issued 1994, CHANG et al., "Mechanism of Expression and Role in Transcriptional Control of Proto-Oncogene NFKB-2/LYT-10", pages 923-933. *
PROC. NATL. ACAD. SCI. U.S.A., Volume 90, issued November 1993, MATSUSAKA et al., "Transcription Factors NF-IL6 and NF-kappa B Synergistically Activate Transcription of the Inflammatory Cytokines, Interleukin 6 and Interleukin 8", pages 10193-10197. *
PROC. NATL. ACAD. SCI. U.S.A., Volume 90, issued November 1993, NEEDELS et al., "Generation and Screening of an Oligonucleotide-Encoded Synthetic Peptide Library", pages 10700-10704. *
SCIENCE, Volume 249, issued 27 July 1990, DEVLIN et al., "Random Peptide Libraries: A Source of Specific Protein Binding Molecules", pages 404-406. *

Cited By (20)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6709841B2 (en) 1995-12-07 2004-03-23 Diversa Corporation Exonuclease-mediated gene assembly in directed evolution
US6238884B1 (en) 1995-12-07 2001-05-29 Diversa Corporation End selection in directed evolution
US7018793B1 (en) 1995-12-07 2006-03-28 Diversa Corporation Combinatorial screening of mixed populations of organisms
US6352842B1 (en) 1995-12-07 2002-03-05 Diversa Corporation Exonucease-mediated gene assembly in directed evolution
US6358709B1 (en) 1995-12-07 2002-03-19 Diversa Corporation End selection in directed evolution
US6361974B1 (en) 1995-12-07 2002-03-26 Diversa Corporation Exonuclease-mediated nucleic acid reassembly in directed evolution
US6939689B2 (en) 1995-12-07 2005-09-06 Diversa Corporation Exonuclease-mediated nucleic acid reassembly in directed evolution
US6773900B2 (en) 1995-12-07 2004-08-10 Diversa Corporation End selection in directed evolution
US6696275B2 (en) 1995-12-07 2004-02-24 Diversa Corporation End selection in directed evolution
US6635449B2 (en) 1995-12-07 2003-10-21 Diversa Corporation Exonuclease-mediated nucleic acid reassembly in directed evolution
US6713279B1 (en) 1995-12-07 2004-03-30 Diversa Corporation Non-stochastic generation of genetic vaccines and enzymes
US6713281B2 (en) 1995-12-07 2004-03-30 Diversa Corporation Directed evolution of thermophilic enzymes
US6171820B1 (en) 1995-12-07 2001-01-09 Diversa Corporation Saturation mutagenesis in directed evolution
US6713282B2 (en) 1995-12-07 2004-03-30 Diversa Corporation End selection in directed evolution
US6740506B2 (en) 1995-12-07 2004-05-25 Diversa Corporation End selection in directed evolution
US6537776B1 (en) 1999-06-14 2003-03-25 Diversa Corporation Synthetic ligation reassembly in directed evolution
WO2001018036A3 (en) * 1999-09-03 2001-06-14 Beth Israel Hospital Methods and reagents for regulating gene expression
US6562594B1 (en) 1999-09-29 2003-05-13 Diversa Corporation Saturation mutagenesis in directed evolution
US8853367B1 (en) * 2004-09-15 2014-10-07 The Uab Research Foundation Compositions and methods for modulating rank activities
CN112194706A (en) * 2020-09-30 2021-01-08 广州派真生物技术有限公司 Adeno-associated virus mutant and application thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
AU3330895A (en) 1996-03-14
CA2197864A1 (en) 1996-02-29
EP0777748A1 (en) 1997-06-11
JPH10504718A (en) 1998-05-12

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7008780B2 (en) Chimeric DNA-binding proteins
US6326166B1 (en) Chimeric DNA-binding proteins
EP0781331B1 (en) Improvements in or relating to binding proteins for recognition of dna
US6015561A (en) Antigen binding peptides (abtides) from peptide libraries
JP4012243B2 (en) Zinc finger protein derivatives and methods therefor
EP0973391B1 (en) Endoderm, cardiac and neural inducing factors
US6627405B1 (en) 53BP2 complexes
WO1996006188A1 (en) Peptide librairies as a source of syngenes
US20090029468A1 (en) Zinc finger binding domains for cnn
JP2002502238A (en) Nucleic acid binding polypeptide library
JP2005500061A5 (en)
JPH08506487A (en) Total synthetic affinity reagent
JP2001514007A (en) Chimeric transcription activators and compositions and uses related thereto
JP2002500518A (en) Human c-Maf composition and method of using the same
KR101161923B1 (en) Atap peptides, nucleic acids encoding the same and associated methods of use
US5986055A (en) CDK2 interactions
JP2002510490A (en) LYST protein complex and LYST interacting protein
JPH11503011A (en) Conditional expression system
JP2009504156A (en) Zinc finger binding domain for CNN
US20030023034A1 (en) p27 (Kip1) -FKBP-12 protein complexes
JP2002514893A (en) Rapamycin-based regulation of biological events
WO2001018036A2 (en) Methods and reagents for regulating gene expression
US20020099171A1 (en) Endoderm, cardiac and neural inducing factors - xenopus frazzled (frzb-1) protein
US20040106565A1 (en) Gene expression, genome alteration and reporter expression in myofibroblasts and myofibroblast-like cells
Iler A role for homeodomain proteins in the regulated expression of Wnt-1 and Wnt-5a during murine embryogenesis

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AM AU BB BG BR BY CA CN CZ EE FI GE HU IS JP KG KP KR KZ LK LR LT LV MD MG MK MN MX NO NZ PL RO RU SG SI SK TJ TM TT UA UZ VN

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): KE MW SD SZ UG AT BE CH DE DK ES FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN ML MR NE SN TD TG

DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2197864

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1995929609

Country of ref document: EP

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1995929609

Country of ref document: EP

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Ref document number: 1995929609

Country of ref document: EP